Key Quotes on Colors and Visualisation,
Creative Imagination, Meditation
DESTINY OF NATIONS, p. 105
I cannot give you the relation of the planetary centres to the human
being. Too much knowledge would be given too soon and prior to the time when
there is enough love present in human nature to offset the possible misuse of
energy with its often disastrous consequences.
The colours, [Page 106] the
mathematical rate of the higher vibrations which emanate from the centres —
individual and planetary — and the quality (esoterically understood) of the
energies must be the subject of human research and self-ascertained. The clues
and the hints have been given in the Ageless Wisdom. The slower method of
research is the safer at present. Early
in the next century, an initiate will appear and will carry on this teaching.
DESTINY OF NATIONS, p. 122
Again, when the sixth ray disciple attempts to use the new incoming
energies, they express themselves for him upon the astral plane and the result
is astral magic, deepened glamour and pronounced deception. To this fact must be ascribed today the
appearance of teachers, claiming to teach magic, to bring about certain magical
results, to work with rays of differing
colours and to utilise Words of Power, to pronounce decrees and to be
repositories of the hitherto unrevealed wishes and secrets of the Masters of
the Wisdom. It is all a form of astral
glamour, and the contacting upon the astral plane of that which will later
precipitate upon earth.
DINA I, page 9
You need to remember that I look at my groups of disciples always
subjectively and as a group. It is the total radiance which I see; it is the
united rhythm which I note and the united
tone and colour; it is the sound they collectively emit which I hear.
DINA I, page 89-91
The secret of all true
meditation work in its earlier stages is the power to visualise. This is the first
stage to be mastered. Disciples should lay the emphasis upon this process; in it lies eventually the ability to use
the creative powers of the imagination, plus mental energy, as a measure to
further the ends of the Hierarchy and to carry out the Divine Plan. All the
new processes in meditation techniques (for which the New Age may be
responsible) must and will embody visualisation
as a primary step for the following reasons:
1. Visualisation is the
initial step in the demonstration of the occult law that "energy follows
thought." This, of course, everyone interested in occult study recognises
theoretically. One of the tasks confronting disciples is to achieve factual
knowledge of this. Pictorial
visualisation (which is a definite feature of the work in many esoteric
schools) is simply an exercise to bring about the power to visualise. In the
work of those disciples who are being trained for initiation, this external
aspect of visualisation must give place to an interior process which is the
first step towards the direction of energy. The visualising of pictures is
intended to focus the aspirant within the head at a point midway between the pituitary
body and the pineal gland. In that area, he draws pictures and paints scenes
and thus acquires facility to see—in large and in detail—that which he desires
and for which he intends to work. The visualising of what might be called
"directed process" goes on in a more focussed manner and in the area
directly around the pineal gland. The pineal gland then becomes the centre of a
magnetic field which is set in motion—in the first place—by the power of
visualisation. At that point, energy is gathered by the disciple and then
directed with intention to one or other of the centres. This focussed thought
produces inevitable effects within the etheric body and thus two aspects of the
creative imagination are brought into play.
2. The power to visualise is the
form-building aspect of the creative imagination. This process falls into three
parts, corresponding somewhat to the creative process followed by Deity Itself:
a. The gathering
of qualified energy within a ring-pass-not.
b. The focussing
of this energy under the power of intention, i.e., at a point in the
neighbourhood of the pineal gland.
The energy is now focussed and not diffused.
c. The despatch
of this focussed energy by means of a pictorial process (not by an act of
the will at this time) in any desired
direction—that is, to certain centres in a certain order. This process of
energy direction can become a spiritual habit if disciples would begin to do it
slowly and gradually. At first, the visualising
process may seem to you to be laboured and profitless but, if you
persevere, you will find eventually that it becomes effortless and effective.
This is one of the most important ways in which a Master works; it is
essential, therefore, that you begin to master the technique.
The stages are:
a. A process of energy
gathering.
b. A process of focalisation.
c. A process of distribution or direction.
The disciple learns to do this within himself
and later to direct the energy (some chosen and particular kind, according to
the demand of the occasion) to that which lies without himself. This
constitutes, for example, one of the major healing techniques of the future. It
is also used by the Master in awakening His disciple to certain states of
consciousness, but with these you have naught to do.
3. The power to visualise
correctly is one definite mode of ascertaining truth or falsity. This is a
statement difficult for you to comprehend. Visualisation
is literally the building of a bridge between the emotional or astral plane and
the mental level and is, therefore, a personality correspondence to the
building of the antahkarana. The astral plane, the second aspect of the
personality, is the correspondence to the form-building aspect of the Trinity,
the second aspect. The creative imagination "pictures a form" through
the ability to visualise and the thought energy of the mind gives life and
direction to this form. It embodies purpose. Thereby a rapport or line of
energy is constructed between the mind and the astral vehicle and it becomes a
triple line of energy when the soul of the disciple is utilising this creative
process in some planned and definitely constructive manner.
This
visualising process and this use of the imagination form the first two steps in
the activity of thoughtform building. It is with these self-created
forms—embodying spiritual ideas and divine purpose—that the Masters work and
hierarchical purpose takes shape. Therefore, my disciples, it is essential that
you begin with deliberation and slowly to work in this manner and to use the
above information constructively and creatively.
DINA I, Page 171
The fusion must, therefore, be made between the mind and the brain,
each of which expresses one of the two major energies. That fusion already
partially exists. When it is consummated, the mental goal of harmony through
conflict will be superseded by the inflow of love, working with power through
the brain and (incidentally) your general physical health will speedily
improve. How shall this be brought about, my brother? The first stage is one of
real difficulty, particularly to first ray people. It comes through the power
of visualisation. That is why ritual is of value to such as you and
Masonry—being on the first ray and
emanating, consequently, from Shamballa—aids the process of visualisation. It gives
colour and performance [Page 172] of a tangible kind to inner, subjective
activity. Visualisation is a powerful agent in the evocation of the creative
imagination.
DINA I, page 213
3. Then, still holding the consciousness in the head and visualising a sphere of deep electric blue, vivid and
living, say the following words, endeavouring to realise their significance as
you say them:
DINA I, page 224
One of the glamours which controls you is that of the highest level of
the astral plane. One of the Masters has called it "the glamour of the rose of aspiration as it pours
through the solar plexus and not through the heart." Another is the
glamour of the Burning Ground which can so engross the attention of the
disciple or the initiate that his spiritual place thereon, the results of the
clarifying fires and the heat of purification become the all-absorbing theme of
the personality and, brother of mine, the personality must be lost to sight in
the "glory of the One."
DINA I, page 251
5. See these mountains, standing on either hand, one in the shade and
the other in the light. See the narrow way between as a golden pathway. Then picture yourself as "passing
between." As you do this remember that your soul is observing you, the
personality, progressing on this Middle Way.
DINA I, page 283
The development of certain types of people demonstrates through their
control of force. With other types it shows in their control of the time factor
and their ability to understand the practical significance of times and seasons,
and their right and regulated use. You belong to this latter group, and in
achievement along this line will come for you release and the establishment of
beauty. There is a mystical beauty to be achieved, as we all know, through art.
It conveys a general sense of beauty, colour and inspiration, and thus it
clothes and veils ideas. There is an occult (hidden) beauty also to be achieved
in the field of art. This conveys a different sense of beauty, colour and
inspiration, clothed in those forms which reveal ideas. Mystical beauty veils,
in beauty, the ideal. Occult beauty reveals, in beauty, the ideal. For you the
occult achievement must be the goal, and the revelation of ordered beauty in
time and space must constitute your synthetic effort. Ponder [Page 284] on
these words and definitions, for in them is to be found the secret of true
creativeness. Meditate upon the distinctiveness of mystical inspiration and
occult revelation and on their synthesis in all great achievement.
DINA I, Page 287
—the mystic truth ever lurks in its fullness, the vision of colour and
harmony is ever to be found, and the ideal can be seen undergoing the process
of materialisation. The blending, merging and fusing of the subjective beauty
and the outer beautiful reality is your daily task. Those who, like you, are
intuitive, must train themselves to be interpreters. The task of the
interpreter of reality and of beauty should increasingly drive you into
organised and planned activity.
DINA I, Page 295
Speaking symbolically, the Path of Discipleship is now real to you; the
hitherto dim and distant portals of the Golden Gate which lie ahead are not so
dim and distant.
DINA I, Page 303
a. Imagine a path of golden light, leading from where you stand to a vast
two-leaved door.
b. Then see, rolling along this path a disk or
wheel of rose, which you send forth
and which eventually disappears through the door.
c. Then send along the same track a disk of vivid green, and follow it by a disk of
golden yellow, both disappear the
same way.
d. Then send a disk or wheel of a radiant, electric blue, which rolls along the golden Path but which does not enter
through the door but remains there, hiding the door from sight.
e. Picture then yourself as standing before the electric blue disk, having traversed the golden path and there meditating upon the following words: "I am the Way myself, the door am I. I am the golden Path and in the light of my own light I tread the Way: I enter through the door. I turn and radiate."
4. You can then carry forward your own
meditation, though refraining from any use of mantrams and from visualisation
exercises other than those indicated above by me.
DINA I, page 304
1. The breathing exercise.
2. The sounding of the A.U.M.
3. See before your mind's eye the same two-leaved
door, standing wide open. Through it you see a radiant sun of golden light.
4. Instead of sending forth the disks of
coloured light, visualise yourself as standing before this open door.
5. Then say: "May the energy of the
divine self inspire me," and feel your entire nature vitalised by the
spiritual energy, pouring through the open door upon you and through you.
6. Next say: "May the light of the soul
direct," and visualise that light pouring upon your daily path. Bring into
that [Page 305] light your group problems which you may have to solve and face,
and face them and handle them in the light.
7. Finish the rest of the invocation, saying
the words with all the power of your soul behind them. Add the mantram I
earlier gave you: "I am the Way myself, the door am I. I am the golden
Path and in the light of my own light I tread that Way. I enter through the
door. I turn and radiate the light."
DINA I, Page 308
5. Attempt then, as a soul, to link up with
your co-disciples. Having done this, seek then to see the symbol which blazes
forth from the brow of each of them. Each symbol is different. Endeavour to see
these symbols by definitely [Page 309] linking up with and pouring out love to
your brothers. Note down each day the symbol that seems to you to be related to
them.
6. Having done this, repeat rapidly the
process of alignment given in points 1, 2, 3, and then sink back into the stage
of contemplation, holding it as long as you can. Assume imaginatively (if you
cannot in reality) the attitude of a soul as it lives the life of contemplation
in its own world, and endeavour then to see in connection with the following
monthly themes what the soul sees and knows.
DINA I, page 358-359
I suggest that you work with colour
more than with forms of words, such as seed thoughts, or with ideas. You
are a natural occultist and have the key to the realm of ideas and the words of
many books are in your mind. …
a. At your morning meditation visualise a deep
rose-coloured lotus. Build it with
care and from its opening heart see a stream of rosy light (not red) pouring forth, engulfing you and your
co-disciples.
b. At your noon meditation repeat the same
symbolic work but this time with a yellow
lotus.
c. At sunset again repeat the process only
this time your lotus is of a deep
electric blue with its heart a golden
sun.
DINA I, page 385
a. Visualise yourself as standing to one side
of a vast field of closed lotus buds which rest on their broad green leaves. Above you is the blue of heaven and ahead of you—across
the field of buds and leaves and on the far horizon—is a golden gate, with the two halves of its door closed.
b. Then picture yourself as watching the slow
opening of the buds, until little by little, the field changes from green to gold, and all that can be seen
is a mass of golden flowers, wide open in the sun.
c. Then imagine yourself, my brother, putting
a foot upon the field and finding, instead of the mud and water which had been
anticipated, a firm Path which appears before you as you advance, dividing the
field into two halves, and leading straight to the golden gates.
d. As you advance along this path, imagine the
two halves of the gate slowly opening as you go forward in confidence, looking
at the gate and not at your feet.
What you see within that portal and what interpretation you give to
this symbolic work is for you to discover. You may ask: Of what use is this
particular type of meditation to me? Two main uses, my brother. First, it
trains you in the use of the creative
imagination (which is an aspect of the intuition) and, secondly, it lifts
you out of the rut of heavy mundane work with which you are of necessity so
constantly occupied and brings to you refreshment and realisation of
the subjective world.
DINA I , page387 & 388
Preserve your meditation as hitherto, but
change the colour of your field of lotuses from yellow to a deep and vibrant
rose. This will serve to stimulate the astral aura. This
constitutes the third use or purpose of this meditation. … I seek today to
change your meditation work entirely. The focus given by the visualisation work
and exercise with colour and form has done much in the work of inner
adjustment. I seek now to speed up the rhythm of your life so that a
fuller tide of will and purpose may dynamically pour through you.
DINA I, Page 421
The meditation which I would give you has in it these two thoughts of
silence and joy, for these, rightly fostered, mean strength conserved and
magnetic service. Continue the breathing exercise as heretofore, and then
proceed as follows:
1. Withdraw your outgoing consciousness from
the periphery to the point of silence within the head, to the place where the
"gold and the blue meet, blend
and merge."
2. Then endeavour to feel that utter silence.
When you have entered into it and are aware of it, then
3. From that point send forth blessing
a. To your immediate circle of family and
friends.
b. To your co-disciples.
c. To your group of students.
d. To the outer world.
e. To me, your Tibetan Brother.
f. To the New Group of World Servers.
g. To the Hierarchy.
4. Then visualising a vivid golden yellow, ponder on the true significance, value and
reward of silence.
5. Next, visualising a vivid electric blue, ponder on the true significance, value and
reward of joy.
6. Sound the O.M. three times audibly, with
the thought in mind as you sound it, of
a. The cleansing of the aura.
b. The silencing of all discords.
c. The expression of joy.
DINA I, Page 423
In the last meditation outlined by me, I gave you two exercises to do
with colour, and it is this particular work which precipitated the crisis of
the past year. Such was my intention, hard though that may seem. The
meditations which I give to my disciples are full of purpose and are planned to
produce certain effects, if faithfully carried out. I would have you think this
out, and ponder upon the effect of the imposition of tranquillity upon the
astral body. May not the early stages of such imposition work out in potent
agitations which can, in their due time, produce definite physical effects? Tranquillity
is the imposition of a quality of energy upon an agitated force, but—[page 424]
when these two types of force first come into touch with each other—a result,
differing from that expected oft ensues. The achieving also of a tranquil
centre in your environment comes to be recognised by your associates. This, in
the early stages again, may call forth turmoil. I give you these hints, because
when you have absorbed the implications they will lead to the higher
understanding. So little do disciples, even the most intelligent, realise the
effect, in the early stages, of the higher forces upon the lower! They realise
much more clearly the ultimate goal and ideal, but the intermediate steps
remain sealed to them.
DINA I, page 435
5th month—Beauty—Colour is mine.
I claim it for my own, for colour and quality are one. Yet I share with my
fellows.
DINA I, Page 439-440
I want, my brother, to give you a visualisation exercise which may help
you somewhat. Breathing exercises are not advisable in your case nor are they
particularly necessary. I would ask you
for a few minutes each morning (prior to doing the group meditation) to rest
quietly back in your chair or bed and, closing your eyes, link up with your
soul and with me, your friend. You will thus create a triangle of light between
your soul, your head centre and myself. Fix and hold this triangle firmly in
your consciousness through the power of the creative imagination. Then see it
next as a solid triangle of light and not just as an outline. The base of the
triangle is on the [page 440] mental plane where I work and where dwells and
works your soul; the lower point or apex touches the top of your head. Then
see, pouring down, via the triangle, a stream of light, golden in colour and not white. It is more light orange than white.
See this flooding your whole body. When you have visualised this as perfectly
as possible, then rest back in that light and bathe in it as you would bathe in
the waters of the sea. See it permeating every part of your physical equipment
and let it do its work without your having any definite ideas as to what should
be accomplished.
DINA I, page 454
The time comes now in your life wherein you
must conform to the ancient rule and become
the sannyasin, the detached follower
of the Way. You are now in the world but are not of the world; you must now
dwell in that high and secret place where [page 455] divinity is ever sensed.
Some call this the practice of the Presence of God; others regard it as walking
in the light of the soul; still others term it the conscious treading of the
Path. It matters not the name. For you, it is the steady transference out of the heart into the head and
this, I think, you know.
Follow the breathing exercises with care and
with attention. Seek also to strengthen the physical body. For you I suggest
also the following exercise, to be performed at some time convenient to you,
though not at the morning meditation.
1. Take seven long deep breaths, though hold
not the nostril.
2. At each breath, as you inhale, say the
following words: "Power and strength is mine." During the interlude, gather in as much of
the golden-orange prana as you can;
then, as you exhale, send it by an act of the will to the throat centre at the
back of the neck.
3. In the interlude, between exhalation and
the next inhalation (whilst the throat
centre is subjected to golden-orange prana) say: "Let the Word sound
forth through me."
4. Then sound the O.M., very softly.
DINA I, Page 460
Phrase I. For the mind. "Like a golden butterfly which flies in the
face of the sun, I find myself poised upon the lotus petal of the earth. I
hover; I stay a little moment and then I fly—into the golden pathway that leads unto the sun."
Phrase II. For the emotional nature.
"There is no darkness and no fog. There is no night or day. There are no
storms nor peace, no rest nor strife; only the steadfast will of God which
works toward good."
Phrase III. For the physical body. "Down
from the mountain top I come, bringing the light of Life, the life of Light.
Into the chalice of the form I pour that light which life confers, this life
which light sustains. I see this golden light
transform the darkness into day. I see the blue
of life divine pour through the form, healing and soothing. Thus is the
task performed. Thus is a man of earth transformed into a Son of God."
DINA I, Page 462
Meditate upon the following mystic phrases and where colour is
mentioned, visualise the colour.
Phrase One. First and second months. "The
golden rays that issue from the
heart of the sun pour forth and bathe my soul and the soul of all created
forms. Within those forms, the life of God awakens, and the power of God
streams forth as Will, as dedication to the Plan, as strength to work and
give—as must a son of God."
Phrase Two. Third and fourth months.
"Within the darkness of the soul, prisoned within the form, a point of
light is seen. Then there arises, all around that point, a field of deepest blue and this becomes
irradiated by the soul, the inner sun, shining within a brilliant field of blue. The points of light become the many lines
or rays of light; these lines then merge and blend until the lighted Way
appears before the eyes of each tired pilgrim on that Way. He walks in light.
He is himself the light, the light upon the Way. He is the Way and always walks
thereon."
DINA I, Page 480
3rd month—Purification. Let the fires of divinity burn out all dross.
Let the pure gold emerge. Give me
the gold of living love to shower
upon the sons of men.
DINA I, Page 482 and 483 and 484
3. What colour or colours predominated in my
life today? Upon the physical plane—a blaze of sunshine, the grey of a rainy
day, the blue of the sky, the riot
of colour in [page 483] the flowers in a garden or a shop? Upon the astral
plane—the rose of affection and of friendly
feeling, the blue of an inspiring
contact, the gold of physical well
being, the interplay of colours which your emotional nature can be trained
to recognise? …
Ponder upon the words: Beauty, colour,
service, outer relationships, inner linkings. …
I believe that you yourself will have
recognised by now the wisdom of my suggestion and that, through the medium of
your spiritual diary, the true "colour" and quality of your life will
emerge with significance.
DINA, page 505
Etheric weakness also exists
and I suggest to you that in your meditation work you imagine to yourself the
pouring in of divine energy (which is a creative function, my brother) and that
you send it on a mission to the etheric counterpart of the spleen. Find out
from a diagram where the spleen is located; visualise not the
physiological organ but the etheric area surrounding it and picture it as
bathed in pure golden prana.
DINA I, Page 513
As to your garden, my brother, I would ask you to enter into it early
each Sunday morning. See your garden sleeping in the darkness of the dawn—no
real light, no sound or movement and no life apparent. It remains just dreaming
and colourless. Enter your tower and climb to the summit and then release the
light which is in you; this will be to the garden of your soul what the sun is
to the gardens of the world. Watch the rays of light pouring out over the
garden, awakening it to colour and beauty, arousing it to movement and life,
and calling forth the song of the birds and the hum of the bees and evoking it
to a responsive loveliness. There I may meet you when the clouds of glamour
roll away. Ponder on the symbolism hidden in this garden and work steadily for
the next few months from this centre of love and light.
DINA I, page 515
3rd month—The burning
ground whereon pure gold is seen.
DINA I, page 532
1st and 2nd months—The golden light of love irradiates my Path. I am
that Path.
DINA I, page 558
Phrase I. -- Like a golden
butterfly, which flies towards the sun, I find myself poised upon the lotus
petal of the earth. [page 559] Held by the breath of love I hover. I stay a
little moment and then I fly into the golden
pathway which leads into the sun.
DINA I, page 621
Strength is yours, because you have steadily trodden the lonely path of
the disciple. Wisdom is yours and this you use in the helping of the little
ones. Beauty must be now the object of your attention. In meditation, I would
have you meditate upon the twelve-petalled lotus of the heart, visualising it
as a deep rose in colour with a heart of gold. I choose the colour rose, for it
will vitalise the astral counterpart of the heart centre, both in the spine and
in its higher aspect in the head centre. My brother need not infer from this
that he loves not, but the pronounced first
ray type needs what is occultly called "the rose of attachment." They
find easily the way of detachment; they create with facility a protecting shell
and they cherish—with high idealism—their isolation. But when the lesson of
isolation is learnt and detachment is the line of least resistance, then the
Rose of the soul should be nurtured and shine forth. Impersonality is easy for
you. You must now learn to be personal with complete impersonality—a
paradoxical acquirement but one of great value.
DINA I, Page 622
Continue with the meditation last given but use no longer the colour rose but a golden-orange. Blend the
rose and orange and keep the meditation entirely in the heart centre,
remembering that that centre is in the spine, between the shoulder blades.
DINA I, Page 624
The awakening of this compassion should be one
of your objectives in meditation. It will lead to inclusiveness and the power
to "see things as others see them." Your meditation does not now
require the practice of visualisation and the registering of colour. The
ancient pomps and ceremonies of a priestly past lie buried in your
consciousness and are easily evoked; in the thrill of stately ceremonial and of
rhythmic organisation, you find your line of least resistance. The first ray
person is conscious of ordered life, the majesty of ordered forces; the glory
of the intelligent "arrangement" of the powers which lie behind the
manifested world is his rightful field of service.
DINA I, Page 664
This Full Moon work involves the use of the creative imagination, the
cultivation of the power to visualise,
the intensification of the magnetic vibration of the ajna centre, and
consequently of the pituitary body. This establishes a magnetic field for the
interplay of the currents and energies which are brought into action by the
activity of the head centre and of the pineal gland.
DINA I, page 674 THE SUBLIMATION
OF THE FIVE HUMAN STAGES
Stage I.
The life has climbed the stairway long through daily use of form.
Through the lesser three, with progress slow, the long path has been travelled.
Another door stands open now. The words sound forth: "Enter upon the way
of real desire." The life, that
only knows itself as form, enshrouds itself in vivid red, the red of known desire, and through the red all longed-for forms approach, are
grasped and held, used and discarded, until the red changes to rose and rose to palest pink, and pink to
white. Forth flowers then the pure
white rose of life. The tiny rose of
living life is seen in bud; not yet the full blown flower.
Stage II.
The picture changes form. Another voice, coming from close at hand
utters another phrase. The life
continues on its way. "Enter the field where children play and join their
game." Awakened to the game of life, the soul passes the gate. The field is green and on its broad expanse the many forms of the one moving
Life disport themselves; they weave the dance of life, the many patterned forms
God takes. The soul enters "the playground of the Lord" and plays
thereon until he sees the star with five bright points, and says: "My
Star."
Stage III.
The way of red desire fails. It loses its allure. The playground of the
sons of God no longer holds appeal. The voice which has twice sounded from out
the world of form sounds now within the heart. The challenge comes: "Prove
thine own worth. Take to thyself the orange ball of thy one-pointed
purpose." Responsive to the sounded word, the living soul, immersed in
form, emerges from the many forms and hews its onward way. The way of the
destroyer comes, the builder and again the tearer down of forms. The broken
forms hold not the power to satisfy. The soul's own form is now the great
desire, and thus there comes the entering of the playground of the mind. But in these dreams and fantasies, at times a
vision comes—a vision of a folded lotus flower, close petalled, tightly sealed,
lacking aroma yet, but bathed in cold
blue light. Orange and blue in some more distant time will blended be, but far
off yet the date. Their blending bathes the bud in light and causes future
opening. Let the light shine.
Stage IV.
Into the dark the life proceeds. A different voice seems to sound forth.
"Enter the cave and find your own; walk in the dark and on your head carry
a lighted lamp." The cave is dark and lonely; cold is it and a place of
many sounds and voices. The voices of the many sons of God, left playing on the
playground of the Lord, make their appeal for light. The cave is long and
narrow. The air is full of fog. The sound of running water meets the rushing
sound of wind, and frequent roll of thunder.
Far off, dim and most vaguely seen, appears an oval opening, its colour blue. Stretched athwart this space of
blue, a rosy cross is seen, and at
the centre of the cross, where four arms meet, a rose. Upon the upper limb, a
vibrant diamond shines, within a star five-pointed. The living soul drives forward towards the
cross which bars his way to life, revealed and known. Not yet the cross is
mounted and, therefore, left behind. But onward goes the living soul, eyes
fixed upon the cross, ears open to the wailing cries of all his brother souls.
Stage V.
Out into radiant life and light! The cave is left behind; the cross is
overturned; the way stands clear. The word sounds clear within the head and not
within the heart. "Enter again the playground of the Lord and this time
lead the games." The way upon the second tier of stairs stands barred,
this by the soul's own act. No longer red
desire governs all the life, but now the clear blue flame burns strong. Upon the bottom step of the barred
way he turns back and passes down the stairs on to the playground, meeting dead
shells built in an earlier stage, stepping upon forms discarded and destroyed,
and holding forth the hands of helpfulness. Upon his shoulder sits the bird of
peace; upon his feet the sandals of the messenger. Not yet the utter glory of
the radiant life! Not yet the entering into everlasting peace! But still the
work, and still the lifting of the little ones.
DINA I, page 752 and 754
The aura of any form of life can be defined as
the quality of a sphere of radiatory activity. Very little is as yet known
about auras, and a great deal of nonsense has been written anent the matter.
The aura is usually spoken of in terms of colour and of light, due to the
nature of the vision of the one who sees and the apparatus of response which is
in use. Two words only describe an aura from the point of view of occult
knowledge and they are "quality" and "sphere of influence."
What
the clairvoyant really contacts is an impression which the mind rapidly
translates into the symbology of colour, whereas there is no colour present. Seeing
an aura, as it is called, is in reality a state of awareness. That the seer may
in all sincerity believe that he has registered a colour, a series of colours,
or light, is entirely true in many cases, but what he has really recorded is
the quality of a sphere of radiatory activity; this he does when his own
individual sphere of radiatory activity is of the same nature and quality as
that contacted. Most seers register the astral range of vibrations of a person
or a group and this through the medium of their own astral body. The impact of
a truth or of a mental concept and its recognition is an expression of a
similar contact, carried forward this time into the realm of the mind. … I am
only here concerned with the fact of a Master's sphere of radiatory activity
and its peculiar quality and ray colouring (occultly understood).
DINA II, page 16
3. Visualise ahead of you (if I may use so
inadequate a word) a disk or sphere of
indigo blue, a deep electric blue. In the centre of that disk imagine that
I, your Tibetan brother, am standing. My appearance and personality matter not.
4. When you have
visualised me thus standing waiting, then endeavour to see—stretching between
yourself, the group and me—a band of
golden light and know this to be the symbol of the Path which we are all
treading. See this path gradually shortening, thus bringing us closer together,
slowly and steadily, until you enter into the heart of the blue disk.
DINA II, page 21
I would remind you at this point that these seven rays are sharply different
as to colouring and phenomenal effect and, at the same time, I would
remark that—under the Law of Occult Paradox—the seven Lords of Being (the seven
Rays) are widely different but remain non-separative.
DINA II, page 26
1. Centre the consciousness in the head.
2. Imagine yourself as retreating even more
consciously within towards that point of contact where personality-soul and the
teacher in the world of souls can meet and become as one.
3. Then hold yourself as poised and steady as
possible, preserving that detached poise as fully as may be during the
following process which is carried forward silently by the creative activity of
the imagination.
a. Imagine or visualise
yourself as standing before a golden or
ivory door.
DINA II, page 51
3. This leads to a Technique of Approach,
based upon the realisation of the above objectives, to an effort to see me (as
I symbolise for you the spiritual vision), and to the establishing of a pathway
of Approach, symbolised in the ritual I gave you as a golden band of light. This you were to visualise as extending
between yourselves, as a group, to your Tibetan brother. This pathway of
Approach is the Path which it is planned should constitute a more familiar
symbol than has hitherto been the case in the religious life of the race.
4. This pathway of light leads to the heart of a dark blue disk at the very
centre of which you were told I could be contacted. Those of you who are in any
way adept at meditation work know well that the light in the head—when seen and
[Page 52] recognised—passes usually through three stages of intensification:
a. It is, first of all, a diffused light,
surrounding the head, discovered later within the head and producing an inner
radiance, which is the rudimentary halo.
b. This diffused light then consolidates and
becomes an inner radiant sun.
c. Finally, at the centre of that sun, a point of dark blue, or a small indigo disk,
appears. This is, in reality, the exit in the head through which the soul
passes out of the world of phenomenal existence, and it is the symbol of the
path or the door into the kingdom of God. This is the symbolical interpretation
of the phenomena.
As the group approaches nearer and nearer to
reality, the pathway or the band of light shortens (symbolically) and in time,
when you are expert in this work and when your spiritual nature is truly
intensified, you will enter almost immediately into, or through, the disk of blue and become aware of
the higher consciousness, or divinity.
5. Three things are, at this stage, essential
to success:
a. The mind must be "held steady in the
light," and for this receptive experience all the previous work in
meditation has been essential. Its positive, attentive activity has been an
essential factor in producing the desired mind control.
b. The
creative imagination, involving as it does the power to visualise, has also to
be developed and consciously used in obedience to instruction in the early
stages. This obedience has to be rendered voluntarily, even though blindly,
before the true objectives can be grasped.
c. Results must be expected and an inner
sensitivity developed which will eventually obviate surprise and lead to a
conscious recognition of achievement. This sensitivity may differ according to
ray and [Page 53] type, but the general indications will be in the field of
similarity and of group value.
DINA II, page 55
I explained to you, if you will remember, that
at the time of the full moon it was as if a door was opened between the Sun and
Moon, making certain events of a spiritual nature possible. The band of golden light, extending between the Sun
and the Moon, completely "irradiated the lunar surface" (to use the
ancient formula) and made possible certain revelations. To students such as
you, the symbolism should be apparent and can be seen as inviting a dual
interpretation:
1. It concerns the relation of the Solar Angel
to the lunar forces, of the Sun and the Moon and their work in synthesis.
2. It concerns the relation of the Hierarchy
to humanity and consequently, of the subjective world to the objective worlds,
of the realm of causes to the realm of effects.
DINA II, page 73
I am going to change your full moon work a little.
Proceed as heretofore, but as you stand with me before the "open
window"' and prior to the attempt to hear me speak the words which I may
have for you, imagine yourselves as bathed in a vivid butter-coloured living light which is pouring through the open
window and enveloping the group. Note, as this happens, which centre responds
or registers the vibration and stimulation or any phenomena of any kind, and
then record this upon your monthly reports. I am also going to change the words
spoken and am choosing phrases which will convey a pictorial connotation to
your minds; in this way the power of visualisation will be evoked and aid you
in registering what I say. Here are the phrases among which I shall choose one
for each full moon contact.
1. The golden
lotus of the heart. 7.
The triangle of fire.
2. The burning ground of fiery red. 8.
The golden way to God.
3. The mountain top, bathed in the morning
sunrise. 9. The ocean and the
rocky shore.
4. The uplifted hand. 10. The
silver torch.
5. The equal four-armed cross. 11.
The iridescent cube.
6. The open door. 12.
The burning bush.
I shall picture these to you and name them in your hearing. Note
whether you can both see and hear.
DINA II, page 124
6. Then focus yourself in the heart, believing that a triangle of
energy has been formed between the head, the heart and the solar plexus. Vision
it then as composed of the energy of light, something resembling a triangle of neon light. The colour of this neon light so-called will be dependent upon the ray of the soul.
DINA II, page 127
1. At the time of the Full Moon (covering five
days) picture to yourselves an ocean of
blue and upon the horizon can be seen slowly rising a blazing sun.
2. Picture yourself as throwing yourself into
the ocean, free of all encumbrances, worries, anxieties and cares, and as
swimming towards a rowboat, lying midway between you and the rising Sun. As you
swim, you become aware of your group brothers, also swimming in the same
direction. You recognise, know and love each other.
3. Then visualise yourself as climbing into
the boat. When all of the group are in, then see yourselves as each grasping an
oar, and together, rhythmically and steadily, rowing towards the rising Sun.
There is harmony of stroke, of purpose and of direction.
4. Then see—between you and the rising Sun—a
figure moving toward you. It will be myself (the Master D.K.), coming from the
light, in your direction. In the clear pathway of the light you can see me
distinctly. You see me together.
DINA II, page 219
There is much that must be done to change conditions, institute new
values and produce the bringing in of an entirely new civilisation—a
civilisation which will permit the externalisation of the Ashrams, or of the
Hierarchy, and a restitution, therefore, of hierarchical or spiritual control
as it was known in old Atlantean days, only this time on a much higher turn of
the spiral and with the intelligent cooperation also and the wise assistance of
humanity, which was a factor lacking in the earlier civilisation. Once this has
been dealt with in the reflective, concentrated meditation of the individual
aspirant, in the united reflection and meditation of the many spiritually
inclined groups in the world today, and once the New Group of World Servers and
the Hierarchy are working in the closest kind of cooperation, then the
visualisation and the projection of the intended civilisation will have reached
a definite and a most important point of precipitation. Then, the invocative
appeal of the united Hierarchy and of the New Group of World Servers will be
[Page 219] so potent that it will evoke a response from humanity and a cycle of
organisation, of planning and of effective expression will follow. Reflection, meditation and visualisation
will give place to scientific thinking (which is essentially meditation) and to
the needed physical plane activity.
DINA II, Page 222
The Lord of the World,
through meditation, is carrying forward processes which He instituted in His
original, creative meditation—back in the darkest night of the time when [Page
223] He decided to create this planet of ours for strictly redemptive purposes.
The
whole creation is the result of His directed and controlled thought—a process
of sustained thinking which sweeps all the creative energies into evolutionary
and cyclic activity, in conformity to the pattern which He eternally
visualises. He has organised a group which is responsive to His meditative
intention; these Beings aid Him by Their concentrated and realised Purpose to
bring into our planetary livingness certain extra-planetary energies which are
needed to carry forward the planned work of the planetary Logos. Shamballa
itself is also permeated with His thought and conscious (if I may speak
symbolically) of that which the Logos has visualised.
DINA II, Page 223-224
The control and the creative [Page 224]
development of the three lower kingdoms in nature is slowly being taken out of
the hands of the deva evolution (hitherto responsible) and placed under the
supervision of mankind; as it is said in the ancient Archives of the
Masters: "Eventually, the solar
Lords, through manas (the mind) will control the lunar lords of elemental
substance, and not alone their own but that which looks to them for aid. Thus
will redemption come to all through man, and thus the glory of the Lord of Life
be seen."
Focussed intention, concentrated meditation,
visualisation, directed invocation (producing evocation) and leading to
responsive results, are the major processes of creation upon all levels and by
all beings. Prayer, focussed desire, meditation and focussed intention are the
graded and sequential lessons which mankind has to learn. Worship, or
recognition of divine Transcendence and divine Immanence underlies all the mass
recognition of spiritual potency. Thus the meditation of the planet penetrates
into that which lies beyond the planet and is fused and blended in a solar
sense with the Voice of Him Who has brought all into being, and with the Will
of Him Who is carrying all forms of His livingness towards the perfection which
He purposes; in so doing, the great processes of Redemption are furthered, to
which all World Saviours (in relation to humanity) are the symbol, the
guarantee and the eternal testimony.
DINA II, page 229 Stage
II.
1. Ponder on the redemption of humanity through the right use of money.
Visualise the money in the world today as:
a. Concretised energy …
b. Visualise money as a great stream of flowing golden substance, passing out
of the control of the Forces of Materialism into the control of the Forces of
Light.
DINA II, Page 236
Meditation only becomes effective creatively and on all the three
planes in the three worlds when the antahkarana is in process of construction.
The worlds of the personality are the worlds of the third divine aspect and the
creation of thoughtforms therein (as usually carried forward by the concrete
mind) is related to form, to the acquisition of that which is desired and
dedicated largely to the material values. But when a man is beginning to function
as a soul-infused personality and is occupied with the task of rendering
himself sensitive to the higher spiritual impression, then the creative work of
the Spiritual Triad can be developed and a
higher form of creative meditation can be employed. It is a form which each
person has to find and discover for himself, because it must be the expression
of his own spiritual understanding, initiated by a conscious construction or
creation of the antahkarana and subject to impression from the Ashram with
which he may be affiliated.
DINA II, page 305
Formula IV . . . Lead us from
chaos to Beauty.
This formula is presented in the form of a
symbol—one which is in such constant movement that it is most difficult to
describe or to make it live before you.
There lies before the investigator a
square or oblong, composed of a kaleidoscopic mass of inchoate colours,
moving, pulsating and in constant indescribable confusion. Superimposed upon
this square is a radiant sun with a
penumbra composed of the seven prismatic colours; these radiate from the sun in
regular rhythmic bands and produce a marvellous blaze of colour. The
background of the square appears to have its confusion of colours shown of a heavy, brilliant kind and quality; the
scheme of beauty emerging (even if it appears as superimposed) is translucent
and delicate and radiantly living in hue. The heavier background can be
distinctly seen through the translucence. This formula differs according to
the polarisation of the one who visions it and who studies it. If he is
focussed in the personality, and is therefore conditioned by his personality
ray, one type of energy will impinge upon his consciousness; if he is soul
conscious and soul focussed, another type of energy will have its effect. Thus
two different pictures will emerge. Both will be correct, but the interpreting
agent will be different.
This formula, if carefully considered and
studied for a number of years, will become a key form by means of which aspects
of the creative process will come to the attention of the student, plus
revelation as to some of the divine objectives which are wider and of greater
and richer implication than has yet been realised. I would here remind you that
these formulas are not symbols of what already is, but are [Page 306] indicatory
key forms of what may or shall be—a very different matter and one which you
should bear in mind. They are symbols of the future and not of the past; they
are predictive and not consummating; they reveal what is on the way as the
result of the divine thought and are not pictorial presentations of what
already is.
DINA II, page 311
What we are dealing with here, in connection with initiate training, is
the impending realisation for which any opening cycle attests its waiting, and
for the new truths and the expanded spiritual presentations which it is the
destiny of the initiate to bring to the people. You will note that I choose the
word "destiny" in preference to the word "karma" because in
this type of work the initiate is working and practising and progressing under
a Law of Destiny. This law affects the Ashram and the Hierarchy as a whole, and
neither [Page 312] is under the Law of Karma, as usually understood. This Law of Destiny has been brought into
being since the foundation of the Hierarchy on Earth; it is the result of the
pledged and united dedication to service which is the outstanding note of the
united Ashrams. It is therefore a sevenfold law, for it takes on the seven colours of the seven rays,
the seven qualities, modes and methods, techniques and energy expressions of
all the seven rays.
DINA II, page 535
I would recall to you that the disrupting of life processes and the
upheaval of an ordered point of view and of a planned and reasoned approach to
daily living is in a measure a great releasing—a releasing of hidden beauties,
unsuspected and seeking the light of day. Have you not read that the bombing of
London by high explosives produced great upheavals and that ancient layers of
soil—hidden for centuries from the light of day—were brought to the surface? As
a result, strange, rare, unknown and beautiful flowers have this summer
appeared to excite interest and investigation and to hide the ruins with beauty
and colour. Ponder on this, for so
it can be with a human life. Beauty is beginning to flower in your life,
bringing its own responsibilities, engendering its own magnetic field, bringing
to you those who otherwise might not have ventured to come, and who will give
you a love which may at first arouse questioning in your mind but which will
greatly enrich your life. It will also evoke responsibility. This
responsibility will definitely extend your field of service. Be willing,
therefore, to descend into the deep water to which I made reference in the last
of the six statements given to you last year. The higher the wall, brother of
mine, from which you fall, the deeper into the water you will go, and that,
paradoxically, will be your salvation—my beloved brother. Look for this
development and welcome it.
DINA II, page 476
2. The Robe of Rose. The
symbolism here, my brother, is obvious. Rose
is the colour of devotion, and of that quality you have a full supply. It
is however to its magnetic attractive quality, as it affects others rather than
yourself, that I seek to draw your attention. People of pledged devotion are
those who have reached a point where that devotion is in no way a hindrance; it
is seemingly a safeguard, [Page 477] simplifying their lives. Because of that
fixed devotion, they can walk undeviatingly upon the Way. But they are apt to
forget that—equally because of that devotion—they ray forth a quality which
stimulates its correspondence in others. That is why sixth ray people can
easily form a group around themselves. But they seldom succeed in holding those
thus attracted for very long, because they do not understand the reason for
this facility and ascribe it ever to wrong causes.
DINA II, page 479
b. An act of service, wherein you flood the personalities of those you
are seeking to help, with the pure rose
colour (most carefully visualised by you) of spiritual devotion. This
stream of warm rose and radiating
light will esoterically drive them in devotion to their own souls and will not
attract them to you—a thing which is never desirable.
DINA II, Page 573
5. Visualise then a golden band
of light, extending from the soul—via the mind—to the physical brain.
Attempt simultaneously to see a thin thread of light ascending upwards from the
soul towards the Hierarchy, passing through the members of the group.
DINA II, page 647 & 649
2. Between me and the outer world there appears a haze of blue. That blue protects and hence I have no fear. Through
it, I may not pass. … Yet you have not
been truly desperate because the "haze
of blue" has protected you, your group brothers have stood as a shield
around you, and the strength of my Ashram has been at your disposal. People
often fail to realise the nature and the potency of that strength—a strength
that comes from a deep impersonal love and from the realisation that, in the
light of the eternal verities, all pain is but temporary …
DINA II, page 654
The Cross, erected high, reaches from the pinnacle [Page 654] upon
which I stand into the place of light, where dwells my Master. Against that
Cross there rests a ladder. The golden
Cross and the ladder of pure light are one, and by their means I rise.
DINA II, Page 707
Can your imagination picture
to you your reaction when—because you are the leader—you have to shoulder all
the blame for any failure, even when not personally responsible; you have to
accept without retaliation the attacks of those you are trying to help, who
expect too much from you and who force you to live in the blaze of public
opinion; what will you do when your chosen workers fail to understand or prove
disloyal or criticise without warrant or pit their ambitions against you, and
wilfully refuse to see your point of view, and talk about you among other
people and whip up resentments against you—resentments which are probably
without foundation? These are not the kind of things that your personality
easily accepts, and your creative
imagination had better begin dealing with these problems so that the emerging
principles of conduct may stand clear before you.
DINA II, Page 721
In the place of your Sunday morning dedication,
I want to give you four pictures upon which to reflect, seeking to read behind
their symbolism the message of your soul to you, the personality.
I. A quiet sea of midnight blue. Above, the shining, round-faced moon. Across the
sea, a path of light, and moving slowly down that path a little boat
and—smiling, with the oars in hand—H.S.D. is seen.
II. A pillared cloister, dappled with the sun
and broken by the shade cast by the pillars. A garden spreads on either side,
redolent with the smell of many flowers and noisy with the hum of many bees and
gay with butterflies. Ten times a bell rings out. Its tone is deep and clear
and musical. But the one who sits and writes and thinks beneath the cloister's
shade [Page 721] moves not. He writes, and measures to the task assigned.
III. A room in shadow, full of peace and calm,
of books and enterprise. And at the desk, the Master sits and works and thinks,
projecting thought, working within, above and all around, whilst through the
room pass many. It is their right to pass.
IV. A golden
door, wide open to the sun. Before the door lie rocks and bits of stone. A
path winds towards that door, and o'er its lintel are the words: Enter with
calm; speak low and only if a need is there. Enter the stream behind the door
and wash away the stains of travel. Then face the Master, but only when the
quiet of evening light shines forth and all is still within.
DINA II, Page 753
A brief visualisation
exercise and meditation may aid in this process of emergence. It is well to
bear in mind that the dramatisation of the spiritual life leads to creative
appearance, strengthening the will-to-do, directing the desire nature in the
right direction and producing effectiveness in physical plane expression.
EDUCATION IN THE NEW AGE, Page 32
In the above paragraph and its implications
you have a brief and inadequate statement as to the Science of the [Page 33]
Antahkarana. I have endeavoured to
express this in terms, symbolic if you will, which will convey some general
idea of the process to your minds. We can learn much through the use of the
pictorial and visual imagination.
EDUCATION IN THE NEW AGE, Page 147
Though these three energies are woven into one thread finally, yet they
remain distinct. It should be borne in
mind that the soul body is constructed of pure white light, whilst the light
out of which the etheric body is made is golden.
EXT OF HIERARCHY, page 8-9
There are certain psychic powers which men
share in common with the animals; these powers are inherent in the animal body and
are instinctual, but they have, for the vast majority, dropped below the
threshold of consciousness and are unrealised and therefore useless. These are
the powers, for instance, of astral clairvoyance and clairaudience, and the seeing of colours and similar phenomena.
Clairvoyance and clairaudience are also possible on mental levels, and we then
call it telepathy, and the seeing of symbols, for all visioning of geometrical
forms is mental clairvoyance. All these powers are, however, tied up with the
human mechanism or response apparatus, and serve to put the man in touch with
aspects of the phenomenal world for which the response mechanism, which we call
the personality, exists. They are the product of the activity of the divine
soul in man, which takes the form of what we call "the animal soul,"
which really corresponds to the Holy Ghost aspect in the human microcosmic
trinity. All these powers have their [Page 9] higher spiritual correspondences,
which manifest when the soul becomes consciously active and controls its
mechanism through the mind and the brain. When astral clairvoyance and
clairaudience are not below the threshold of consciousness, but are actively
used and functioning, it means that the solar plexus centre is open and active.
When the corresponding mental faculties are present in consciousness, then it
means that the throat centre and the centre between the eyebrows are becoming
"awake" and active. But the higher psychic powers, such as spiritual
perception with its infallible knowledge, the intuition with its unerring
judgment, and psychometry of the higher kind with its power to reveal the past
and the future, are the prerogatives of the divine soul. These higher powers
come into play when the head and heart centres, as well as the throat centre,
are brought into activity as the result of meditation and service.
EXT OF HIERARCHY, page 506-507
The Master Morya is at this time acting as the
inspirer of the great national executives throughout the world. E'en those
whose ideals coincide not with yours are being welded into the world plan, and
much of their immediate work is organising the individual nations and welding
them into an homogeneous whole, preparatory to their entrance into the great
international thoughtform. All who work with far vision and all who hold before
any seething and bewildered nation an ideal for the whole are under His wide
inspiration. Internationalism is the aim of His endeavour. With Him works the
great Angel or Deva of the spiritual plane, referred to in the Treatise on
Cosmic Fire as the Lord Agni; He seeks to touch with the hidden spiritual fire
the head centres of all intuitive statesmen. Three great groups of angels—the gold, the flame coloured and the white
and gold—work on mental levels with those lesser angels or devas who
vitalise thoughtforms and who keep alive the thoughts of the Guides of the race
for the benefit of humanity.
The Master K.H.,
the Chohan on the teaching ray and He Who will be the next world teacher, is
already active in His line of endeavour. He is attempting to transmute the
thoughtform of religious dogma, to permeate the churches with the idea of the
Coming, and bring to a sorrowing world the vision of the Great Helper, the
Christ. He works with the rose devas and
with the blue devas on astral levels, with the wise help of the great
guardian Angel of that plane, called (in Hindu terminology) the Lord Varuna.
The activity of the astral plane is being much intensified and the angels of
devotion, in whom the aspect of divine love is pre-eminent, work with the
astral bodies of all those who are ready to strengthen and redirect their
spiritual aspiration and desire. They are the angels who guard the sanctuaries
of all the churches, cathedrals, temples and mosques of the world. They are now
increasing the momentum of their vibration for the raising of the consciousness
of the attendant [Page 506] congregations. The Master K.H. works also with the
prelates of the great Catholic Churches—Greek, Roman and Anglican—with the
leaders of the Protestant communions, with the foremost workers in the field of
education, and also through, and with, the dominant demagogues and organisers
of the people. His interests lie with all those who, with unselfish intent,
strive after the ideal, and who live for the helping of others.
The Master Jesus
works especially with the masses of the Christian people who inhabit the
occidental countries, and who gather in the churches. He is distinctively a
great leader, an organiser, and a wise general executive. A special group of
devas work under His command, and His connection with all true church leaders
and executives is very close. He acts ceaselessly on the inner esoteric council
of the churches, and with Him the groups of violet angels cooperate. In church matters He Himself carries out
the behests of the Christ, saving Him much and working as His intermediary.
This will seem logical to you, for His destiny is closely interwoven with the
Christian Church and it marks the culmination of His work for the West. No one
knows or understands so fully and wisely as He the problems of the Western
culture, nor the needs of the people who carry forward the destiny of
Christianity.
The Master Hilarion is actively occupied in
the field of America, stimulating the intuitive perception of its people. He
has under observation all those who are true psychics, and who develop their
powers for the good of the community. He controls and transmutes the great
active movements which endeavour to strip the veil from the world of the
unseen. He impresses the minds of those whose vision will justify His effort.
And He has much to do with various psychical research movements throughout the
world. With the aid of certain groups of angels, He works to open up the world
of departed souls to the seeker, and much that has of late convinced the
materialistic world of life beyond has emanated from Him.
EXT OF HIERARCHY, page 508
The angels have ever been active in Biblical
history, and will again enter into the lives of human beings with more power
than has lately been the case. The call has gone out for them again to approach
humanity, and with their heightened vibration and superior knowledge unite
their forces with those of the Christ and His disciples for the helping of the
race. They have, for instance, much to communicate anent colour and sound, and
the effect of these two forces on the etheric bodies of men and animals and
flowers. When what they have to impart is apprehended by the race, physical
ills and sickness will be offset. The group of violet angels or devas who work on the four etheric levels will be
especially active and they will work in the four main groups of men who are in
incarnation at any given time. Four rays dominate at any period, with one of
the four more potent than the other three. You have this idea symbolised in the
four castes in India and you will find also that these four castes are found
universally throughout the planet.
These four groups of angels are a band of
servers, pledged to the service of the Christ, and their work is to contact men
and to teach them along certain lines.
a. They will teach humanity to see
etherically, and this they will do by heightening human vibration by
interaction with their own.
b. They will give instruction in the effect of
colour in the healing of disease, and particularly the efficiency of violet light in lessening human ills
and in curing those physical plane sicknesses which originate in the etheric body.
EXT OF HIERARCHY, page 514
The sacraments, properly understood, serve to
strengthen this link and realisation, and such a one as that of Baptism (when
entered upon with understanding) will draw forth oft a response from the Great
Lord Himself. It is almost as if a golden
strand were directed from His heart to the heart of the servant—a strand unbreakable
and unfathomable and which, with each administration of any of the holy rites
in the succession of lives, becomes stronger, broader and brighter. Eventually
these many strands will become reabsorbed into their source when the Body of
the Christ—one of the seven Heavenly Men on the second or monadic plane—is
completed in full expression, for each one linked to Him becomes, in a vital
sense, a cell in His Body. This the initiate Paul truly sensed and knew. Via
this strand passes the power to strengthen, to stimulate, to vivify and to
bless, and this is the true apostolic succession. All true disciples are
priests unto the Lord.
EXT OF HIERARCHY, page 648-649
The objectives of the Hierarchy in this [Page 648] divine act of massed
impression and stimulation are briefly three, as follows:
3. To stimulate the aspiration in the hearts
of men so that human receptivity to the good, the beautiful and the true may be
greatly increased. These energies will bring in the new creative era, which
will sweep into expression as soon as world tension has subsided; then men will
be free to think and to create the new forms for the new ideals; then they will
bring into manifestation in words, in
colour, in music and in sculptured forms the new revelation and the new world
which the coming of Christ will inaugurate.
EXT OF HIERARCHY, page 666
The problems of barter and exchange, the significance of money, the
value of gold (a basic symbol of the third Ray of Active Intelligence) …
INTELLECT TO INTUITION, Page 171
This light in the head takes various forms, and is often sequential in
its development. A diffused light is
first seen, sometimes outside the head and, later, within the brain, when in
deep thought or meditation; then it becomes more focussed and looks, as some
express it, like a radiant and very brilliant sun. Later, at the centre of the radiance, a point of vivid electric blue appears
(perhaps the "living light" referred to above) and from this a golden pathway of light leads out. This has sometimes been called "the
Path," and there is a possibility that the prophet was not speaking merely
symbolically when he said that "the path of the just is as a shining light
that shineth more and more until the day be with us."
INTELLECT TO INTUITION, Page 223
The next step in the practice
of meditation is the use of the imagination; we picture to ourselves the
threefold lower man, aligned or in direct communication with the soul. There are many ways in which this can be
done. We call it work in
visualization. It would seem that
visualization, imagination and will are
three very potent factors in all creative processes. They are the subjective causes for many of
our objective effects. At the beginning,
visualization is mostly a matter of experimental faith. We know that through the reasoning process,
we have arrived at an understanding that, within and beyond all manifested
objects, there lies an Ideal Object or Ideal Pattern, which is seeking to
become manifest upon the physical plane.
The practice of visualization,
imagination and the use of the will are activities that are calculated to
hasten the manifestation of this Ideal.
When
we visualize, we use our highest conception of what that Ideal might be, clothed in some
sort of material, usually mental, because we are not yet in a position to be
able to conceive of higher forms or types of substance with which to envelop
our Images. When we make a mental
picture, the mental substance of our mind sets up a certain rate of vibration,
which attracts to itself a corresponding grade of mental substance, in which
the mind is immersed. It is the will
which holds this image steady and which gives it life. This process goes on, whether we are, as yet,
able to see it with the mental eye or not.
It does not matter that we are not able to see it, as the creative work
is going on just the same. Perhaps at
some time we shall be able to follow and consciously perform that whole
process.
In connection with this work, at the stage of
the [Page 225] beginner, some people picture the three bodies (the three
aspects of the form nature) as being linked with a radiant body of light, or
they visualize three centres of vibrating energy receiving stimulation from a
higher and more powerful centre; others imagine the soul as a triangle of force
to which is linked the triangle of the lower nature —
linked by the "silver cord" mentioned in the Christian Bible,
the sutratma or thread soul of the Eastern Scriptures, the
"life-line" of other schools of thought. Still others prefer to preserve the thought
of a unified personality, linked to and hiding within itself the indwelling
Divinity, Christ in us, the hope of glory.
It is relatively immaterial what
imagery we choose, provided that we start with the basic idea of the Self
seeking to contact and use the Not-self, its instrument in the worlds of human
expression, and vice versa, with the thought of that Not-self being impelled to
turn itself towards its source of being.
Thus, through the use of the imagination and visualization, the desire
body, the emotional nature, is brought into line with the soul. When this has been done we can continue with
our meditation work. The physical body
and the desire nature, in their turn, sink below the level of consciousness, we
become centred in the mind and seek to bend it to our will.
GLAMOUR, page 8-11
Symbols have to be studied in
three ways:
a.
Exoterically. This involves study of its form as a whole, of its lines, and
therefore of its numerical significance, and also study of its sectional forms—by
which I mean its arrangements, for instance, of cubes, triangles and of stars
and their mutual inter-relation.
b.
Conceptually. This involves arriving at its underlying idea, which may be expressed
in its name; at its [Page 8] meaning as that emerges in the consciousness
through meditation; and at its significance as a whole or in part. You should,
when doing this, bear in mind that the idea connotes the higher or abstract
intent; that the meaning is that intent expressed in terms of the concrete mind;
and that its significance has in it more of an emotional quality and might be
expressed as the type of desire it arouses in you.
c.
Esoterically. This would cover the effect of the force or energy upon you and of the
quality of the vibration it may arouse in you perhaps in some centre, perhaps
in your astral body, or perhaps only in your mind.
this study, rightly undertaken, would lead to the unfoldment of the
intuition, with its consequent manifestation on the physical plane as
illumination, understanding and love.
In the first instance, the objective of the
study of symbolism is to enable the student to sense its quality and to contact that vibrant something which lies
behind that aggregate of line, colour and form of which the symbol is
composed.
To some types of people this study is
relatively easy; to the majority it is not easy at all, thereby indicating a
lack that must be supplied by the use of those faculties at the present
dormant. It is always distasteful to arouse the latent faculties and requires
an effort and a determination not to be swayed by personality reactions. To
many it is not easily apparent how the penetration into the meaning of a symbol
can provide a means whereby the dormant buddhic or intuitional faculty can be
brought into functioning activity. It is a delicate art, this art of symbol
reading, of "spiritual reading," as our ancient master, Patanjali,
[Page 9] calls it. This power to interpret symbols ever precedes true
revelation.
The comprehension of a truth for which a line
or a series of lines composing a symbolic form may stand is not all that has to
be done. A good memory may remind you that a series of lines forming a triangle
or a series of triangles signifies the Trinity, or any series of triplicates
within the macrocosmic or microcosmic manifestation. But that activity and
accuracy of the memory will do naught to awaken the dormant brain cells or call
into play the intuition. It must be remembered (and here becomes evident the
value of a certain amount of technical or academic occultism) that the plane
whereon the intuition manifests and where the intuitional state of
consciousness is active is that of the buddhic or intuitional plane. This plane
is the higher correspondence of the astral or emotional plane, the plane of sensitive
awareness through a felt identification with the object of attention or
attraction. It becomes evident therefore that if the intuitional faculty is to
be brought into activity through the study of symbols, the student must feel
with, or be in some way identified with, the qualitative nature of the symbol,
with the nature of that reality which the symbolic form veils. It is this
aspect of symbolic reading that you are asked to study.
Students should ascertain, therefore, after
due study of the form aspect, what the symbol is doing to them, what feeling it
evokes, what aspirations it arouses, and what dreams, illusions, and reactions
are consciously registered. This stage is an intermediate one between the
exoteric reading of a symbol and the conceptual understanding. There is later
another intermediate stage between conceptual understanding and esoteric
comprehension and application. This latter stage is called "synthetic
recognition." Having studied the form and become aware of its emotional
significance, you pass to the stage of grasping the basic idea [Page 10] of the
symbol, and from thence to a synthetic comprehension of its purpose. …
I would ask you to render not only an
intelligent interpretation of the symbol, but also a recognition of the more subtle
reaction of your sensitive feeling nature to the symbol as a whole. Study a
total of four symbols a year. First, approach the symbol from its form aspect
and seek to familiarise yourself with its outer aspect, with the sum total of
lines, triangles, squares, circles, crosses and other forms of which it is
composed, and as you do this endeavour to comprehend it from the standpoint of
the intellect, using your memory and what knowledge you have, to understand it
exoterically.
Then as soon as the symbol is truly familiar
to you and can be recalled to mind with little effort, endeavour to sense its
quality, to contact its vibration and to note its emotional effect upon you.
This may vary from day to day or it may always be the same. Be simply honest in
your noting this astral reaction to the symbol and see where such reactions
lead you, remembering always that they are not intuitional but are reactions to
the feeling or astral body.
Finally, take note of what you have found to
be, for you, the basic quality of the symbol and then (as in meditation work)
lift the whole subject into the mental realm by bringing the focussed attentive
mind to bear upon it. This will lead you into the realm of concepts. We have
consequently the following stages in the analysis of a symbol:
1.
Its exoteric consideration: line, form and colour.
2. A comprehension in the astral or emotional
body of its quality, the … impact of its qualitative nature.
3. A conceptual consideration of its
underlying idea, of what it is intended to teach, of the intellectual meaning
it is intended to convey.
4. The stage of the synthetic grasp of the
purpose of a symbol, of its place in an ordered manifesting plan, of its true
unified intent.
5. Identification with the quality and purpose
of the symbol as it is illuminated by the mind "held steady in the
light." This final stage brings into activity the brain as well as the
mind.
The study of symbols viewed as a whole, involves three stages:
First, the investigation of a symbol, and the
consequent progress of the analyst from one progressive stage of awareness to
another, to a gradual inclusion of the entire field covered by the symbol.
Secondly, an intuitive perception of the
symbols to be seen everywhere in the divine manifestation.
Third, the use of symbols on the physical
plane, and their right adaptation to a seen and recognised purpose, leading to
the subsequent magnetisation of the symbol with the needed quality through
which the idea can make its presence felt, in order that the intuited qualified
idea may find proper form on the physical plane.
Deal, therefore, with the symbols in a wide
generalisation, exoteric, conceptual and esoteric, but add to that an analysis
of your sensitivity and response to the quality of the symbol.
Let me recapitulate for a moment. First of all
it is valuable to remember that the study of the symbol exoterically [Page 12]
involves the use of the brain and the memory. You endeavour to study line and
form, number and general external aspects, knowing that each line has significance,
all numbers have their interpretation and all forms are symbols of an inner
quality and life.
The study of symbols conceptually carries you
inward from the brain to the mind, into the realm of ideas. It sweeps into
focussed activity the mental apparatus. You then become aware of the concept or
idea which the sign or symbol embodies. You comprehend its meaning and for what
it stands. You grasp the purpose for which the form has been brought into
manifestation. Your study of number and of line has given you a rich background
of knowledge upon the objective plane—a richness in this case dependent upon
your own personal reading, mental equipment and knowledge. Your capacity to
read a "meaning" into a symbol will be dependent also upon the
richness of the meaning you ascribe to the events of your daily life, and your
ability to really meditate.
I would like to make clear to you that there
is no set interpretation of any symbol, and that for each human being that
symbol—whatever it may be—will convey unique meaning. A lack of interest in
symbols presupposes usually a lack of interest in the due interpretation of
life forms and their meaning. Also, too much academic interest in symbols may
presuppose a tortuous and intricate mind which loves design and line and form
and numerical relationships, but which misses entirely the significance of
meaning. The balancing in the mind of form and concept, of expression and
quality, of sign and meaning is vital to the growth of the disciple and the
aspirant.
GLAMOUR, page 56
IV. The idea, revealed, becomes then an ideal to the attentive mind and
eventually something to be desired and materialised. The thoughtform-making
faculty of the mind then comes into play; the "mind-stuff" becomes
actuated by the energy of the idea, vitalised by the recognition of the soul,
and the idea then takes its first real step towards embodiment. An ideal is
only an embodied idea.
These are the first steps towards
materialisation. Embodiment becomes possible. Thus illusion is produced.
V. Distortion now sets in. This is brought about by various causes.
These might be enumerated as follows:
1.
The ray type of the ego colours the man's interpretation of the idea. It
colours the emerging thoughtform. Symbolically speaking, the pure light is changed
into coloured light. The idea is then "clothed with colour, and thereby
the first veil descends."
GLAMOUR, page 78
Potent desire along any line, when it obliterates the wider vision and
shuts a man within a tiny circle of his own desire to satisfy his sentiment of
devotion, is just as hampering as any of the other glamours, and is even more dangerous because of the beautiful
colouring which the resultant fog takes on. A man gets lost in a rapturous
mist of his own making, which emanates from his astral body and which is
composed of the sentimentalising of his own nature about his own desire and
devotion to the object of his attracted attention.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 3
(b) All manifestation is of a septenary nature, and the Central Light
which we call Deity, the one Ray of Divinity, manifests first as a Triplicity,
and then as a Septenary. The One God
shines forth as God the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit, and these
three are again reflected through the Seven Spirits before the Throne, or the
seven Planetary Logoi. The students of
occultism of non-Christian origin may call these Beings the One Ray,
demonstrating through the three major Rays and the four minor, making a divine
Septenary. The Synthetic Ray which
blends them all is the great Love-Wisdom Ray, for verily and indeed "God
is Love." This Ray is the indigo Ray, and is the blending
Ray. It is the one which will, at the
end of the greater cycle, absorb the others in the achievement of synthetic
perfection. It is the manifestation of
the second aspect of Logoic life. It is this aspect, that of the
Form-Builder, that makes this solar system of ours the most concrete of the
three major systems. The Love or
Wisdom aspect demonstrates through the
building of the form, for "God is Love," and in that God of Love we
"live and move and have our being," and will to the end of
aeonian manifestation.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 39-40
Sanat Kumara alone, in this scheme, is self-sustaining and
self-sufficient, being the physical incarnation of one of the Planetary Logoi,
which one it is not permissible to state, as this fact is one of the secrets of
initiation. Through each of Them passes
the life force of one of the six rays, and in considering Them one might sum up
Their work and position as follows:—
1. They each embody one of the six types of
energy, with the Lord of the World as the synthesiser and the embodier of the
perfect seventh type, our planetary type.
2. They are each distinguished by one of the six colours, with the Lord of
the World showing forth the full planetary colour, these six being subsidiary.
3. Their work is therefore concerned, not only
with force distribution, but with the passing into our scheme from other
planetary schemes, of Egos seeking earth experience.
4. Each of Them is in direct communication
with one or another of the sacred planets.
5. According to astrological conditions, and
according to the turning of the planetary wheel of life, so one or another of
these Kumaras will be active. The three
Buddhas of Activity change from time to time, and become in turn exoteric or
esoteric as the case may be. Only the
King persists steadily and watchfully in active physical incarnation.
Besides these main presiding Personalities in the Council Chamber at
Shamballa, there is a group of four Beings Who are the representatives upon the
planet of the four Maharajas, or the four Lords of Karma in the solar system,
who are specifically concerned with the evolution at the present time of the
human kingdom. These four are connected
with:— …
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 50
b. The Blue Lodge, comprised
of all initiates of the third, fourth, and fifth initiations.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 68
Secondly, we must remember that each of us is recognised by the
brilliance of his light. This is an
occult fact. The finer the grade of
matter built into our bodies, the more brilliantly will shine forth the
indwelling light. Light is vibration,
and through the measurement of vibration is fixed the grading of the
scholars. Hence nothing can prevent a
man's progress forward if he but attends to the purification of his
vehicles. The light within will shine
forth with ever greater clarity, as the refining process goes on, until—when
atomic matter predominates—great will be the glory of that inner man. We are all graded, therefore, if it may be so
expressed, according to the magnitude of the light, according to the rate of
vibration, according to the purity of the tone and the clarity of the colour. Who
our Teacher is depends therefore upon our grading. Similarity of vibration holds the
secret. We are frequently told that when
the demand is forceful enough the Teacher will appear. When we build in the right vibrations and
attune ourselves to the right key, nothing can prevent our finding the Master.
Groups of Egos are formed:—
1. According to their ray.
2. According to their sub-ray.
3. According to their rate of vibration.
They are also grouped for purposes of classification:
1. As Egos, according to the egoic ray.
2. As personalities, according to the sub-ray
which
is governing the personality.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 90
After the fourth initiation not much remains to be done. The domination of the sixth sub-plane goes
forward with rapidity, and the matter of the higher sub-planes of the buddhic
is co-ordinated. The initiate is
admitted into closer fellowship in the Lodge, and his contact with the devas is
more complete. He is rapidly exhausting
the resources of the Hall of Wisdom, and is mastering the most intricate plans
and charts. He becomes adept in the significance of colour and sound, can
wield the law in the three worlds, and can contact his Monad with more freedom
than the majority of the human race can contact their Egos. He is in charge, also, of large work,
teaching many pupils, aiding in many schemes, and is gathering under him those
who are to assist him in future times.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 116
As a many tinted Lotus of nine Petals. These petals are arranged in three circles
around a central set of three closely folded petals, which shield what is
called in the eastern books "The Jewel in the Lotus." This Lotus is a thing of rare beauty,
pulsating with life and radiant with all the colours of the rainbow, and at the first three initiations the
three circles are revealed in order, until at the fourth initiation the
initiate stands before a still greater revelation, and learns the secret of
that which lies within the central bud.
In this connection the third initiation differs somewhat from the other
two, inasmuch as through the power of a still more exalted Hierophant than the
Bodhisattva, the electrical fire of pure Spirit, latent in the heart of the
Lotus, is first contacted.
In all these words, "solar angel,"
"sphere of fire," and "lotus," lies hid some aspect of the
central mystery of human life, but it will only be apparent to those who have
eyes to see. The mystic significance of
these pictorial phrases will prove only a snare or a basis for incredulity to
the man who [Page 117] seeks to materialise them unduly. The thought of an immortal existence, of a
divine Entity, of a great centre of fiery energy, and of the full flower of
evolution, lies hidden in these terms, and they must be thus considered.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 75
3. The future. Then, for his [7th
degree initiate] encouragement, there is granted to him a picture of a
final consummation of a glory past all description, with a few outstanding
points indicative of the major steps thereto.
He sees for one brief second the glory as it shall be, and that path
of radiant beauty which shineth ever more and more unto the perfect
day. In the earlier stages he sees the
glory of his perfected egoic group; later the radiance which pours forth from
the ray which carries on its bosom the perfected sons of men of one particular colour and type; later
again he gets a glimpse of the perfection of that great Being who is his own
Planetary Logos, until finally the perfection of all beauty and the radiance which
includes all other rays of light is revealed,—the sun shining in his strength,
the solar Logos at the moment of consummated purpose.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 134
The initiate sees no one, save the Hierophant, and is aware of nothing
but a fiery blaze of pure, blue-white flame, which burns, but destroys not,
which intensifies the activity of every atom in his body without
disintegrating, and which purifies his entire nature. The fire tries his work, of what sort it is,
and he passes through the Flame.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 150
When it is said that the
Logos produced the worlds through meditation it means that within His own
centre of consciousness there was a period wherein He brooded over and
meditated upon the purposes and plans He had in view; wherein He visualised to
Himself the entire world process as a perfected whole, seeing the end from the
beginning and being aware of the detail of the consummated sphere. Then, when His meditation was concluded, and
the whole completed as a picture before His inner vision …
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 157
5. Every Great Word includes within itself its differentiations, its
expansions and permutations, and by its utterance the initiate sets in motion
the lesser, through the vibration of the greater. Hence the terrific responsibility and the
magnitude of the results achieved. Each
Word is committed to the initiate orally and visually. It is spoken to him first in the form of
seven syllables, each of which he has to memorise as a separate Word. Then he is shown how to blend these seven so
as to make a threefold sound and thus produce more united and far reaching
results. Finally the three are blended
into one Word which is committed to him.
The seven words which form the Great Word at any initiation are
communicated to the initiate by the initiates of equal rank with his own. This
group divides itself into seven groups, according to subray or ray formation,
and each group then chants one word in rapid rotation. Simultaneously, the colours and symbols of the various sounds pass in front of him, so
that he hears and sees that which is committed to him. The more advanced group around the throne of
office (the three Departmental Heads at the first two initiations, and the
Pratyeka Buddhas at the final ones) chant then for him the triple Word which
blends the seven, and again he sees it before his inner eye. Finally the Initiator sounds it forth, and
the initiate becomes aware within himself, in practical experience, of the one
great sound, and knows in one particular centre what its vibration is. As is well known, every centre is connected
with some plane, scheme, ray, and other septenary divisions, and thus the
significance of its inner reaction will be apparent.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 159
8. Every Word sounded is distinguished by:
a. A specific colour.
b. A particular tone.
c. A special form.
d. A degree of energy or activity.
e. The nature of the ensouling life,
self-conscious, conscious, or unconscious, God, man, or deva.
The student, again, will find this equally true of a solar system, of a
planetary scheme, of a human being, of a thought form ensouled by an elemental
life, and of the atom of the physicist or chemist. In the knowledge of these facts, [Page 160]
and in their conscious realisation, may be known the true occultist. The Solar Logos sounded forth a Word, the
form of our solar system came into
being, its color being blue and its note a particular cosmic musical
tone. Its degree of activity is of a
specific mathematical notation beyond the grasp of the human mind at this stage
of development; and the nature of its great ensouling Life, that of the triple
Logos, is active, intelligent Love.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 165
4. Each secret concerns some one ray or colour and gives the number, note, and the
vibration which corresponds. These seven secrets are simply short formulas, not
of mantric value, such as in the case of the Sacred Word, but of a mathematical
nature, precisely worded so as to convey the exact intent of the speaker. To the uninitiated they would look and sound
like algebraical formulas, except that each is composed (when seen
clairvoyantly) of an oval of a specific hue, according to the secret imparted,
containing five peculiar hieroglyphics or symbols. One symbol contains the formula of the law
concerned, another gives the planetary key and tone, a third deals with
vibration, whilst the fourth shows the number and department under which the
ray concerned falls. The last hieroglyph
gives one of the seven hierarchical keys by means of which the members of our
planetary hierarchy can link up with the solar.
This is evidently very vague and ambiguous information, but it will
serve to show that, as in the case of the Words, apprehension had to involve two senses, so
in the cognition of the secrets the two senses again come into play, and the
secret is both heard and appears symbolically to the inner eye.
It will now be apparent why so much stress is
laid upon the study of symbols, and why students are urged to ponder and
meditate upon the cosmic and systemic signs.
It prepares them for the grasp and inner retention of the symbols and
formulas which embody the knowledge whereby they can eventually work. These formulas are based upon nine symbols
which are now recognised:—
1. The cross in its varying forms.
2. The lotus.
3. The triangle.
4. The cube.
5. The sphere and the point.
6. Eight animal forms, the goat, the bull, the
elephant, the man, the dragon, the bear, the lion, and the dog.
7. The line.
8. Certain signs of the Zodiac, hence the need
for the study of astrology.
9. The cup, or the holy grail.
All these symbols allied, interwoven, or taken
in part, are combined to express one or other of the seven Secrets. The initiate has to recognise them by sight
as well as to hear them, and by an effort of the will to imprint them
irrevocably upon his memory. This he is
aided to do in three ways:—First, by a long prior training in observation; this
can be begun here and now by all aspirants, and as they learn to imprint
details accurately upon their memory they are laying the foundation for that
acute instantaneous apprehension of that which is shown them by the Hierophant;
secondly, by having cultivated within themselves the power to visualise again that which has once been seen. It will be apparent here why the emphasis has
been laid by all wise teachers of meditation upon the faculty of the careful
building of mental pictures. The aim has
been twofold:—
a. To teach the student to
visualise his thought-forms accurately, so that when he begins to
create consciously he may lose no time in inaccurate transformation.
b. To enable him to picture
again accurately the imparted secret, so that it may instantly be
of use to him whenever needed.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 187
3. The Path of Training for
Planetary Logoi. -- This Path is
trodden by those who will take up the work of the seven Planetary Logoi of the
next system, and of the forty-nine sub-planetary Logoi, Their assistants, and
of certain other Entities working in that particular department. There will be
seven systems, though we are only concerned with the three major systems, of
which our present system is the second major system. Each Chohan of a ray takes
a certain number of initiates of the sixth initiation and trains them specially
for this work; special aptitude in
colour and sound predisposes the choice, and the ability to work with
"psyche," or the spirits in evolution marks a man out for this high
post. We might say that the Planetary Logoi are the divine psychologists, and
therefore in the training for this post psychology is the basic subject, though
it is a psychology inconceivable as yet to us.
INITIATION HUMAN AND SOLAR, page 202
Rule 9. Let the disciple merge himself within the circle of his other
selves. Let but one colour blend them and their unity appear. Only when the group is known and sensed can
energy be wisely emanated.
LOM, page 4
The Chord of the Ego. When I use
the term "reciprocal vibration," what do I mean? I mean the adaptation of the Personality or
Lower Self, to the Ego, or Higher Self, the dominating of the Personality ray
by the ray of the Ego and the combining of their tones. I mean the blending of the primary colour of the Higher Self with
the secondary hue of the Lower Self
until beauty is achieved. At first,
there is dissonance and discord, a clashing
of the colours, and a fight between the Higher and the Lower. But as time progresses, and later with the
aid of the Master, harmony of colour and
tone is produced (a synonymous matter), until eventually you will have the
basic note of matter, the major third of the aligned Personality, the dominant
fifth of the Ego, followed by the full chord of the Monad or Spirit.
LOM, page 31
2. Causing the causal body to grow and expand from being a colourless ovoid, holding the Ego like
a yolk within the egg-shell, to a thing of rare beauty, containing within
itself all the colour of the rainbow. This is an occult fact. The causal body will palpitate in due course
of time with an inner irradiation, and
an inner glowing flame that will gradually work its way from the centre to
the periphery. It will then pierce
through that periphery, using the body (that product of millennia of lives of
pain and endeavour) as fuel for its flames.
It will burn all up, it will mount upward to the Triad, and (becoming
one with that Triad) will be re-absorbed into the spiritual consciousness,—will
carry with it—using heat as the symbol—an intensity of heat or quality of
colour or vibration that before were lacking.
LOM, page 77
We will now enumerate the centres again, this time considering their
psychic correspondences and will note the colours and the number of the petals.
1—The base of the spine. Four petals.
These petals are in the shape of a cross, and radiate with orange fire.
2—The solar plexus. Ten petals.
The colour rosy, with an
admixture of green.
3— The heart centre. Twelve petals. Colour glowing
golden.
4—The throat centre. Sixteen petals. Colour silvery
blue, the blue predominating.
5—The head centres. These are in a twofold division;—
a—Between the eyebrows. Ninety-six petals. Colour, one-half of the lotus is rose and yellow, and the other half is blue and purple.
b—The top of the head. There are twelve major petals of white and gold, and 960 secondary
petals are arranged around the central twelve.
This makes a total of 1068 petals in the two head centres, or 356
triplicities. All these figures have an
occult significance.
LOM, page 37
Relationship of the Ego to its own development. The Ego seeks to bring about the desired end
in three ways:—
1—By definite work on abstract levels. It aspires to contact and enclose the
permanent atom, its first direct approach to the Triad.
2—By definite work on colour and sound with the aim in view of stimulation and
vivification, working thus in groups and under the guidance of a Master.
3—By frequent attempts to definitely control
the lower self, a thing distasteful to the Ego, whose tendency is to rest
content with consciousness and aspiration on its own plane.
LOM, page 68 & 69
8—Groups that are definitely and scientifically working on the laws of the rays, and studying colour
and sound, their individual and group effects, and their
interrelation. This is necessarily a
select group and only those of high spiritual attainment and those nearing
Initiation will be permitted to take part. …
12—Problem groups, as they might be called, will be formed to deal with
social, economic, political and religious problems as they arise, studying the effects of meditation, colour and sound.
LOM, page 83
8—Each centre has then to be awakened afresh by the Sacred Fire till
the radiations, the velocity and the colours
are keyed to the egoic note. This is
part of the work of Initiation.
LOM, page 84 (see LOM page 289)
When meditating in the heart centre, picture it as a golden lotus closed. When the Sacred Word is enunciated, picture
it as a lotus slowly expanding until the inner centre or vortex is seen as a
radiating whirlpool of electric light, more blue than golden. Build there the picture of the
Master, in etheric, emotional and mental matter. This entails the withdrawing of the
consciousness ever more and more inwards.
When the picture is fully built then gently sound the Word again, and
with an effort of the will withdraw still further inwards and link up with the
twelve petalled head centre, the centre of causal consciousness. Do all this very slowly and gradually,
maintaining an attitude of perfect peace and calm. There is a direct relationship between the
two twelve petalled centres and occult meditation, and the action of the
kundalini fire will later reveal its significance. This visualization leads to synthesis, to
causal development and expansion, and eventually conducts a man into the
presence of the Master.
The solar plexus is the seat of the emotions
and should not be centred upon in meditation.
It is a basis for physical healing and will later be more completely
understood. It is the centre of
activity—an activity which must later be intuitional. The throat centre works radiantly when the
polarisation is shifting from the physical atom to the mental permanent atom as
dealt with earlier. The mental permanent atom becomes the centre of pure reason
or of abstract thought. Then comes a
time in the development of consciousness when the emotional force which governs
so many is transcended and superseded by the force of the higher
intellect. It often marks a period when
a man is swayed purely by reason and his emotions do not control him. This may demonstrate in the personal life on
the physical plane as intellectual hardness.
Later, the emotional permanent atom gives place to the intuitional, and pure
intuition and perfect comprehension through love is the motive power, with the
faculty of reason added. Then the solar
plexus is distinguished by the preponderance of the green of activity, for the
emotional body is actively the agent of the higher, and engenders but little of
the rose of human desire.
In the whirling of the force through the
vortex (which whirling forms the petals of the lotus) it will be observed that
certain petals predominantly stand out, and each centre demonstrates one
particular type of cross, with the exception of the two head centres which are
the synthesis of the lower crosses. The
four-armed cross of the third Logos is found at the base of the spine and the
cross of the fourth human Hierarchy in the heart.
LOM, page 127
In the first type of cases, those due to
physical plane weakness, the stress of the cure will be laid first on building
up a strong physical body in both its departments, though especially the
etheric body. This will be done in
future years with the direct aid of the devas of the shadows (the violet devas or devas of the ethers). The strengthening of the etheric web will be
aided by means of the violet light,
with its corresponding sound, administered in quiet sanitariums. Coincident with this treatment will be the
attempt to strengthen the mental body.
With the strengthening of the physical body will come longer and longer
periods of freedom from attack.
Eventually the attacks will cease altogether.
LOM, page 128-129
a—The coming in of the violet
ray, the seventh or Ceremonial Ray, has rendered this contact more easy of
attainment than heretofore. It is
therefore the ray on which approximation is possible, and in the use of
ceremonial and of set forms, coupled to regulated rhythmic movement, will be
found a meeting place for the two allied evolutions. In the use of ritual this will be apparent,
and psychics are already bearing witness to the fact that both in the ritual of
the Church and in that of Masonry this has been evidenced. More and more will this be the case, and it
carries with it certain risks that will inevitably work themselves into common
knowledge and thus affect in various ways the unwary sons of men. [Page 129] As you know, a definite effort is
being made at this time by the Planetary Hierarchy to communicate to the devas
their part in the scheme of things, and the part the human family must likewise
play. The work is slow, and certain
results are inevitable. It is not my
purpose to take up with you in these letters the part that ritual and set
mantric forms play in the evolution of devas and of men. I only desire to point out that danger for
human beings lies in the unwise use of forms for the calling of the devas, in
experimenting with the Sacred Word with the object in view of contacting the
Builders who are so largely affected by it, and in endeavouring to pry into the
secrets of ritual with its adjuncts of
colour and of sound. Later on, when
the pupil has passed the portal of initiation, such knowledge will be his,
coupled with the necessary information that teaches him to work with the
law. In the following of the law, no
danger lurks.
LOM, page 135
b—The Dark Brothers who occasionally employ these elemental forces to
wreak their will and vengeance on all opponents. Under their control work sometimes the
elementals of the earth plane, the gnomes and the elemental essence as found in
evil form, some of the brownies, and the fairy folk of colours brown, grey and sombre-hued.
They cannot control the devas of high development, nor the fairies of
colours blue, green and yellow, though a few of the red fairies can be made
to work under their direction. The water
elementals (though not the sprites or sylphs) move on occasion to their
assistance, and in the control of these forces of involution they at times
damage the furtherance of our work.
LOM, page 145-146
And—which is the point I am aiming to impress
upon you—the aim should be the development of the habit of meditation all the
day long, and the living in the higher consciousness till that consciousness is
so stable that the lower mind, desire and the physical elementals, become so
atrophied and starved through lack of nourishment that the threefold lower
nature becomes simply the means whereby the Ego contacts the world for purposes
of helping the race. In so doing he is accomplishing something that is little
realised by the average student. He is building a form, a definite thoughtform
that eventually provides a vehicle whereby he steps out of the lower
consciousness into the higher, a kind of mayavirupa that acts as his
intermediate channel. These forms are
usually, though not invariably, of two kinds:—
The student builds a form
daily, with care and love and attention, of his Master, to him the embodiment
of the ideal higher consciousness. He
lays the outline of this form in meditation and builds in the fabric in his
daily life and thought. The form is
provided with all the virtues, scintillates with all the colours, and is vivified,
[Page 146] first of all, by the love of the man for his Master, and later (when
adequate for the purpose) it is vitalised by the Master Himself. At a certain stage in development this form
provides the ground for the occult experience of entering into the higher
consciousness. The man recognises
himself as a part of the Master's consciousness and through that all embracing
consciousness slips into the egoic group soul consciously. This form provides the medium for that
experience until such a time as it can be dispensed with, and the man can at
will transfer himself into his group, and later consciously dwell there permanently. This method is the one most largely used,
and is the path of love and devotion.
In the second method the
student pictures himself as the ideal man.
He visualises himself as the exponent of all the virtues, and he attempts
in his daily life to make himself what he visualises himself to be. This method is employed by the more mental
types, the intellectuals, and those whose ray is not so coloured by love, by
devotion or by harmony. It is not so
common as the first. The mental
thoughtform thus built up serves as the mayavirupa as did the other and the man
passes from these forms into the higher consciousness. As you therefore see, in building these forms
certain steps will have to be taken and each type will build the form somewhat
differently.
LOM, page 195
The use of the imagination in
these matters is of real importance and develops a connection between that
faculty and its higher counterpart, the intuition. Students
of meditation must learn to imagine more.
LOM, page 205
This
seventh letter of mine has to do with the use of colour and sound in
meditation. We have, as you know, dealt a
good deal with the subject of sound in our earlier letters, both in studying
the use of the Sacred Word, and in the study of forms and mantrams. It is a truism to say that sound is colour
and colour is sound, yet so it is, and the topic I really seek to bring to your
attention is not so much sound as sound, but the colour effects of sound. I seek to emphasise especially the colour
aspect in this letter, begging you to remember always that all sounds express
themselves in colour.
When the Logos uttered the great cosmic Word
for this solar system, three major streams of colour issued forth, breaking
almost simultaneously into another four, so giving us the seven streams of
colour by which manifestation becomes possible.
These colours are:—
1. Blue.
2. Indigo.
3. Green.
4. Yellow.
5. Orange.
6. Red.
7. Violet.
Not unwittingly have I placed them in this
order but the exact significance is left for you to discover.
I want to emphasise a second thought:—These
seven streams of colour were the product of logoic meditation. The Logos meditated, brooded, conceived
mentally, formed an ideal world, and built it up in thought matter. Then our objective universe flashed into
being, radiant with the seven colours, with the deep blue or indigo for synthetic undertone. Therefore certain things can be posited about
colour:
1. It has to do with objective meditation,
therefore it has to do with form.
2. It is the result of sound uttered as the
culmination of meditation.
3. In these seven colours, and their wise
comprehension, lies the capacity of man to do as does the Logos and build.
4. Colours have certain effects on the
different vehicles, and on the planes on which those vehicles function. When it is known by the occultist which
colour is applicable to which plane, and which colour therefore is the basic
hue for that plane, he has grasped the fundamental secret of microcosmic
development, and can build his body of manifestation by means of the same laws
that that Logos employed in building His objective solar system. This is the secret that ray meditation will
eventually yield up to the wise student.
LOM, page 206 - BLINDS
I would here seek to put your mind at rest on
the point as to whether the colours enumerated by me conflict with those
enumerated by H. P. B. You will not find
they [Page 207] do, but both of us use blinds, and both of us use the same
blinds as those who have eyes can see. A
blind is not a blind when recognised, and I offer not the key. One or two hints however I may give:—
Complementary colours may be spoken of in
occult books in terms of each other. Red
may be called green and orange may be called blue. The key to the accurate interpretation of the
term employed lies in the point of attainment of the unit under
discussion. If speaking of the Ego one
term may be used; if of the Personality, another; whilst the Monad or higher
auric sphere may be described synthetically or in terms of the monadic ray.
The colours of higher or lower mind are at
times spoken of in terms of the plane and not in terms of the ray involved.
Blue-indigo,
being cosmically related, and not simply analogous, may be used interchangeably
for purposes of blinding. Let me
illustrate:—
The Lords of the Flame, in their work in
connection with this planet, may be spoken of in terms of four colours:—
a. Indigo, as They are in the line of the Bodhisattva in connection with the Love or Wisdom Ray. The Lord of the World is a direct reflection of the second Aspect.
b.
Blue,
because of its alliance with indigo and its relationship to the auric egg; just
as the Solar Logos is spoken of as the "Blue Logos" (literally
indigo), so the colour of the perfected man, and of the auric envelope through
which he manifests, will be predominantly blue.
c.
Orange, which is the complementary to blue and which has direct connection
with man as an intelligence. He is the
custodian of the fifth principle [Page 208] of manas in its relation to the
totality of the personality.
d.
Yellow, being the complement of indigo, and also the colour of buddhi, and on
the direct line of the second Aspect.
I give the above illustration to demonstrate
to you the great complexity involved by the use of blinds, yet also to show you
that for those who have the seeing eye even the choice of these blinds is not
arbitrary, but subject to rule and law.
LOM, page 208
Just as the green of the activity of Nature forms the basis of the love
aspect, or the indigo vibration of this love system, so will it be found upon
the mental plane. More may not be said,
but food for thought lies here. Orange
also holds the secret for the Sons of Mind, and in the study of flame (which
even exoterically blends all the colours) comes illumination.
LOM, page 209
Perhaps little that I may say will be fundamentally new, for I give not
aught which may not he found in that foundation book of H. P. B.'s. But in a newer presentation, and in the
aggregation of material under one head may come enlightenment, and a further
wise adjustment of knowledge.
LOM, page 209
Colours as manifested on the physical plane
show at their crudest and harshest. Even
the most exquisite of shades as seen by the physical eye is hard and harsh
compared to those on the emotional plane, and as the finer matter of the other
planes is contacted, the beauty, the softness and the exquisite quality of the
different hues grow with each transition.
When the ultimate and synthetic colour is reached the beauty transcends
all conception.
Colours—such as we have now to do with in
evolution—are the colours of light.
Certain colours, which are the left-overs from the previous solar
system, have been seized upon as modes of expression by that mysterious
something which we call "cosmic evil" (in our ignorance so we term
it). They are involutionary colours, and
are media for the force of the Dark Brotherhood. With them the aspirant to the Path of Light
has naught to do. They are such hues as
brown, grey, the loathsome purple, and the lurid greens that are contacted in
the dark places of the earth, on the emotional plane, and on the lower level of
the mental plane. They are
negations. Their tone is lower than the
note of Nature. They are the offspring
[Page 210] of night, esoterically understood.
They are the basis of glamour, of despair, and of corruption, and must
be neutralised by the pupil of the Great Ones by the admission of the colours
connected with light.
LOM, page 210
6. The synthesis of all the colours, as aforesaid, is the synthetic ray
of indigo. This underlies all and
absorbs all. But in the three worlds of
human evolution the orange of flame irradiates
all. This orange emanates from the fifth
plane, underlies the fifth principle, and is the effect produced by the
esoteric sounding of the occult words "Our God is a consuming Fire."
LOM, page 210
Certain colours belong more exclusively to the human Hierarchy, others
to the deva. In their ultimate blending
and intermingling comes eventual perfection....
LOM, page 211 SERPENT PATTERN, RAYS and PLANES
We enumerated the colours yesterday and in a
certain order. I seek again to enumerate
them thus, only this time reminding you that the one Ray of which all the
others are but sub-rays, might be regarded as a circle of sevenfold light. Too apt is the student to picture seven
bands, striking down athwart the five lower planes till they contact the earth
plane and are absorbed into dense matter.
Not so is it in fact. The seven colours may be regarded as a band
of seven colours circling and continuously shifting and moving through the
planes back to their originating source......These seven bands of colour
emanate from the synthetic Ray. The
indigo sub-ray of the indigo Ray forms the path of least resistance from the
heart of densest matter back again to the source. The bands of colour form a circulating ring
which, moving at different rates of vibration, passes through all the planes,
circling down and up again. What I seek
to bring out specially here is that these seven bands do not all move at the
same rate, and herein lies hid the key to the complexity of the matter. Some move at a swifter rate of vibration than
do some of the others. Hence—as they
carry their corresponding monads with them—you have here [Page 212] the answer
to the question as to why some egos seem to make more rapid progress than do
some others.
These coloured rings do not follow a straight
unimpeded course, but interweave in a most curious manner, blending with each
other, absorbing each other in stated cycles, and grouping themselves in groups
of threes or fives, yet ever moving onwards.
This is the real foundation to the diamond pattern upon the back of the
serpent of wisdom. Three major lines of colour should be portrayed as forming
the lattice work on the serpent's skin, with the four other colours
interweaving. Some day some student of colour
and of the Divine Wisdom should compile a large chart of the seven planes, and
superimposed upon those planes should be placed a seven-coloured serpent of
wisdom. If correctly drawn to scale some
interesting geometrical patterns will be found as the circles cut across the
planes, and some impression will be conveyed occularly of the complexity of the
matter of the seven rays......
LOM, page 212
The true
indigo is the blue of the vault of heaven on a moonless night. It is the culmination, and at the
attainment by all of synthesis, the solar night will supervene. Hence the colour corresponds to what the sky
nightly proclaims. Indigo absorbs.
Green
is the basis of the activity of Nature. It was the synthetic colour for system 1, and
is the foundation for the present manifested system. The note of Nature is green, and each time a
man reviews the robe in which the earth is clad he is contacting some of the
force that reached its consummation in system 1. Green stimulates and heals.
I seek to call your attention here to the fact
that it is not yet permissible to give out the esoteric significance of [Page
213] these colours, nor exact information as to their order and application. The dangers are too great, for in the right
understanding of the laws of colour and in the knowledge (for instance) of
which colour stands for a particular ray lies the power the adept wields.
LOM, page 213 -- Comments on
the colours.
Certain colours are known and it might be well
if we here enumerated them. The
synthetic ray is indigo, or a deep hue.
It is the Ray of Love and Wisdom, the great fundamental ray of this
present solar system, and is one of the cosmic rays. This cosmic ray divides itself, for purposes
of manifestation, into seven sub-rays, as follows:
1. Indigo...............and a colour not
disclosed.
2. Indigo-indigo...The second sub-ray of Love
and Wisdom. It finds its great
expression on the second monadic plane, and its major manifestation in the
monads of love.
3. Indigo-green.......The third sub-ray, the
third major Ray of Activity or Adaptability.
It is the basic ray of the second system. It is the great ray for the deva evolution.
4. Indigo-yellow...............The Harmony
Ray.
5. Indigo-orange..The Ray of Concrete
Knowledge.
6. Indigo...and a colour not disclosed. The Ray of Devotion.
7. Indigo-violet.....The Ray of Ceremonial
Order.
Now you will note that I do not name the two
colours, indigo-red and indigo-blue, nor do I apportion them to [Page 214]
certain rays or planes. It is not that
it is not possible to do so, but it is the withholding of this information that
creates the puzzle. Certain things you
must always remember in dealing with these colours:
That I have given their exoteric names and
application, and that of all I have given only two correspond with their
esoteric application,—indigo and green.
The Synthetic Ray and the Activity Ray are at this stage the only two of
which you can be absolutely assured. One
is the goal of endeavour, and the other is the foundation colour of Nature.
That the other five colours with which our
fivefold evolution is concerned, change, intermingle, blend, and are not
esoterically understood in the same sense as you might imagine from the use of
the words, red, yellow, orange, blue and violet. Esoterically they scarcely resemble their
names, and the names themselves are intended to blind and mislead.
That each of these three colours and the other
two are only understood as yet through four of their lesser sub-rays. This is the fourth round and only four
sub-rays of these colours have as yet been glimpsed. By remembering these three points undue emphasis
will not be laid upon apparent information, and the student will wisely reserve
his opinion.
Yellow
is another of the colours that have come to us from system 1. The blending of blue and of yellow in that
system had much to do with the production of activity. Yellow harmonises, it marks completion and
fruition. Note how in autumn, when the
processes of Nature have run their course and the cycle is complete, the yellow
of the autumn is spread upon the landscape.
Note also that when the sun pours unimpeded down the yellow of the
harvest is also to be seen. So it is in
the [Page 215] life of the spirit. When
the fourth plane of harmony or of buddhi is achieved, then is
consummation. When the work of the
personality is completed, and when the sun of the microcosm, the Ego, pours
unimpeded down into the personal life, then comes fruition and harvest. The at-one-ment, or the harmonising has been
made, and the goal has been reached.
Blue and yellow blended result in green, and the synthetic blue or indigo
(the love and wisdom aspect) dominates when the plane of harmony is reached. It leads then to the third plane of atma
whereon the green of activity predominates......
LOM, page 215
… even if it seems to you that some of the data may be contradictory, I
would suggest for your consideration that in the esoteric interpretation lies
hid half the mystery, and the other half is concealed by the fact that all
interpretation depends upon the standpoint of the interpreter, and the plane
whereon his consciousness is working.
The value of what I impart now consists in this:—that in the study of
colour (which is one form of the study of vibration) comes the ability to
understand personal vibration, to attune that vibration to the egoic one, and
to synchronise it later with that of the Master. One of the main methods of effecting this synchronisation
is meditation. When the intelligence
grasps the scientific facts anent this subject, then comes the utilisation of
these facts for the advancement of vibration, and the wise development of the
colours necessitated.
LOM, page 216-220
We dealt in my last letter with the four
colours—blue, indigo, green, and yellow,—and in this primary grouping lies much
of interest. We now come to a different
group of colours, and one that falls naturally together, orange, red, and
violet.
Orange. This colour is for our purpose the colour of
the mental plane, the colour that marks burning; it is the symbol of flame, and
curiously enough the colour that epitomises separation. But I would have you note that the occult orange
is not exactly the colour that you understand by the term. Exoteric orange is a blend of yellow and red;
esoteric orange is a purer yellow, and the red scarcely is seen at all. This orange comes in as a vibration set up by
a cosmic ray, for you have to remember that this fifth ray (just as the fifth
plane and the fifth principle) is closely allied to the cosmic ray of the
intelligence, or to that activity aspect that found its great expression in the
first solar system. The synthetic ray of
that time was the green ray, and it found one of its closest alliances in the
ray of orange, or mind or intelligence demonstrating through form. You get a correspondence in this solar system
in the synthetic Ray of Love and Wisdom, and its close relationship to the
fourth Ray of Harmony. It finds a demonstration
in the triangle formed by their interaction, as follows:
FIRST SOLAR SYSTEM
Green Ray
Third Aspect
Activity or Intelligence
Third sub-ray Fifth sub-ray
Activity Manas, mind
Green-green Green-orange
SECOND SOLAR SYSTEM
Indigo Ray
Second Aspect
Love and Wisdom
Second
sub-ray Fourth sub-ray
Love
and Wisdom Harmony
Indigo-indigo Indigo-yellow
In the activity system you have the third
aspect of universal mind or activity, demonstrating through the orange of the
concrete sub-ray......adaptability through form—form which perfectly expresses
that latent activity. Similarly in the
second system of love, you have the love aspect demonstrating through the
yellow of the ray of harmony or beauty—love expressing itself perfectly through
unity, harmony or beauty. Note here the fact that I again use terms
that are dependent for their correctness upon their exoteric or esoteric
interpretation.
Therefore to return to what I earlier said,
this orange comes in as a vibration set up by the earlier cosmic ray of
activity in the earlier solar system; the force of orange (which is scientific
apprehension by the intelligence) comes in to perfect the link between spirit
and form, between life and the vehicles through which it is seeking expression.
We might apportion the great basic colours
between the various terms that we use to express the totality of the manifested
universe:
1.Life Aspect 2.
Form Aspect 3.
Intelligence Aspect
Spirit Matter Mind
Consciousness Vehicle Vitality
Self Not-Self Relation
between
Ray Ray Ray
2. Love and Wisdom 1. Power or Will. 3.
Activity or Adaptability
4. Harmony 7.
Ceremonial Law 5.
Concrete Knowledge
6. Devotion 5.
Concrete Knowledge
This is but one of the ways in which the rays may be apportioned and
considered as influences having direct effect upon the evolving life, or upon
the form in which it evolves by means of that third factor, the
intelligence. These three divisions make
the three points of a cosmic triangle:— and the current of the rays playing macrocosmically
between the three has its microcosmic correspondence in the fire of kundalini
(awakened through meditation) playing in accurate geometrical form between the
three major centres:— All the seven rays
interact between the life, the form and the inner mind, and are in their
essence themselves those three. They are
life, they are form, they are intelligence, and their totality is the
manifested universe. All seven at different
times play on the different aspects. The
most important interaction exists between:—
a.
The Love-Wisdom Ray and the Harmony Ray, as it does between the
monadic plane and the buddhic.
b.
The Power Ray and that of Ceremonial Law, just as it does between the
first and the seventh planes.
c.
The Activity or Adaptability Ray and that of Concrete Knowledge or Science, just
as it does between the third plane of atma and the fifth plane of mind. Green and orange were allied in the first
solar system, and continue their alliance here.
I have opened up for all true students vast realms of thought.
In
the relationship between indigo, blue and yellow lies hid a secret.
In
the relationship between green, orange and red another is revealed.
In
the relationship between blue, red, and violet lies still another mystery.
The student, who, by
using his intuition, apprehends these three mysteries has found the key to the
greater cycle and holds the key to evolutionary development.
LOM, page 220-221
Red is for all apparent purposes one of the
most difficult colours to consider. It
ranks as undesirable. Why? Because it has been considered as the colour
of kama, or evil desire, and the picture of the dark and lurid reds in the
emotional body of the undeveloped man rises ever to one's vision. Yet—at some distant time—red will be the
basis of a solar system, and in the perfect merging of red, green and blue will
come eventually the completed [Page 221] work of the Logos and the consummation
of the pure white light.
The
activity system was green.
The
love system is blue.
The
power system will be red.
The result of merging red, blue, and green is—as you know—white, and the Logos will then have esoterically "washed His robes and made them white in the blood," just as the microcosm, in a lesser sense, does in process of evolution.
LOM, page 221
Violet. In a curious way the violet Ray of Ceremonial
Law or Order is a synthetic ray when manifested in the three worlds. Just as the synthetic Ray of Love and Wisdom
is the synthesis of all the life forces, so in the three worlds the seventh ray
synthesises all that has to do with form.
On the first plane, life in its purest, highest, undifferentiated
synthetic aspect; on the seventh plane, form in its densest, grossest, most
differentiated aspect; one is summed up in the synthetic Ray of Love, whilst
the other is worked upon by the seventh. A synthesis too is found in the fact
that through the medium of violet the deva and human kingdoms can find a place
of contact. Esoterically violet is white.
In the blending of these two kingdoms the seven Heavenly Men attain
perfection and completeness, and are esoterically considered to be white, the
synonym of perfection. Another point of synthesis is the fact that through the dominance of this seventh ray
comes a point of merging between the dense physical and the etheric
bodies. This is of paramount importance
in the macrocosm, and to the student of meditation. It is necessary to effect this merging and
alignment before the transmission of the teaching to the dense physical brain
can in any way be considered accurate.
It has a close bearing upon the alignment of the centres.
LOM, page 222-223
I have sought in the above remarks solely to
indicate lines of thought which, if followed closely, may lead to surprising
results. By the study of colours and the
planes, by the study of colour and its effect and relationship to the life
side, and by the study of the form side of the mind, will come much of value to
the student of meditation, provided always he does three things:
1. That he seeks to find the esoteric colours
and their right application to the planes and centres, to the bodies through
which he manifests, and to the bodies through which the Logos manifests (the
seven sacred planets); to the rounds and to the races, and to the cycles of his
own individual life. When he can do this
he holds in his hands the key to all knowledge.
2. That he endeavours to make practical
application of all indicated truth to his personal life of service in the three
worlds, and that he tries to conform in his methods of work to the methods
demonstrated by the Logos through the seven rays or influences. By this I mean that, through meditation, he
brings his life systematically and in ordered occult cycles under those seven
great influences, and so produces an ordered beauty in his manifestation of the
Ego.
3. That he remembers ever that perfection, as
we know it, is only partial and not real, and that even perfection itself—as
grasped by the mind of man, is but illusion, and that only the next logoic
manifestation will reveal the ultimate glory in view. As long as there is differentiated colour
there is imperfection. Remember, colour
as we know it is the realisation by the man using a fifth root-race body in the
fourth round on the fourth chain, of a vibration that contacts the human
eye. What then will [Page 223] colour be
as visioned by a man of the seventh round in a seventh root-race body? Even then a whole range of colours of
wondrous beauty will be outside and beyond his comprehension. The reason being that only two great aspects
of logoic life are being thoroughly demonstrated and the third will be but
partially revealed, waiting for the still greater "Day be with us" to
flash forth in perfect radiance. This
word "radiance" has an occult meaning worthy of your consideration.
LOM, page 223-224 -- The Esoteric and Exoteric colours.
Today our subject is the second one in our letter on the use of colour and deals with the law of correspondences [Page 224] and of colour......The esoteric meaning of the exoteric colours is not yet wholly imparted, as I have already told you. Some of these meanings have been given out by H.P.B. but their significance has not been sufficiently apprehended. One hint I give for your wise consideration. Some of the information given in The Secret Doctrine anent colour and sound concerns the first solar system and some concerns a portion of the second solar system. The distinction has naturally not been apprehended, but as a key fact for studying in the newer school, the revelation will be great. In this statement as to the esoteric significance of the colours I would have you now tabulate (even though it can be found in The Secret Doctrine), in order to form the basis of such later communications as I may seek to impart. [and therefore blinded?]
Purple Blue
Yellow Indigo
Cream Yellow
White Violet
Only four as yet can be communicated, but if
rightly understood they hold the key to the present fourth round, and to its
history. This being the fourth chain and
the fourth round you will note therefore how in the number four lies the
history of the present. Especially would
I urge you who are the teachers and students of the coming generation to ponder
upon the significance of white being esoterically violet. It has special application now in the coming
in of the violet ray, the seventh ray being one of the three major rays in this
round; it wields power in ratio to the four, on the four and under the
four. The esoteric colours of the
exoteric red, green and orange may not yet be imparted to the general public,
[Page 225] though students and accepted chelas, whose discrimination can be
trusted, can attain the necessary knowledge with effort.
LOM, page 225 - Microcosmic and
macrocosmic correspondence.
The relationship between the microcosm and the
macrocosm is accurate, and exists not only broadly but likewise in detail. This is a fact to be grasped and worked
out. As knowledge increases and progress
is made, and as the ability to meditate results in the faculty of transmitting
from the higher Triad to the Personality, via the causal, then these facts will
be ever more clearly demonstrated in detail, and perfect comprehension will
ensue. "As above, so below" is
a truism glibly repeated but little realised.
What is found above and what will consequently be developing below? Above will be found Will, Love and Activity,
or Power, Wisdom and Intelligence, the terms that we apply to the three aspects
of divine manifestation. Below will be
found these three in process of appearing:—
a. The Personality expresses active
intelligence.
b. The Ego expresses love or wisdom.
c. The Monad expresses power or will.
a. The physical, expressing a reflection of
the activity aspect.
b. The astral, expressing a reflection of the
love or wisdom aspect.
c. The mental, expressing a reflection of the
will or power aspect.
a. The violet of the physical as expressed by
the etheric.
b. The rose or red of the astral.
c. The orange of the mental.
a. Higher manas, expressing the activity or
intelligence aspect.
b. Buddhi, expressing the love or wisdom
aspect.
c. Atma, expressing the will or power aspect.
a. The blue of the higher manasic levels.
b. The yellow of the buddhic level.
c. The green of the atmic level.
They are in the process of transmutation. You have to effect the corresponding change
of colour from the lower to the higher.
Couple up this information that I have here imparted with that given in
an earlier letter on the transference of polarisation.
a. The violet of the etheric level and the
blue of the higher mental.
b. The rose of the astral and the yellow of
the buddhic.
c. The orange of the mental and the green of
the atmic.
The secret of it all is to be found in the
application of the occult laws of meditation.
Again
you can shift the whole range of colour higher, and in the Monad work out the
correspondence.
a. The green of the third aspect.
b. The synthetic blue or indigo of the second
aspect.
c. The red of the first aspect.
I would point out here that as you return to
the centre of systemic evolution the nomenclature of these colours is most
misleading. The red, for instance, has
no resemblance to that termed red or rose on the lower plane. The red, the green and the indigo of these
high levels are to all intents and purposes new colours of a beauty and
translucence inconceivable. If justly
interpreted, you have here a hint of the correspondence between the microcosm
and the macrocosm.
LOM, page 227
The colours exoterically have to do with the
form. The forces or qualities which
those colours conceal and hide have to do with the life, evolving within those
forms. By the use of meditation the
bridge is formed which connects these two.
Meditation is the expression of the intelligence that links life and
form, the self and the not-self, and in time and in the three worlds the
process of this connection eventuates on the plane of mind which links the
higher and the lower. The correspondence
will always be found perfect. Therefore
through meditation will come that knowledge which will effect three things:—
1. Give the inner significance of the exoteric
colour.
2. Build in the qualities that those colours
veil.
3. Effect the necessary transmutation of the
colours from the Personality to the Triad, and later from the Triad to the
Monad.
The causal body acts as a synthesis of these
colours in the life of the reincarnating Ego, just as the synthetic ray blends
all the colours in logoic manifestation.
Endeavour to keep clear in your own mind......that colours are the
expressions of force or quality. They
hide or veil the abstract qualities of the Logos, which qualities are reflected
in the microcosm in the three worlds as virtues or faculties. Therefore, just as the seven colours hide
qualities in the Logos, so these virtues demonstrate in the life of the
personality and are brought forward objectively through the practice of
meditation; thus each life will be seen as corresponding to a colour. Ponder on this.
LOM, page 228-230 The basic correspondences.
It is in the study of these correspondences in
the different departments of the manifested universe, and the application of
these colours to their adjusted portion that the beauty of the synthetic whole
and the illuminating of the microcosmic life ensues. Let us enumerate or tabulate in broad general
fashion, leaving the detailed working out to the student of meditation. More at this juncture is not possible.
1.
The threefold solar system.
The threefold evolving jiva.
The three aspects of the Logos.
The threefold Monad.
The spiritual Triad, the Ego.
The threefold Personality.
The three worlds of human evolution.
The three persons of the Deity.
2.
The four Lipika Lords.
The four Maharajahs.
The fourfold lower man, the quaternary.
3.
The five planes of human evolution.
The five senses.
The fivefold department of the Mahachohan.
The five kingdoms of nature.
a. The mineral kingdom.
b. The vegetable kingdom.
c. The animal kingdom.
d. The human kingdom.
e. The spiritual or superhuman kingdom.
The fifth principle of manas.
4.
The seven rays or hierarchies.
The seven colours.
The seven planes of manifestation.
The seven Kumaras.
The seven principles of man.
The seven centres.
The seven sacred planets.
The seven chains.
The seven globes.
The seven rounds.
The seven root-races and subraces.
The seven initiations.
What I seek to emphasise in the above table is
that to the adept the correspondence of all these is perfectly known and exists
in terms of consciousness, in terms of form, and in terms of intelligence. He knows it,—if I may so express it,—in terms
of colour when dealing with form; in terms of sound when dealing with the life
side, and in terms of vitality when dealing with intelligence, or the activity
aspect. The above statement will repay
much earnest thought; it contains a statement of occult fact. According
to the three lines of approach as dealt with in our preceding letter, will be
the use of the terms as above described.
LOM, page 230 -- Colour in the microcosm and in the macrocosm.
Here lies much of difficulty owing to the
process of constant mutation. Colour in
the microcosm is subject to the following factors:—
1. The factor of the ray of the Ego.
2. The factor of the ray of the Personality.
3. The factor of the point in evolution.
One hint may here be given. At a
low point in evolution the colours are largely based on the activity
aspect. Later comes the working in the
love, or wisdom aspect, which has three effects:—
a. The dropping out of colours from the lower sheaths which are the left-overs from a previous system. It involves the elimination of such hues as brown and gray.
b. The transmutation of certain colours into
those of higher tone.
c. An effect of translucence, or an underlying
radiance or brilliance, which is the result of the greater purity of the bodies
and the dimensions of the ever-growing inner flame.
4. The factor of the ray, or rays, that are
manifested passing out of manifestation or coming into manifestation. These rays necessarily affect the egos in incarnation;
they cause a change of vibration somewhat or a consequent change of colouring
or of quality. If a man, for instance,
is on the Ray of Science, and comes under the influence of the incoming Ray of
Harmony, the effect on his trend of thought, and consequently on the colour
he will be demonstrating, will be quite
noticeable. All these factors cause the
blending and merging and mixing that is practically inextricably confusing to
the man from the standpoint of the three worlds.
LOM, page 231
… by
frequent brooding and meditation on the colours, and by an endeavor to attain
their esoteric significance, and their microcosmic application, will gradually
appear the thread that will lead the student out of his confusion into the
clear light of perfect knowledge. … Only in the Hall of Wisdom can the esoteric
interpretation of the colours be truly known.
That Hall is entered through the meditation which prepares the student
for that initiation which opens to him the door.
LOM, page 232-232
The point I seek specially to emphasise is the
life side and not the form side of colour.
As I wrote earlier, colour is but the form assumed by force, of some
kind, when that force is moving at a certain measure, and when its action and
movement is impeded or unimpeded by the material through which it plays. In this sentence lies the key to the solution
of the problem as to the colour differences on the higher planes and on the
lower. The resistance of matter to the
downflow of force or life, and its relative density or rarity accounts for much
of the colour distinction. One of the
distinctions has, necessarily, a cosmic basis and is consequently difficult of
apprehension by three-dimensional man in this, the fourth round. But the basic reason of the difference can be
apprehended sufficiently to permit the pupil to realise the absolute necessity
of steadily refining his vehicles so that the force may radiate through with
greater facility. It is therefore on the
three lower planes a question of practical living and a bringing of all the
three bodies under edict rules of refinement.
These forces in terms of spiritual
development, and not so much in terms of form, demonstrate through the virtues,
as you call them, through magnetism and through vitality and intelligence. To put it quite briefly, as the student builds
a pure physical body and a refined etheric, as he develops the emotional
virtues and as he co-ordinates [Page 233] and enlarges his mental body, he is
continuously altering its rate of vibration, and changing its rhythm, which
change demonstrates to the eye of the clairvoyant as mutation in colour. As you have been taught, the colours as seen
in the aura of a savage and in those of the average developed man are extraordinarily
dissimilar. Why? Because one is moving or vibrating at a slow
rate and the other with greatly increased rapidity. One has a rhythm slow, sluggish and heavy,
the other is pulsating and moving with a tremendous velocity permitting
consequently a more rapid play of the material of which those bodies are
constructed.
Therefore, I would like to point out that as
the race progresses as a collective unit, Those Who gaze upon it from a higher
plane are aware of the steady improvement in the colours seen, and of a greater
purity and clarity of hue in the aura of the race, which aura is composed of
the composite auras of the units of the race.
For instance, the aura of the Atlantean root-race and that of the Aryan
are widely diverse, and radically different.
We have, therefore, demonstrated our first point that, as the units
evolve, the colours change and this is brought about by the transmutation of
what you term vices, into virtues. A
vice is dominance of an involutional quality of the same force which at a later
period will show forth as a virtue.
LOM, page 233-235
… these influences (which show forth as
colours when they contact matter) move in their own ordered cycles. These cycles we describe as the coming in or
the going out of a ray. In this fourth
round usually four rays are in flux at any one given time; by this I seek to
impress upon you that though all rays manifest in the solar system, at certain
stages of manifestation more or less of them will be dominating
simultaneously. These rays, forces,
influences, or [Page 234] co-ordinations of qualities, when expressed in terms
of light, colour the matters they impinge upon with certain recognisable hues,
and these give the tone to the life of the personality or to the Ego. They are recognized by you as the composite
character and are seen by the clairvoyant as colour.
Groups, therefore, of units who converge
through similarity of vibration will be seen as having approximately the same
basic hue, though with many lesser differentiations in colour and tone. As stated before, the colour of large masses
of people can be gauged and judged. It
is in this way that the members of the Hierarchy in Whose Hands is placed
evolutionary development in the three worlds, judge of the stage attained and
the progress made.
Different rays come in bearing units coloured
by that ray. Other rags pass out
carrying with them units of a different basic hue. In the period of transition the blending of
colour is of deep complexity, but of mutual helpfulness and benefit. Each ray imparts somewhat to the other rays
in incarnation at the same time, and the rate of rhythm will be slightly
affected. This from the standpoint of
the present and of time in the three worlds, may be almost inappreciably small,
but through the frequent meeting and interplay of the forces and colours, and
their constant action and interaction upon each other, will come a steady,
general levelling up, and an approximation in vibration. You will see, therefore, how synthesis is
achieved at the end of a greater maha-manvantara. The three rays absorb the seven and lead
eventually to a merging in the synthetic ray.
In the microcosm the three rays of the Monad,
the Ego, and the Personality will likewise dominate and absorb the seven, and
in time also lead to a merging in the [Page 235] synthetic ray of the
Monad. The correspondence will be found
perfect.
LOM, page 237
when I say that colour has certain effects
when applied I would warn you that it will be necessary to interpret the above in terms of life, in terms of form, and in
terms of mind.
LOM, page 238-241 -- Use of
Colour in Meditation.
All colours emanate from one source or one
primary colour—in this solar system the cosmic ray of indigo veiling cosmic
love or wisdom,—and then split into three major colours and thence into the
four minor, making the seven colours of the spectrum. You will expect to see the same effect in the
life of the individual, for always the macrocosm affects the microcosm. His primary colour will be his monadic ray,
manifesting next in the three colours of the Triad and in the four colors of
the Quaternary. These colours on the
path of return are resolved into the three and thence again into the one.
The path of manifestation, of differentiation,
is the path of acquisition. It is the
homogeneous becoming the many or the heterogeneous. It is the breaking up of the one basic colour
into its many component parts. This is
the form side, the expression of that which veils the life. On the life side it is the development from
the one basic quality of the many inherent virtues; it is the latent
possibility of divinity demonstrating as the many attributes of [Page 239] the
divine; it is the one life manifesting its many qualities through diversity of
form. It is the self, with the inherent
capabilities of the All Self, utilising forms for the demonstration of its
all-including perfections. On the
intelligence side it is the method whereby the life utilises the form and
develops its thorough comprehension, analysis and intellect. It is the relation between life and form, the
self and the not-self, between spirit and matter, manifesting as modes of
expression whereby the indwelling divinity imposes his characteristics upon the
material provided for his using. The God
within expresses all his latent virtues through forms by the use of activity or
intelligence. The life shows colour and
the form perfects those colours, as the intelligence aspect (which forms the
energising link) becomes more evolved and comprehension is developed.
On the path of return, renunciation is the
rule, in contradistinction to the earlier method. The indwelling life renounces the forms,
hitherto regarded (and necessarily so) as essential. By the use now of the intelligence which has
linked these two pairs of opposites, spirit and matter, consciousness and form,
the forms built of matter by the aid of the intelligence are one after another
repudiated by the aid of that same intelligence, or reasoning faculty
transmuted into wisdom. The forms go,
but the life remains. The colours are
gradually reabsorbed, but the divine virtues persist, stable now and enduringly
of use by reason of experience. Not
potential are these attributes divine, but developed into powers for use. Inherent faculty has become active
characteristics carried to the nth power.
The veils are discarded one by one; the sheaths are dropped and
superseded; the vehicles are dispensed with and the forms are no longer
required, but the life ever remains and returns to its parent ray. It is [Page 240] resolved back into its
primary, plus activity and expression plus experience and the ability to
manifest; plus all that constitutes the difference between the ignorant savage
and the solar Logos. This has been
consummated by the utilisation of many forms by the life, the intelligence constituting
the means whereby that life employed those forms as a mode for learning. Having manifested as an aspect of this
primary ray, having through many incarnations differentiated that ray into its
many component parts, having veiled himself under all the seven colours that
compose that ray, the reincarnating jiva takes the path of return and from the
seven becomes the three and from the three again becomes the one.
When the man does this consciously, when he
willingly and with full comprehension of what he has to do endeavours to set
the indwelling life free from the veils that hide, and from the sheaths that
imprison, he discovers that the method whereby this is accomplished is by the
subjective life of occult meditation, and the objective life of service. In service is renunciation, and, under the
occult law, therefore, in service the subjective finds liberation, and is set
free from objective manifestation. Think
this out, for it has much hidden under the veil of words.
The
occult student, therefore, from the standpoint of colour has two things to do
in meditation.
1. To discover his three major colours as
manifested in the Personality, the Ego, and the Monad.
2. To resolve then the lower quaternary into
the three, the first stage of which is consciously to withdraw into the Ego and
so atrophy the lower self. The student
begins by eliminating the colours that are not desirable, killing out all low
or coarse vibration and eventually so [Page 241] refining his vehicles that the
three major colours—of which he is the expression—shine out with perfect
clarity. This leads him up to the third
initiation. After that, he seeks to
resolve the three into the one until he has withdrawn all his consciousness
from the lower vehicles into the monadic sheath.
LOM, page 242-244 -- Application
of colour in healing.
We are dealing with the subject now from the
standpoint of meditation. It is
essential therefore that we consider the subject from that angle. In meditation the work of healing is handled
entirely from the mental standpoint. The
direction of any force supplied will be from the mental body of the patient and
will work from thence to the physical via the emotional.
This involves on the part of the person or
group that undertakes this work the ascertaining of certain facts. Let us briefly enumerate them in order to
clarify the mind of the reader:—
1. The work will be largely subjective and
will deal with causes and not with effects.
The primary aim of the healing group will be to discover the originating
cause of the trouble and having located that cause in either the emotional or
the mental body the members of the group will then proceed to deal with the
effect as demonstrated in the physical or the etheric. Should the trouble be entirely physical, such
as is the case in an accident of any kind, or in some affliction which is
purely the result of heredity or of congenital trouble, the ordinary high class
physical plane scientific methods will be applied at first, and the work of the
healers will be to aid those methods through concentration on the subtler
bodies. This applies during the
transition period into which the race is now entering. Later, when the knowledge of occult healing
is more familiar, and the laws which govern the subtle bodies are more known,
physical plane science will be superseded by the preventive science of the
subtler planes, that science which aims at the provision of right conditions
and the building of bodies that are both self-protecting and neutral to all
attack. It will he found that the
comprehension [Page 243] of the law of vibration, and the effect of one
vibration upon another vibration holds the key to the establishing of better
conditions of living, and of sound bodies on all planes.
But as things are now, disease, corruption of different kinds and
trouble in all the bodies is everywhere contacted, and when conditions are thus
recognised, means of aiding must be earnestly sought. This leads us on to our next point:
2. The ascertaining by the group that
practises healing of full information as to the patient, based on the following
questions:—
a. What are his basic lines of thought? By what thoughtforms is he principally
surrounded?
b. What is the predominant hue of his
emotional body? What is its rate of
vibration? Is the patient subject to
sudden turmoils that throw the entire emotional body into disorder?
c. What are his most ordinary topics of
conversation? What are his principal
interests? What literature does he study? What are his favourite pursuits?
d. What is the condition of the centres in his
body? Which centres are awakened? Are any centres rotating in fourth
dimensional order? Which centre is the
major one in any particular case?
e. What is the state of the etheric body? Does
it show symptoms of devitalisation or of congestion? Is the patient lacking in
vitality?
What is the value of his magnetic action on
other people?
Having studied the
patient from all these angles, and not at any earlier time, will the group who
purpose healing study the physical vehicle itself in detail. Then—with some idea of the inner conditions
that underlie the trouble—they will study as follows:—
f. The condition of the nervous system, giving
particular attention to the spine, and to the state of the inner fire.
g. The state of the various organs of the
body, and especially the organ, or organs, that are causing distress.
h. The structure itself, studying the bones
and the flesh, and the condition of the vital fluid, the blood.
LOM, page 247 - Orange, Rose and
Green colors applied to dense physical
The thing that now lies ahead to be mastered
and done is to develop the knowledge necessary anent the etheric, to inculcate
the building of pure bodies, and to study the effect of different colours on
the dense physical. It has been but
little studied as yet. It will be found
that certain colours will definitely affect certain diseases, cure certain
nervous troubles, eradicate certain nervous tendencies, tend to the building of
new tissues, or to the burning out of corruption. All this must be studied. Experiments can be made along the line of
vitalisation and magnetisation, which involve direct action on the etheric, and
this again will be found hid in the law of vibration and of colour. Later.......we can take up with greater detail
the work of these healing groups when gathered for meditation. Here I would but add that certain colours
have a definite effect, though I can only as yet enumerate three, and them but
briefly:—
1.
Orange stimulates the action of the etheric body; it removes congestion and
increases the flow of prana.
2.
Rose acts upon the nervous system and tends to vitalisation, and to the
removal of depression, and [Page 248] symptoms of debilitation; it increases
the will to live.
3.
Green has a general healing effect, and can be safely used in cases of
inflammation and of fever, but it is almost impossible as yet to provide the
right conditions for the application of this colour, or to arrive at the
adequate shade. It is one of the basic
colours to be used eventually in the healing of the dense physical body, being
the colour of the note of Nature.
LOM, page 248-249 -
1. That the basic colours of the Personality
must be transmuted into the colours of the Triad, or the threefold Spirit. This is effected by the truly occult
meditation.
2. That the colours with which the beginner
will be primarily concerned are orange, rose and green.
3. That the violet ray holds the secret for
this immediate cycle.
4. That the next point of apprehended
knowledge will be the laws governing the etheric body.
5. That in the development of the intuition
comes cognisance of the esoteric colours which the exoteric veil.
6. That colour is the form and force of virtue
(in the occult sense) in the inner life.
I have summed up the practical points requiring immediate attention for
the purposes of clarification. With this
as the basis of study the student may expect eventually to see the complete
transformation of the type of work done both by the schools of medicine and by
chairs of psychology.
LOM, page 249-250 -- Forecasts anent the future.
1. The phraseology of the medical schools will
more and more become based on vibration and be expressed in terms of sound and
colour.
2. The religious teaching of the world and the
inculcation of virtue will be likewise imparted in terms of colour. People will eventually be grouped under their
ray-colour, and this will be possible as the human race develops the faculty of
seeing auras. The number of clairvoyants
is already greater than is realised, owing to the reticence of the true
psychic.
3. The science of numbers, being in reality
the science of colour and sound, will also somewhat change its phraseology and
colours will eventually supersede figures.
4. The laws that govern the erection of large
buildings and the handling of great weights will some [Page 250] day be
understood in terms of sound. The cycle
returns, and in the days to come will be seen the re-appearance of the faculty
of the Lemurians and early Atlanteans to raise great masses,—this time on a
higher turn of the spiral. Mental
comprehension of the method will be developed.
They were raised through the ability of the early builders to create a
vacuum through sound, and to utilise it for their own purposes.
5. Destruction, it will be shewn, can be
brought about by the manipulation of certain colours, and by the employment of
united sound. In this way terrific
effects will be achieved. Colour can
destroy just as it can heal; sound can disrupt just as it can bring about
cohesion; in these two thoughts lie hid the next step ahead for the science of
the immediate future. The laws of
vibration are going to be widely studied and comprehended and the use of this
knowledge of vibration on the physical planes will bring about many interesting
developments. They will be partially an
outgrowth of the study of the war and its effect, psychological and
otherwise. More was effected by the
sound of the great guns, for instance, than by the impact of the projectile on
the physical plane. These effects are as
yet practically unrecognised, and are largely etheric and astral.
6. Music will be largely employed in
construction, and in one hundred years from now it will be a feature in certain
work of a constructive nature. This
sounds to you utterly impossible, but it will simply be the utilisation of
ordered sound to achieve certain ends.
LOM, page 251-252
… the method employed in the utilisation of
colour and sound in healing, in promoting spiritual growth, and in exoteric
construction on the physical plane, will be based on the laws that govern the
mental body, and will be forms of meditation.
Only as the race develops the dynamic powers and attributes of
thought—which powers are the product of meditation, rightly pursued—will the
capacity to make use of the laws of vibration be objectively possible. Think not that only the religious devotee or
mystic, or the man imbued with what we call higher teaching, is the exponent of
the powers attained by meditation. All
great capitalists, and the supreme heads of finance, or organised business, are
the exponents of similar powers. They
are personifications of one-pointed adherence to one line of thought, and their
evolution parallels that of the mystic and the occultist. I seek most strongly to emphasise this
fact. They are the ones who meditate
along the line of the Mahachohan, or the Lord of Civilisation or Culture. Supreme concentrated attention to the matter
in hand makes them what they are, and in many respects they attain greater
results than many a student of meditation.
All they need to do is to transmute the motive underlying their work,
and their achievement will then outrun that of other students. They will approach a point of synthesis, and
the Probationary Path will then be trodden.
The Law of Vibration will gradually,
therefore, be more and more understood, and be seen to govern action in all of
the three departments of the Manu, the World Teacher and the Mahachohan. It will find its basic expression and its
familiar terminology in those of colour and sound. Emotional disorder will be regarded as
discordant sound; mental lethargy will be expressed in terms of low [Page 252]
vibration, and physical disease will be numerically considered. All constructive work will eventually be
expressed in terms of numbers, by colours, and through sound.
LOM, page 267
He will at some high moment link up with the Master and with the group,
and his whole being will be flooded with that high vibration, and surge upward
in an outburst of his group colour. Then
he will relax, drop back and lose the contact.
His bodies are not refined enough and his vibration is too unstable to
hold it long.
LOM, page 279
b. The Master works upon the bodies of his pupil with colour, and brings about results in
those bodies that enable the pupil to make more rapid progress. Now you will see why......so much emphasis is laid upon colour. It is not only because it holds the secret of
form and manifestation (which secret must be known by the occultist) but the
emphasis is laid thus in order that he may consciously co-operate in the work
of the [Page 280] Master on his bodies, and intelligently follow the effects
brought about. Ponder on this.
LOM, page 289 -- Seeing
the Master and the self within the cave of the heart.
As you know, the student has often been told
to visualise himself and the Master—about the size of a quarter inch—within the
circumference of the etheric heart. He
is told to picture, toward the close of his meditation the heart etheric, and
therein build minute forms of the Master to Whom he is drawn and of
himself. This he proceeds to do with due
and elaborate care, with the aid of the imagination and loving effort, working
daily on his figures till they become to him very real, and their building and
forming becomes almost an automatic part of his meditation form. Then comes a day (usually when astrological
conditions are fit and the moon approaches the full) when he becomes conscious
within his brain that those figures are
not the little puppets he thinks, but that he is within the figure representing
himself, and that he stands literally and in all verity before the Master. This occurs at rare intervals at first, and
the consciousness of the fact is held but for a few brief seconds; as progress
is made, and every department of his nature and of his service develops, with
greater frequency will come the experience, [Page 290] with longer periods will
it be marked, until there comes a time when the pupil can link up as easily in
this manner with his Master as earlier he formed his figures.
LOM, page 323
This large central shrine will have a pavement whereon will be traced
the triangle, and within the triangle the group will sit, the three spaces
outside the triangle having tables whereon will be found various symbols and a
few of the fundamental books on symbols and some large parchments whereon the
cosmic symbols will be portrayed. [See
DIAGRAM] The colour of this shrine will be dependent on the ray which it
represents. The curtains which separate
will be in the ray colour also and
each individual shrine curtain will carry the sign of the pupil's nativity—his
sign, rising sign, and controlling planets.
These curtains will be the [Page 324] property of the pupil, as will the
mat within the shrine which will carry the symbol of his ray, egoic and
personality.
LOM, page 329 [Future Schools
Curriculum] The Mind.
a. The study of the mental plane.
b. The study of the laws of fire.
c. The study of the causal body.
d. The study of the fifth principle.
e.
The study of colour and of sound.
LOM, page 335
The use of coloured lights. These lights are played on the body of the
disciple and effect a shaking-out process and a simultaneous stimulation of the
atoms. This cannot be done till further
information is given anent the Rays; when a man's ray is known, stimulation
will come from the use of his own colour,
a building-in will be brought about by the use of his complementary colour, and disintegration of unwanted matter will be
brought about by the use of an antagonistic
colour. This knowledge will later on
be communicated to the great bodies that hold [Page 336] custody of the
Mysteries, the Church and the Masons. … When the Mysteries are restored some of
this information will be in the hands of the two bodies I refer to.
LOM, page 337-338
The refining of the emotional body.
Here the method of procedure is different. The emotional body is simply a great
reflector. It takes colour and movement from its surroundings. It receives the impress of every passing desire. It contacts every whim and fancy in its
environment; every current sets it in motion; every sound causes it to vibrate
unless the aspirant inhibits such a state of affairs and trains it to receive and register
only those impressions which come from the intuitional level via the Higher
Self and therefore via the atomic subplane.
The aim of the aspirant should be to so train the emotional body that it
will become still and clear as a mirror, so that it may reflect perfectly. His aim should be to make it reflect only the
causal body, to take on colour only in line with the great Law, and to
move under definite direction and not just as blow the winds of thought, or rise the tides of desire. What words should describe the emotional
body? the words: still, serene, unruffled, quiet, at rest,
limpid and clear, of a quality mirrorlike, of surface even, a limpid
reflector,—one that accurately transmits the wishes, the desires, the
aspirations of the Ego and not of the personality. How should this be accomplished? In several ways, some at the direction of the
aspirant, and some at the direction of the Master.
a. By the constant watching of all desires,
motives and wishes that cross the horizon daily, and by the subsequent
emphasising of all those that are of a high order, and by the inhibition of the
lower.
b. By a constant daily attempt to contact the
Higher Self, and to reflect His wishes in the life. At first mistakes will be made, but little by
little the building-in process proceeds, and the polarisation in the emotional
body gradually shifts up each subplane until the atomic is reached.
c. By definite periods daily directed to the
stilling of the emotional body. So much
emphasis is laid in meditation on the stilling of the mind, but it should be remembered
that the stilling of the emotional nature is a step preliminary to the quieting
of the mental; one succeeds the other and it is wise to begin at the bottom of
the ladder. Each aspirant must discover
for himself wherein he yields most easily to violent vibrations, such as fear,
worry, personality desire of any kind, personality love of anything or anyone,
discouragement, over-sensitiveness to public opinion; then he must overcome
that vibration, by imposing on it a new rhythm, definitely eliminating and
constructing.
d. By work done on the emotional body at night
under the direction of more advanced egos, working under the guidance of a
Master. Stimulation of vibration or the
deadening of vibration follows on the application
of certain colours and sounds. At
this particular time two colours are being applied to many people for the
specific purpose of keying up the throat
and foremost head centre, namely, violet
and gold.
LOM, page 346
In the control of the emotional body the
server takes the attitude of elimination.
His aim is so to train the emotional body that it becomes devoid of colour, has a still vibration,
and is clear and white, limpid as a pool on a still summer's day.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 34
2. Meditation upon the quality of any particular form, so that an
appreciation of its subjective energy may be gained. It should be borne in mind that the energy of
an object may be regarded as the colour of that object …
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 68
4. Symbolic vision. This is a
faculty of the mental body and the factor which produces the seeing of colours,
of geometrical symbols, fourth dimensional sight, and those dreams and visions
which are the result of mental activity, and not of astral sight. Frequently these visions have a quality of prevision.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 98
The grosser elements produce the form; but
within that gross form is a subtler one which we can only contact through acute
perception or clarified sense. In the
commentary found in Woods' translation the following words may serve to
elucidate, and, if meditated upon by the more advanced students, will be found
to be of profound occult significance:
"...
the atom of earth is produced by the five fire elements, among which the
fire element of odour predominates.
Likewise the atom of water is produced from the four fire elements among
which the fire element of taste predominates.
Likewise the atom of fire is produced from the three fire elements,
excluding the fire element of odour and of taste, and among which the fire element of colour predominates. Likewise the atom of wind is produced from
the two fire elements beginning with odour and of which two the fire element of
touch predominates. Likewise the atom of
air from the fire element sound alone."
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 100-101
The last four sutras have dealt with those forms of concentration which
have been built up around an object.
That object may concern that which is subtle and intangible from the
physical plane standpoint, nevertheless (from the standpoint of the real or
spiritual man) the fact of the not-self is involved. He is concerned with that which (in any of
its aspects) may lead him into realms which are not primarily those of pure
spirit. We need, however, to remember
here that all these four stages are necessary and must precede any more
spiritual realization. The mind of man
is not in itself so constituted that it can apprehend the things of
spirit. As he passes from one stage of
"seeded" meditation to another, he ever approaches nearer to the seat
of all knowledge, and will eventually contact that upon which [Page 101] he is
meditating. Then the nature of the
thinker himself, as pure spirit, will be apprehended, and the steps, stages,
objects, seeds, organs, forms (subtle or gross) will all be lost sight of and
only spirit be known. Both feeling and
mind will then be transcended and only God Himself be seen; the lower
vibrations will no longer be sensed; colour
will no longer be seen; only light will be known; vision will be lost sight
of, and the sound or word will alone be heard.
The "eye of Shiva" will be left and with that the seer will
identify himself.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 224-225
II. The astrological significance is also hinted at here in the three
words, "place, time, and number." In these words the universal triplicities must
be recognized, and right control of the life currents must be seen to be
related to karma, opportunity and form; there are certain words which when
rightly understood give the key to all practical occultism and make the yogi a
master of life. They are:
Sound Number Colour Form
Word Life Light Body
and these are recognized as subject to the space-idea and the
time-element. It should be borne in
mind, in this connection, that "space is the first entity" (Secret
Doctrine I. 583) and that cyclic manifestation is the law of life.
When this is recognized, the entity,
expressing itself cyclically, will make its presence felt through
differentiation, through the colour or quality of the veiling form and through
the form itself. These factors make up
the sum total of the expression of any identity, God or man, and the appearance
of any man in exoteric expression on the physical plane is dependent upon the
rhythmic or cyclic outgoing or indrawing energy of the great Life in whom he
lives and moves and has his being. This
is the basis of the science of astrology or the relationship of the planet, or
planets to the human being and of their relation to the stars and the various
signs of the zodiac.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 240
46. Symmetry of form, beauty of colour, strength and the compactness of
the diamond, constitute bodily perfection.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 266
1. Characteristics of the form.
In this phrase the tangible outward aspects of the form are seen. The matter-side of the manifesting idea is
dealt with, and that which can be contacted through the medium of the senses is
first considered and dismissed. This
form is the result of the past, and the limitations due to the point in
evolution are recognised. Every form
carries in itself the evidence of the previous cycles and this can be seen in:
a. Its rate of vibration,
b. The nature of its rhythm,
c. The amount of light which it permits to
manifest,
d.
Its occult colour.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 383
6. Certain of the qualities of the sun are the qualities of the
centres.
a. Quality of the solar plexus warmth.
b. Quality of centre at base of spine kundalini
fire.
c. Quality of the ajna centre between the
eyebrows illuminating light.
d. Quality of the head centre cold
light.
e. Quality of the sacral centre moisture.
f.
Quality of the throat centre red
light.
g. Quality of the heart centre radiant
or magnetic light.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 285-286
The signs or portents referred to, relate primarily to the mental
world, where the real man dwells.
Through an understanding of three things:
a. Numbers,
b.
Colours,
c. Vibrations,
the seer becomes aware of the freedom of his [Page 286] aura from
"death producing" effects. He
knows there is nothing more written, symbolically, in the records which can
bring him back to the three worlds, and therefore "by signs" his path
is seen to be clear.
This has been expressed for us in the ancient
writings found in the Masters' archives as follows:
"When the star with five points shines
with clarity and no forms are seen within its points, the way is clear.
When the triangle encloses naught but light,
the path is freed for the passing of the pilgrim.
When within the aura of the pilgrim the many
forms die out and colours three are
seen, then the road is freed from that which might obstruct.
When thoughts call not to forms and when no
shadows are reflected, the thread provides a way direct from the circle to the
center.
From that point of rest, no return is possible. The term of necessary experience in the three
worlds is at an end. No karma then can
draw the freed spirit back to earth for further lessons, or the working out of
prior causes. He may, however, continue
or resume his work of service in the three worlds, without ever really leaving
his true home in the subtler realms and higher spheres of consciousness.
LIGHT OF THE SOUL, page 349
The emotional or astral body is, as is well known,
distinguished by its colourfulness,
and according to the stage of unfoldment so will the colours be beautiful,
clear and translucent, or ugly, dark and cloudy. The astral body of the adept is a thing of
radiant loveliness, lacking all the colours of low vibration. … Two words are used by translators to convey
this idea of compact cohering force, i. e., the diamond, and the
thunderbolt. The human being who has
taken the highest of all our planetary initiations is termed "the
diamond-souled"—the man who can perfectly transmit the pure white light
and yet reflect equally all the colours
of the rainbow, the seven colours of the chromatic scale. His personality is here called by the same
term [Page 350] for it has become a transmitter of the inner light or
radiance. The term
"thunderbolt" is equally expressive, conveying as it does the idea of
electrical force. All that we can know
of God or of man is the quality of his energy as it demonstrates in force and
activity, hence in the Secret Doctrine, the highest aspect of divinity is
called electric fire.
SOUL & MECHANISM, page 143-144
An interesting field for investigation lies
here also, and the results may have a basis in the fact, now recognised by
science, that light is matter, and matter is light. When the soul is
functioning and the man has achieved conscious union with that soul, he may
then, through the extra stimulation involved, become aware of the light of the
etheric body at its main point of junction with the physical body at the most
important centre in the body, the head centre. Professor Bazzoni says:
"We have seen that all forms of matter on
the earth are made up of 92 different kinds of atoms grouped into molecules
which, taken together in countless millions, form all of the bodies which we
see about us and indeed for that matter, our own bodies. Now, any one of these
92 kinds of atoms when stimulated in certain ways well known to science can be
made to give off light—generally
coloured light—and the nature of [Page 144] this light is peculiar and
characteristic for each of the 92 atoms."4
ROC, page 106
We are told that the Children of Israel fell
down and worshipped the golden calf,
the symbol of Taurus, the Bull …
ROC, page 122
Any true Mason who understands, even if only
to a slight degree, the significance of the three degrees of the Blue Lodge, and the implications of
that in which he participates, will recognise the above three phrases for what
they are, and will recognise the significance of the three degrees. I mention
it here with Masonic purpose because it is closely related to the restoration
of the Mysteries and has held the clue (down the ages) to that long awaited
restoration, to the platform upon which the required teaching can be based and
the structure which can express (when freed of its Jewish names and
nomenclature, which are long out of date, though right three thousand years
ago) the history of man's moving forward upon the Path of Return.
TEV, page 172
The state of the consciousness is ever indicated by the size, the
colour and the activity of the energies which compose the petals of the lotus;
their unfoldment and their development is conditioned by the governing rays, as
well as by the age and the length of the soul's expression. The extent and the
nature of the relative "brightness" is also conditioned by the point
of focus in any particular life, as well as by the trend of the thinking of the
soul which is in incarnation; it must be remembered here that "energy
follows thought."
TCF, page 7
7. Knowledge of the cycles involves knowledge of number, sound and colour.
TCF, page 8-34 STANZAS OF DZYAN
The Secret of the Fire lieth
hid in the second letter of the Sacred Word.
The mystery of life is concealed within the heart. When the lower point vibrates, when the
sacred triangle glows, when the point, the middle center, and the apex, connect
and circulate the Fire, when the threefold apex likewise burns, then the two
triangles—the greater and the lesser—merge into one flame, which burneth up the
whole.
"AUM," said the
Mighty One, and sounded forth the Word.
The sevenfold waves of matter resolved themselves, and varied forms
appeared. Each took its place, each in
the sphere ordained. They waited for the
sacred flood to enter and to fill.
The Builders responded to the
sacred sound. In musical collaboration
they attended to the work. They built in
many spheres, beginning with the third.
Upon this plane their work commenced.
They built the sheath of atma and strung it to its Primary.
"AUM," said the
Mighty One. "Let now the work
proceed. Let the Builders of the air continue
with the plan."
The Deva-Lord and Builders
upon the plane of air worked with the forms within that sphere which is
reckoned mainly theirs. They wrought for
union, each in his group assigned. The
moulds grew fast beneath their hands.
The sacred plane of juncture,
the fourth great plane, became the sphere within the greater circle which
marked the goal for man.
"AUM," said the
Mighty One, He breathed forth to the fifth, the plane which is the
burning-ground, the meeting place for fire.
This time a cosmic note is heard beneath the sound systemic. The fire within, the fire without, meet with
the fire ascending. The guardians of the
cosmic fire, the devas of fohatic heat, watched o'er the forms that formless
stood, waiting a point in time.
The builders of a lesser
grade, devas who work with matter, wrought at the forms. They stood in fourfold order. Upon the threefold levels in empty silence
stood the forms. They vibrated, they
responded to the key, yet useless stood and uninhabited.
"AUM," said the
Mighty One, "let the waters too bring forth." The builders of the watery sphere, the
denizens of moisture, produced the forms that move within the kingdom of
Varuna. They grew and multiplied. In constant flux they swayed. Each ebb of cosmic motion increased the
endless flow. The ripple of the forms
was seen.
"AUM," said the
Mighty One, "let the Builders deal with matter." The molten solidified. The solid forms were built. The crust cooled. The rocks congealed. The builders wrought in tumult to produce the
forms of maya. When the rocky strata
were completed the work stood in completion.
The builders of the lowest grade announced the work was finished.
Forth from the rocky strata
emerged the covering next. The builders
of the second agreed the work was done.
The first and second on the upward way stood forth in fourfold
form. The inner five was somewhat seen
by those whose sight was keen.
"AUM," said the
Mighty One, and gathered in His Breath.
The spark within the peopling third impelled to further growth. The builders of the lowest forms,
manipulating densest maya, merged their production with the forms built by the
watery ones. Matter and water merged
produced the third in time. Ascension
thus progressed. The builders worked in
union. They called the guardians of the
fiery zone. Matter and water mixed with fire, the inner spark within the form
were blended all together.
The Mighty One looked
down. The forms met His approval. Forth came the cry for further light. Again He gathered in the sound. He drew to higher levels the feeble spark of
light. Another tone was heard, the sound
of cosmic fire, hid in the Sons of Manas.
They called to their Primaries.
The lower four, the higher three, and the cosmic fifth met at the great
inbreathing. Another sheath was formed.
The great Wheel turned upon
itself. The seven lesser wheels rushed
into being. They revolve like their
Mother, around, within and forward. All
that existeth was.
The wheels were diverse, and
in unification, one. As evolved the
great Wheel, the inner fire burst forth.
It touched into life wheel the first.
It circulated. A million fires
rose up. The quality of matter
densified, but form was not. The Sons of
God arose, scanned the depth of Flame, took from its heart the sacred Stone of
Fire, and proceeded to the next.
In turning next the Great
Wheel launched the second. Again the
flame burst forth, took to its heart the Stone and proceeded in
revolution. The Sons of God again arose,
and sought within the flame. "The
form sufficeth not," they said,
"remove from without the fire."
Faster revolved the greater
Wheel, blue white emerged the flame. The
Sons of God again came down and a lesser wheel revolved. Seven times the revolution, and seven times
great the heat. More solid grew the
formless mass, and deeper sank the Stone.
To the heart of inmost fire the sacred Stone went down. This time the work was better done, and the
product more perfected. At the seventh
revolution, the third wheel rendered back the Stone. Triple the form, rosy the light, and
sevenfold the eternal principle.
From out the greater Wheel,
down from the vault of heaven, came into light the lesser wheel that counted as
the fourth. The eternal Lhas looked
down, and the Sons of God reached forth.
Down to the inmost point of death They flung the sacred Stone. The plaudits of the Chohans rose. The work had turned a point. From the pit of outer darkness, They gathered
forth the Stone, translucent now and unalloyed, of colour rose and blue.
The turning of the fifth
wheel and its action on the Stone rendered it still more fit. Yellow the blending tint, orange the inner
fire, till yellow, rose and blue mingled their subtle tones. The four wheels with the greater worked thus
upon the Stone till all the Sons of God acclaimed, and said: "The work is done."
In revolution fifth of the
great Wheel the period set was reached.
The lesser wheel, that responded to that fifth great turn, passed
through the cycle and entered into peace.
The lesser wheels come forth
and likewise do their work. The great
Wheel gathers back the emanating sparks.
The Five dealt with the work, the lesser two but wrought with detail. The Stone had gathered fire, lambent with
flame it shone. The outer sheath met not
the need till the sixth wheel and the seventh had passed it through their
fires.
The Sons of God emerged from
out their source, gazed on the sevenfold work, and stated it was good. The Stone was set alone. In dual revolution moved the greater Wheel. The fourth Lord of the greater Twelve handled
the work of sevenfold fire. "It is
not fit," He said, "merge thou this Stone within the wheel which
started revolution."
The lords of the greater
seven plunged the Stone within the moving wheel. The lords of the greater fifth and sixth
likewise plunged their Stone.
Within the fire, deep at the
inmost sphere, as whirled through space the greater Wheel, bearing the lesser
seven, the two were fused. The fourth,
the fifth, the sixth blended, merged and intermingled.
The aeon closed, the work was
done. The stars stood still. The eternal Ones cried to inmost heaven: "Display the work. Draw forth the Stones." And lo, the Stones were one.
The moment manvantaric, for
which had waited all the Triads, the hour that marked the solemn point of
juncture, arrived within the scope of time, and lo, the work was done.
The hour for which the seven
groups purushic, each vibrant to the sounding of the Word, seeking the adding
of the power, had waited for millennia, passed in a flash of time, and lo, the
work was done.
The First Degree in mighty
acclamation deeming the hour propitious, sounded the triple note in threefold
reverberation. The echo reached the
goal. They three times sent it forth. Restless the sphere of blue felt the
vibration and answering, roused herself and hastened to the call.
The Second, with wise
insistence, hearing the First sound forth, knowing the hour had likewise come,
echoed the sound or note quadruple. This
fourfold reverberation circled the gamut of the spheres. Again it was sent forth. Three times the note was sounded, pealing
across the heavens. At the third
intoning came the answer to the call.
Vibrant as a key attuned, the eternal Primary replied. The blue to the dense one answered and
responded to the need.
Quivering the sphere heard
the third take up the note, pealing it forth, a full-toned chord smote on the
ears of the Watchers of the Flame.
The Lords of Flame arose and
prepared Themselves. It was decision's
hour. The seven Lords of the seven
spheres watched breathless the result.
The great Lord of sphere the fourth awaited the oncoming.
The lower was prepared. The upper was resigned. The great Five waited for the point of
equidistant merging. The foundation note
ascended. Deep answered unto deep. The fivefold chord awaited the response from
Those Whose hour had come.
Dark grew the space between
the spheres. Radiant two balls
became. The threefold thirty-five,
finding the distance just, flashed like a sheet of intermittent flame, and lo,
the work was done. The great Five met
the Three and Four. The point
intermediate was achieved. The hour of
sacrifice, the sacrifice of Flame, arrived, and for aeons hath endured. The timeless Ones entered into time. The Watchers began Their task, and lo, the
work proceeds.
Within the cavern dark the
fourfold one groped for expansion and for further light. No light above, and all around the gloom
enveloped. Pitchy the darkness that
surrounded it. To the innermost centre
of the heart, throbbing without the Warming Light, crept in the icy cold of
uttermost darkness.
Above the cavern dark shone
all the light of day; yet the fourfold one saw it not, nor did the light
pervade.
The rending of the cavern
precedes the light of day. Great, then,
must be the shattering. No help is found
within the cave, nor any hidden light.
Around the fourfold one lieth the vault of stone; beneath him menaceth
the root of blackness, of utter denseness; beside him and above, naught but the
same is seen.
The threefold Watchers know
and see. The fourfold is now ready; the
work of denseness is completed; the vehicle prepared.
Soundeth the trump of
shattering. Blinding the power of the
oncoming flame. The mystic earthquake
rocks the cavern; the burning Flames disintegrate the maya, and lo, the work is
done.
Gone is the gloom and the
blackness; rent is the cavern's roof.
The light of life shines in; the warmth inspires. The Lords on-looking see the work commence. The fourfold one becomes the seven. The [Page 21] chant of those who flame rises
to all creation. The moment of
achievement is attained.
Proceedeth the work
anew. Creation moveth on its way, while
waxeth the light within the cavern.
Riseth
the cave of beauty rare, of colour
iridescent. Shineth the walls with
azure tint, bathed in the light of rose.
The blending shade of blue
irradiates the whole and all is merged in gleaming.
Within the cave of iridescent
colour, within its arching circle, standeth the fivefold One demanding further
light. He struggleth for expansion, he
wrestleth towards the day. The Five
demand the greater Sixth and Seventh.
The surrounding beauty meeteth not the need. The inner warmth sufficeth but to feed the
urge for FIRE.
The Lords of Flame look on;
they chant aloud: "The time is
come, that time for which We wait. Let
the Flame become the FIRE and let the light shine forth."
The effort of the Flame
within the crystal cave becometh ever greater.
The cry goes forth for other aid from other Flaming Souls. The response comes.
The Lord of Flame, the
Ancient One, the Mighty Lord of Fire, the Point of Blue within the hidden
diamond, the Youth of Timeless Aeons, assisteth in the work. The inner burning light and the outer waiting
fire,—together with the ROD,—meet on the sphere of crystal, and lo, the work is
done. The crystal rends and quivers.
Seven times the work
proceeds. Seven the efforts made. Seven the applications of the Rod, held by a
Lord of Flame. Three are the lesser touches;
four [Page 23] the divine assistance. At
the final fourth the work is done and the whole cave disrupts. The lighted flame within spreads through the
rending walls. It mounteth to its
Source. Another fire is merged; another
point of blue findeth its place within the diadem logoic.
The greater Three, each with
their seven lesser wheels, in spiral evolution, rotate within the timeless Now,
and move as one. The cosmic Lords from
Their high place, view the past, control the Now, and ponder on the Day be with
us.
The Lhas of the eternal
Sound, the product of the time that was, surmount the sevenfold display. Within the Ring-pass-not the Word of Love
sounds forth.
The sevenfold Lords proceed
with just vibration to carry out the work.
They sound forth each a note of the deep logoic chord. Each to His greater Lord makes record
due. In the solemn breathing forth the
forms are built, the colour just apportioned, and the flame within reveals
itself with ever growing light.
Blue to the green is added
and completion quick is seen. The
vibration of the third is added to the one.
Blue to the orange blends, and in their wise admixture is seen the
stable scheme. To the yellow and the
red, to the purple and the ultimate is the vibration of the seventh adjusted as
the Primary.
Each of the seven Lords,
within Their seven schemes, adjusted to the second karmic circle, merge [Page
25] Their migrating spheres and blend Their myriad atoms.
The forms through which They
work, the lesser million spheres, the cause of separation and the curse of the
Asuras, shatter when sounds the Sacred Word within a point in time.
The life logoic surges
out. The streams of colour melt
together. The forms are left behind, and
Parabrahm stands complete. The Lord of
the cosmic Third utters a Word unknown.
The sevenfold lesser Word forms part of the vaster chord.
The Now becomes the time that
was. The aeon mergeth into space. The Word of Motion hath been heard. The Word of Love succeedeth. The Past controlled the form. The Now evolves the life. The Day that is to be sounds forth the Word
of Power.
The form perfected and the
life evolved hold the third secret of the greater Wheel. It is the hidden mystery of living
motion. The mystery, lost in the Now but
known to the Lord of Cosmic Will.
The thirty thousand million
Watchers refused to heed the call.
"We enter not the forms," they said, "until the seventh
aeon." The twice thirty thousand
million hearkened to the call and took the forms designed.
The rebellious ones laughed
within themselves, and sought pralayic peace until the seventh aeon. But the seven great Lords called to the
greater Chohans, and with the eternal Lhas of the third cosmic heaven entered
into debate.
The dictum then went
forth. The laggards in the highest
sphere heard it echo through the scheme.
"Not till the seventh aeon, but at the fourteenth seventh will the
chance again come round. The first shall
be the last and time be lost for aeons."
The obedient Sons of Mind
connected with the Sons of Heart, and evolution spiralled on its way. The Sons of Power stayed in their appointed
place, though cosmic karma forced a handful to join the Sons of Heart.
At the fourteenth seventh
aeon, the Sons of Mind and Heart, absorbed by endless flame, will join the Sons
of Will, in manvantaric manifestation.
Three times the wheel will turn.
At the centre stand the
buddhas of activity, helped by the lords of love, and following their twofold
work will come the radiant lords of power.
The buddhas of creation from
out the past have [Page 27] come. The
buddhas of love are gathering now. The
buddhas of will at the final turn of the third major wheel will flash into
being. The end will then be consummated.
The Fifth progresseth and
from the remnants of the Fourth multiplied and reproduced. The waters arose. All sank and was submerged. The sacred remnant, in the place appointed,
emerged at later date from out the zone of safety.
The waters dissipated. The solid ground emerged in certain destined
places. The Fifth o'er-ran the Sacred
Land, and in their fivefold groups developed the lower Fifth.
They passed from stage to
stage. The watching Lords, recognising
the rupas formed, gave a sign to the circulating Fourth and it speeded faster
on its way. When the lesser Fifth had
midway passed and all the lesser four were peopling the land, the Lords of Dark
Intent arose. They said: "Not so shall go the force. The forms and rupas of the third and fourth,
within the corresponding Fifth, approach too close the archetype. The work is far too good."
They constructed other
forms. They called for cosmic fire. The seven deep pits of hell belched forth the
animating shades. The incoming seventh
reduced to order all the forms,—the white, the dark, the red, and shaded brown.
The period of destruction
extended far on either hand. The work
was sadly marred. The Chohans of the
highest plane gazed in silence on the work.
The Asuras and the Chaitans, the Sons of Cosmic Evil, and the Rishis of
the darkest constellations, [Page 29] gathered their lesser hosts, the darkest
spawn of hell. They darkened all the
space.
* * * * *
From the coming of the
heaven-sent One peace passed upon the earth.
The planet staggered and belched forth fire. Part rose.
Part fell. The form was changed. Millions took other forms or ascended to the
appointed place of waiting. They tarried
till the hour of progress should again sound forth for them.
* * * * *
The early Third produced the
monsters, great beasts and evil forms.
They prowled upon the surface of the sphere.
The watery Fourth produced
within the watery sphere, reptiles and spawn of evil fame, the product of their
karma. The waters came and swept away
the progenitors of the fluidic spawn.
The separating Fifth built in
the rupa sphere the concrete forms of thought.
They cast them forth. They
peopled the lower four, and like a black and evil cloud shut out the light of
day. The higher three were hid.
* * * * *
The war upon the planet had
been waged. Both sides descended into
hell. Then came the Conqueror of
form. He drew on the Sacred Fire, and
purified the rupa levels. The fire
destroyed the lands in the days of the lesser Sixth.
When the Sixth appeared the
land was changed. The surface of the
globe circled through another cycle. Men
of the higher Fifth mastered the lower [Page 30] three. The work was shifted to the plane whereon the
Pilgrim stood. The lesser triangle
within the lower auric egg became the centre of cosmic dissonance.
The wheel of life turns
within the wheel of outer form.
The matter of Fohat
circulateth, and its fire hardeneth all the forms. The wheel that is not glimpsed moveth in
rapid revolution within the slower outer case, till it weareth out the form.
The forty-nine fires burn at
the inner centre. The thirty-five
circulating fiery vortices extend along the circle of the periphery. Between the two passeth in ordered sequence
the various coloured flames.
The great Triangles in their
just arrangement hold hid the secret of the wheel of life. The cosmic fire radiates as directed from the
second sphere, controlled by the Ruler of the merging ray. The cohorts of the third encircling sphere in
varied ranks mark out the lesser threes.
The wheel of life still moves
within the form. The devas of the fourth
connect the thirty-five, and blend them with the central forty-nine. Above they work, seeking to merge the
whole. Upward they strive, who in their
myriad forms revolve within the wheels of lesser magnitude. The whole is one, yet on the lower spheres
only the forms appear. They seem in
their divisions more than can be grasped or met.
The many circulate. The forms are built, become too firm, are
broken by the life, and circulate again.
The few revolve, holding the many in the heat of motion. The one embraces all, and carries all from
great activity into the heart of cosmic peace.
The Blessed Ones hide Their
threefold nature but reveal Their triple essence by means of the three great
groups of atoms. Three are the atoms and
threefold the radiation.
The inner core of Fire hides
itself and is known only through radiation and that which radiates. Only after the blaze dies out and the heat is
no longer felt can the fire be known.
Through the band of violet
that encircleth the Heavens passeth the globe of purple dark. It passeth and returneth not. It becometh enrapt in the blue. Three times the blue enfoldeth, and when the
cycle is completed the purple fadeth and is merged into the rose, and the path
again is traversed.
Three the great colours in
the cycle that counteth as the fourth, violet, blue and rose, with the basic
purple in revolution.
Four are the colours secondary in the cycle of
discrimination in which the revolution taketh place.
It is circled to the midmost point and somewhat passed. Yellow the band that cometh, orange the cloud
that hideth, and green for vivification.
Yet the time is not yet.
Many the circling fires; many
the revolving rounds, but only when the complementary
colours recognise their source, and the whole adjusteth itself to the seven
will be seen completion. Then will be
seen each colour in adjustment right,
and the cessation of revolution.
TCF, page 79
The etheric body has been described
as a network, permeated with fire, or as a web, animated with golden
light. It is spoken of in the Bible as
the "golden bowl."
TCF, page 89-92.
As the nature and functions of the etheric body of man assume their
rightful place in the thought of the world and as it is realised that the
etheric is the most important of the two physical bodies, man will be brought
into closer conscious contact with the other evolutions [Page 90] that evolve
in etheric matter just as he does in a dense physical body. There are certain large groups of devas,
called "the devas of the shadows," or the violet devas, who are
closely allied with the evolutionary development of man's etheric body, and who
transmit to him solar and planetary radiation.
The etheric body of man receives prana in different ways and of
different kinds, and all these ways bring him into touch with varying entities.
Solar
prana.
This is that vital and magnetic fluid which
radiates from the sun, and which is transmitted to man's etheric body through
the agency of certain deva entities of a very high order, and of a golden hue. It is passed through their bodies and emitted
as powerful radiations, which are applied direct through certain plexi in the
uppermost part of the etheric body, the head and shoulders, and passed down to
the etheric correspondence of the physical organ, the spleen, and from thence
forcibly transmitted into the spleen itself.
These golden hued pranic entities are in the air above us, and are
specially active in such parts of the world as California, in those tropical
countries where the air is pure and dry, and the rays of the sun are recognised
as being specially beneficial. Relations
between man and this group of devas are very close, but fraught as yet with
much danger to man. These devas are of a
very powerful order, and, along their own line, are further evolved than man
himself. Unprotected man lies at their
mercy, and in this lack of protection, and man's failure to understand the laws
of magnetic resistance, or of solar repulsion comes, for instance, the menace
of sunstroke. When the etheric body and
its assimilative processes are comprehended scientifically, man will then be
immune from dangers due to solar radiation.
He will protect himself by the application of the laws governing [Page 91]
magnetic repulsion and attraction, and not so much by clothing and
shelter. It is largely a question of
polarisation. One hint might here be
given: When men understand the deva
evolution somewhat more correctly and recognise their work along certain lines
in connection with the Sun and realise that they represent the feminine pole as
they themselves represent the masculine (the fourth Creative Hierarchy being
male)39 they will comprehend the mutual relationship, and govern that
relationship by law.
These solar devas take the radiatory rays of
the sun which reach from its centre to the periphery along one of the three
channels of approach, pass them through their organism and focalise them
there. They act almost as a burning
glass acts. These rays are then
reflected or transmitted to man's etheric body, and caught up by him and again
assimilated. When the etheric body is in
good order and functioning correctly, enough of this prana is absorbed to keep
the form organised. This is the whole
object of the etheric body's functioning, and is a point which cannot be
sufficiently emphasised. The remainder
is cast off in the form of animal radiation, or physical magnetism—all terms
expressing the same idea. Man therefore
repeats on a lesser scale the work of the great solar devas, and in his turn
adds his quota of repolarised or remagnetised emanation to the sumtotal of the
planetary aura.
2.
Planetary prana.
This is the vital fluid emanated from any planet, which constitutes its basic coloring or quality, and is produced by a repetition within the planet of the same process [Page 92] which is undergone in connection with man and solar prana. The planet (the Earth, or any other planet) absorbs solar prana, assimilates what is required, and radiates off that which is not essential to its well-being in the form of planetary radiation. Planetary prana, therefore, is solar prana which has passed throughout the planet, has circulated through the planetary etheric body, has been transmitted to the dense physical planet, and has been cast off thence in the form of a radiation of the same essential character as solar prana, plus the individual and distinctive quality of the particular planet concerned. This again repeats the process undergone in the human body. The physical radiations of men differ according to the quality of their physical bodies. So it is with a planet.
Planetary emanative prana (as in the case of
solar prana) is caught up and transmitted via a particular group of devas,
called the "devas of the shadows," who are ethereal devas of a
slightly violet hue. Their bodies are
composed of the matter of one or other of the four ethers, and they focalise
and concentrate the emanations of the planet, and of all forms upon the planet. They have a specially close connection with
human beings owing to the fact of the essential resemblance of their bodily
substance to man's etheric substance, and because they transmit to him the
magnetism of "Mother Earth" as it is called. Therefore we see that there are two groups of
devas working in connection with man:
a. Solar devas, who transmit the vital fluid
which circulates in the etheric body.
b. Planetary devas of a violet color, who are allied to man's etheric body, and who
transmit earth's prana, or the prana of whichever planet man may be functioning
upon during a physical incarnation.
TCF, page 95-97
In dealing with the first group of forms, it
must be noted that the pranic emanations given off by units of the animal and
vegetable kingdom (after they have absorbed both solar and planetary prana) are
naturally a combination of the two, and are transmitted by means of surface
radiation, as in solar and planetary prana, to certain lesser groups of devas
of a not very high order, who have a curious and intricate relationship to the
group soul of the radiating animal or vegetable. This matter cannot be dealt with here. These devas are also of a violet hue, but of
such a pale color as to be almost grey; they are in a transitional state, and
merge with a puzzling confusion with groups of entities that are almost on the
involutionary arc.42,43,43a
In dealing with the second group, the human
form transmits the emanative radiations to a much higher grade of deva. These devas are of a more pronounced hue, and
after due assimilation of the human radiation, they transmit it principally to
the animal kingdom, thus demonstrating the close relationship between the two
kingdoms. If the above explanation of
the intricate inter-relation between the sun and the planets, between the
planets and the evolving forms upon them, between the forms themselves in ever
descending importance demonstrates nothing more than the exquisite
interdependence of all existences, then much will have been achieved.
Another fact which must also be brought out is
the close relationship between all these evolutions of nature, from the
celestial sun down to the humblest
violet via the [Page 97] deva
evolution which acts as the transmitting transmuting force throughout the
system.
TCF, page 129 & 132
The withdrawal of the etheric double of a man, a planet, and a system
is brought about by the following causes:
d. By the transmutation of
the violet into the blue. This we cannot
enlarge on. We simply make the
statement, and leave its working out to those students whose karma permits and
whose intuition suffices.
TCF, page 152
1. Separation is produced by rotary movement. By means of this action, all the spheres
became differentiated, and form, as we know, the following atomic units:
a. The solar system, recognised as a cosmic
atom, all the so-called atoms within its periphery being regarded as molecular.
b. The seven planes, regarded as seven vast
spheres, rotating latitudinally within the solar periphery.
c. The
seven rays, regarded as the seven veiling forms of the Spirits, themselves
spheroidal bands of colour, rotating longitudinally, and forming (in connection
with the seven planes) a vast interlacing network. These two sets of spheres (planes and rays)
form the totality of the solar system, and produce its form spheroidal.
Let us withdraw our thought at this juncture from the informing
Consciousnesses of these three types of spheres, and concentrate our attention
upon the realisation that each plane is a vast sphere of matter, actuated by
latent heat and progressing or rotating in one particular direction. Each
ray of light, no matter of what colour, is likewise a sphere of matter of the
utmost tenuity, rotating in a direction opposite to that of the planes.
TCF, page 318-323
We have here an interesting sequence or
inversion, according to the angle of vision, involving the planes as we know
them:
Electricity as vibratory impulse. This causes the aggregation of matter, and
its activity within certain bounds, or its awakening to activity within the
solar [Page 319] ring-pass-not. This is
the first syllable of the Sacred Word.
Electricity as Light, causing spheroidal
objectivity. This is the birth of the
Son. It covers the enunciation of the
second syllable of the Sacred Word.23
Electricity as Sound. Here we have the completed threefold Sacred
Word.
On
the fourth plane this electrical force shows itself as colour. In these four we have the fundamental concepts
of all manifestation; all four have an electrical dynamic origin; all are
basically a differentiation or effect of impulse, emanating from the cosmic
mental plane and taking form (with intelligent purpose in view) on the cosmic
physical. Man repeats the process on his
tiny scale, dealing only with three planes, and flashing into objectivity on the
solar physical. It will be demonstrated
later as science attains more and more of the truth that
1. All physical phenomena as we understand the
term have an electrical origin, and an initial vibration on the first sub-plane
of the physical plane.
2. That Light, physical plane light, has a close
connection with, and uses, as a medium, the second ether.
3. That sound functions through the third
ether.
4.
That colour in a peculiar sense is allied to the fourth ether.
We must note here that in the development of
the senses, hearing preceded sight, as sound
precedes colour.
An interesting analogy may here be noted
between the fourth cosmic ether, and the fourth ether on the physical plane of
the solar system. Both are in process of
becoming exoteric—one from the standpoint of man in the three worlds, and the
other from the standpoint of a Heavenly Man.
The fourth ether is even now being investigated by scientists, and much
that they predicate concerning ether, the atom, radium, and the ultimate
"protyle" has to do with this fourth ether. It will eventually be brought under
scientific formula, and some of its properties, knowledge concerning its range
of influence, and its utilisation will become known unto men. Paralleling this, the buddhic plane, the plane
of the Christ principle, is gradually becoming known to those advanced beings
who are individually able to cognise their place in the body of a Logos of a
planetary scheme. The influence of the
buddhic plane, and the electrical force that is its peculiar characteristic,
are beginning to be felt, and its energy is also beginning to have a definite
effect on the egoic bodies of men; the fourth ether of the physical systemic
plane is likewise assuming its rightful place in the minds of men, and the
electrical force of that subplane is already being adapted and utilised by man
in the assistance of the mechanical arts, for methods of transportation, for
widespread illumination, and in healing.
These four adaptations of electricity:
1. For mechanical uses,
2. For transportation,
3. For illumination,
4. In healing,
are but the working out on the physical plane of paralleling
utilisation of buddhic electrical force.
It might here be asked why colour primarily is
spoken of as the buddhic manifestation of electricity. We are employing the word "colour"
here in its original and basic sense as "that which veils." Colour veils the sevenfold differentiation of
logoic manifestation and, from the angle of vision of man in the three worlds,
can be seen only in its full significance on the buddhic plane. All fire and electrical display will be seen
to embody the seven colours.
Again another correspondence between the
fourth cosmic ether and the fourth physical ether lies in the fact that they
are both primarily concerned with the work of the great builders, bearing in
mind that they build the real body of the Logos in etheric matter; the dense
physical vehicle is not so much the result of their work as it is the result of
the meeting of the seven streams of force or electricity, which causes that
apparent congestion in matter that we call the dense physical planes (the three
lower subplanes). This apparent
congestion is, after all, but the exceeding electronic activity or energy of
the mass of negative atoms awaiting the stimulation that will result from the
presence of a certain number of positive atoms.
This needs to be borne in mind.
The work of evolution is based on two methods and demonstrates as:
Involution, wherein the negative electrons of
matter preponderate. The percentage of
these feminine electrons is one of the secrets of initiation and is so vast
during the involutionary stage that the rarity of the positive [Page 322] atoms
is very noticeable; they are so rare as only to serve to keep the mass
coherent.
Evolution, wherein, due to the action of manas,
these negative atoms become stimulated and either dissipate back into the
central electrical reservoir, or merge in their opposite pole, and are
consequently again lost. This results
in:
Synthesis.
Homogeneity.
The rarity instead of the density of matter. The fourth cosmic ether, the buddhic, is the
plane of air, and is also the plane of absorption for the three worlds. This rarefication of dense matter (as we know
it) simply means that at the close of the evolutionary process it will have
been transmuted and be practically, from our point of view, non-existent; all
that will be left will be the positive atoms, or certain vortices of force
which—having absorbed the negative will demonstrate as electrical phenomena of
a form inconceivable to man at his present stage of knowledge. These vortices will be distinguished by:
1. Intense vibratory activity.
2. The predominance of one certain colour according to the quality of the etheric display,
and its source.
3. Repulsion to all bodies of similar vibratory
rate and polarity. Their attractive
quality at the end of evolution will cease owing to the fact that naught
remains to be attracted.
The vortices in each planetary scheme will be,
during evolution, seven. Later, during
the period of obscuration, three of the vortices will approximate their
masculine pole and eventually but one will be left. In man a similar procedure can be seen in
connection with his [Page 323] seven centres during the process of initiation. First there are seven, then three absorb the
lower four through electrical interaction.
We are here viewing the subject wholly from the point of view of our
present discussion. Finally, only the
head centre is left, for it is the positive pole to all the others.
This question of the electrical polarity of
the centres is one of real difficulty, and little can be communicated on the
matter. It may be safely pointed out,
however, that the generative organs are the negative pole to the throat centre
as is the solar plexus to the heart. The
order of the development of the centres, the ray-type and colour, coupled to
the fact that during certain stages of the evolutionary process different
centres (such as the base of the spine) are positive to all the others, not
even excluding the head centre, leads to the vast complexity of the subject.
TCF, page 326-327
We have thus considered the question of the
electrical origin of all manifestation in connection with the four higher
subplanes of the solar system—those four planes which are the four cosmic ethers,
and therefore form the body of objectivity of a Heavenly Man in exactly the
same sense as the four physical ethers of the solar system form the etheric
body of a man. I have here repeated the
fact, as its importance has not yet been grasped by the average occult student;
this fact—when [Page 326] conceded and realised—serves in a wonderful way to
clarify the whole subject of planetary evolution. We have now reached the three planes wherein
man functions, or the gaseous, liquid, and dense subplanes of the cosmic
physical.
The whole subject of the akasha will be
greatly clarified as exoteric science delves into the question of the
ethers. As knowledge of the four types
of ethers is available, as the vibratory action of these ethers is realised,
and as the details concerning their composition, utilisation, light-bearing
capacity, and the various angles from which they may be studied become known
then paralleling knowledge anent the corresponding four cosmic ethers will be
forthcoming. Much concerning them may be
deduced from the already apprehended facts which relate to the four solar
physical ethers.
For instance, the fourth ether (which is even
now being what we might call "discovered"), is at this stage
characterised by certain things. I might
enumerate a few of these facts with exceeding brevity, as follows:
a. It is the ether which the violet ray uses
as a medium.
b. The fourth ether is that whereof the
majority of the etheric bodies of men are made.
c. The fourth ether is largely the principal
sphere of influence of the "devas of the shadows," or those violet
devas which are closely concerned with the physical evolution of man.
d. It is the etheric sphere within which, at a
little later date, the human and the deva evolutions will touch.
e. From this fourth etheric sphere the dense
physical bodies are created.
f. It is the sphere of physical
individualisation. Only when the animal
to be individualised was fully conscious on that subplane of the physical plane
was it possible to co-ordinate the corresponding spheres on the astral and
mental planes and by means of this triple co-ordination to effect the necessary
steps which enabled the quaternary to succeed in its effort to approximate the
Triad.
[Page 327] g. This fourth ether in this fourth
round and on this fourth chain has to be completely mastered and controlled by
the Human Hierarchy, the fourth creative.
Every unit of the human family has to attain this mastery before the end
of this round.
h. It is the sphere wherein the initiations of
the threshold are undergone, and the fivefold initiations of the physical plane
are entered upon.
Much more might be further added to this list, but I have sought only
to point out those which can be easily realised as having a correspondence on
the buddhic plane, the fourth cosmic ether.
It should be borne in mind that our physical plane in its subplanes has
its analogy likewise to the entire cosmic physical plane.
TCF, page 328-329
I have therefore predicated anent the fourth
physical ether can likewise be extended to the fourth cosmic ether, and find
its analogy on the buddhic plane. The
place, for instance, of violet in the spectrum is of prime importance in
connection with the greater cycles, and marks the end of a cycle and the
beginning of a new one. The buddhic plane is peculiarly the plane
of violet, even though all the colours find their place there; the Lord of the
Ray of Ceremonial Magic, Who embodies the violet ray or hierarchy, has a
special relationship to the buddhic plane.
It must be borne in mind that each planetary Logos works primarily
on one of the seven planes; from this we can infer that His influence finds its
line of least resistance on some one plane, even though it be exerted on all
planes.
Again, extend the second statement anent the
etheric composition of the bodies of men to Those of the Heavenly Men, and it
will be found that just as the majority of human etheric bodies are built of
matter of the fourth ether, so it may also be said that four of the Heavenly
Men have Their etheric vehicles composed of this fourth cosmic ether (buddhic
matter).
Further, the two great evolutions (human and
deva) find their group unity on the buddhic plane, and portions of both
hierarchies blend and merge so as to form the body of the divine Hermaphrodite.24,25 Earlier, at certain fixed points, they may
temporarily approximate each [Page 329] other.
On the buddhic plane definite and permanent alliance may be seen. On this plane also the "devas of the
shadows" who are concerned in the building of the planetary scheme, pursue
their work, and thus parallel the work done in the three worlds by the lesser
builders who work with the etheric body of man.
So can the analogies be worked out, for ever this Law of Resemblance
holds good; yet ever must it be remembered that the analogy is of a psychic
nature, and demonstrates in work, activity, and quality, and not in literal
identity of form.
As time elapses the work of the Heavenly Men
in the cosmic etheric spheres will be better comprehended, and assisted intelligently
by those lesser intelligences who—by the study of the physical ethers—will
eventually hold the key of the greater manifestation. Science is the handmaiden of wisdom, and
opens the door to those infinite reaches and to those cosmic expanses, where
stand Those vaster Intelligences, Who manipulate the matter of the higher
planes, and bend it to the desired form, causing the vibrations thus set up to
be felt at the furthest bounds of the solar ring-pass-not. Automatically then all lesser lives and all
the denser materials are swept and carried into the needed channels and
forms. Vibration, or initial activity,
light, or activity taking form and animating form, sound the basis of
differentiation and the source of the evolutionary process, and colour the
sevenfold differentiation—thus is the work carried on. We have been dealing with these four in
connection with a solar Logos, and equally with the work of a Heavenly Man and
of Man, of the human monad.
TCF, page 331-332
In connection with the manifestation of electricity on the mental,
astral and physical planes. We will not
enlarge upon the subject, as it will later be discussed as fully as may be
possible. Suffice it to say that the law
holds good and that what is laid down as fact anent a Heavenly Man on His Own
planes is equally true of man on the four lower planes. Thus:
A SOLAR
LOGOS
1. Electrical vibration the plane logoic or adi.
2. Electrical light the plane monadic or anupadaka.
3. Electrical sound the plane of atma.
4. Electrical colour the plane of buddhi.
A HEAVENLY MAN
1. Electrical vibration the plane monadic.
2. Electrical light the plane of atma.
3. Electrical sound the plane of buddhi.
4. Electrical colour the mental plane.
MAN
1. Electrical vibration buddhic plane.
2. Electrical light the mental plane.
3. Electrical sound the astral plane.
4. Electrical colour the physical plane.
We need to remember here that we were earlier dealing with the Logos,
and with the Heavenly Men as incorporate parts of His body of manifestation. In the tabulation above given we are dealing
with each separately, [Page 332] and it should be observed that the
manifestation of the groups of causal bodies on the mental plane is the colour
manifestation of a Heavenly Man and His lowest point of objectivity. In man his lowest point of objectivity is the
fifth subplane of the physical plane, as the liquid and the dense subplanes are
not counted as principles any more than the cosmic liquid and dense (the astral
and the systemic physical planes) count with a Heavenly Man.
TCF, page 354
6. What is the coloring or
basic quality of this cosmic Entity?
7. Is the colouring of the
fourth cosmic ether (the buddhic plane), blue, or is it violet to correspond
with our fourth physical ether? Why is
buddhi exoterically regarded as yellow in color?
TCF, page 364
In occupying ourselves with these various
statements anent our scheme and its Ruler we have seen that this particular
cycle, or incarnation of His, is one of great importance, not only to Himself
but to the entire system. The planetary
Logos of this scheme is primarily occupied with a particular group of units, or
with those Monads who vibrate to His key, are colored by the same colour as Himself, answer to the same number,
and are esoterically known by the same Name.
One point here needs emphasis:
all Monads pass at different times under the influence of the different
planetary Logoi, and all are found at some time in each scheme. This does not mean that every human unit
passes a period of incarnation in each scheme.
TCF, page 437-438
One permanent cosmic Ray is the ray of our
Logos Himself, and the subrays of this ray permeate His entire system. Six other cosmic Rays, animating other
systems, influence ours, finding their reflections in the subrays of our logoic
Ray. To these six cosmic influences our
Heavenly Men respond. They absorb the
influence, being centres in the body logoic, pass it through Their schemes,
circulate it through Their own centres (chains), and transmit it on to other
schemes, coloring it with Their Own peculiar shade and qualifying it by Their
own peculiar tone or note. The whole
system of ray influence, or radiatory warmth, considered both physically and
psychically, is one of an intricate circulation and interaction. The radiation or vibration passes in ordered
cycles from its originating source, the One Ray, or systemic Logos, to the
different centres in His body. Viewed
from the physical standpoint this ray force is the energising factor in
matter. Viewed from the psychical point
of view it is the qualitative faculty.
From scheme to scheme, from chain to chain, and from globe to globe,
this force or quality passes and circulates, both adding, and at the same time
abstracting, and returns to its focal point with two noticeable differences:
a. The radiatory heat is intensified.
b. The qualitative character or colour is
increased.
The effect on the form side is equally noticeable, and the warmth or
quality of a Ray not only affects the psyche of a man, a planetary Logos, and a
solar Logos, but has a definite effect on material substance itself.
Ray influences work equally on the deva and
human Hierarchies, as they function in a planetary or logoic body. Clarity of thought might eventuate if we ever
bear in mind that all forms are dual, both in evolution and in essential
nature. They are the product of the work
of the Builders (deva forces) and of active intelligence (the human units) and
the two are indivisible in the Divine Hermaphrodite, or Heavenly Man. They are stimulated in both aspects of their
Being by the ray influence.
Let us now tabulate these ideas somewhat:
Psychical Physical
Entity
Force Centres Manifestation Manifestation
1. Solar Logos Heavenly
Men Deva Builders A solar system
They energise They
work in
and are
matter and
active life. hold the life.
2. Planetary Human
group Deva Builders A Scheme.
Logos units
3. A Man Seven
etheric Elemental Bodies.
centres builders
Each of these divisions can be studied
separately and in due course of time (when it may be safe to transmit
information more freely anent the devas) it will be seen that a deva Lord of a
plane, for instance, works through force centres, manifests objectively through the colour which is His psychical display,
and ensouls the matter of [Page 439] a plane just as a Heavenly Man ensouls His
scheme. The idea can be extended
likewise to chains, globes, races, and rounds.
Duality always will be seen,—human and deva manifestation forming the
sumtotal, and always will energy and quality progress in parallel lines.
TCF, page 463
Owing to the recognition by man of the value
of mantrams, and his gradual comprehension of the true ceremonial of evolution,
coupled with the use of sound and colour,
the animal kingdom will be better understood, and better trained, considered
and utilised. Indications of this
already can be seen; for instance, in all our current magazines at this time,
stories which deal with the psychology of animals, and with their mental
attitude to man, are constantly appearing, and by the means of these and
through the force of the incoming Ray, man may (if he cares to do so) come to a
much wider sympathy with his brothers of less degree.
TCF, page 469
c. Types of Karma. We might here
enumerate the different types of KARMA, even though we have not the time to
enlarge upon the subject. A book by
itself of vast proportions could not contain all that might be said. We should bear in mind that KARMA is imposed
upon the ensouling entity through the medium of matter or of substance itself (which is coloured by it) and that
this matter or substance is intelligent material composed of deva essence.
TCF, page 480 & 489 & 495/496,
Three points must now be considered in this connection:
Conscious manipulation of the fires.
Devas and transmutation.
Sound
and colour in transmutation. …
Postulate V. The devas do not
work as individualised conscious units through self-initiating purposes as does
a man, a Heavenly Man or a solar Logos (viewed as Egos) but they work in groups
subject to:
a. Inherent impulse, or latent active
intelligence.
b. Orders issued by the greater Builders.
c.
Ritual, or compulsion induced through colour and sound. …
Third. Inability to control the
fire elementals who are the external fire which affects that central spark
through the medium of its environment.
This inability is especially distinctive of the alchemists of the fifth
root race who have been practically incapable of this control, having lost the
Words, the formulas, and the sounds.
This is the consequence of undue success in Atlantean days, when the
alchemists of the time, through colour
and sound so entirely controlled the elementals that they utilised them for
their own selfish ends and along lines of endeavours outside their legitimate
province. This knowledge of formulas and
sounds can be comparatively [Page 495] easily acquired when man has developed
the inner spiritual ear. When this is
the case, the transmutative processes of the grosser kind (such as are involved
in the manufacture of pure gold) will interest him not at all and only those
subtler forms of activity which are connected with the transference of life
from graded form to form will occupy his attention.
The following facts might also be pointed out:
First.
That every kingdom of nature has its note or tone, and the mantric
sounds, which concern any transmutative process within that kingdom, will have
that note as the key or base note.
Second.
That the note of the mineral kingdom is the basic note of substance
itself, and it is largely the sounding of the note combinations, based on this
key, which produces the great world cataclysms, wrought through volcanic
action. Every volcano is sounding forth
this note, and, for those who can see, the sound
and colour (occultly understood) of a volcano are a truly marvellous
thing. Every gradation of that note is
to be found in the mineral kingdom which is itself divided into three main
kingdoms:
a. The baser metals, such as lead and iron,
with all allied minerals.
b. The standard metals, such as gold and
silver, which play such a vital part in the life of the race, and are the
mineral manifestation of the second aspect.
c. The crystals and precious stones, the first
aspect as it works out in the mineral kingdom—the consummation of the work of
the mineral devas, and the product of their untiring efforts.
When scientists fully appreciate what it is which causes the difference
between the sapphire and the ruby,
they will have found out what constitutes one of the stages [Page 496] of the transmutative
process, and this they cannot do until the fourth ether is controlled, and its secret discovered. As time progresses, the transmutation, for instance, of coal into diamonds, of lead into
silver, or of certain metals into gold, will hold no appeal for man, for it
will be recognised that the outcome of such action would cause deterioration of
the standard, and result in poverty instead of the acquirement of riches; man
will eventually come to the realisation that in atomic energy, harnessed to his
need, or in the inducing of increased radioactivity, lies for him the path to
prosperity and riches. He will,
therefore concentrate his attention on this higher form of life transference
and
a. Through knowledge of the devas,
b. Through external pressure and vibration,
c. Through internal stimulation,
d.
Through colour applied in stimulation and vitalisation,
e. Through mantric sounds
TCF, page 514
b. The atomic triangle. The
causal sheath is to the clairvoyant therefore a sphere of vibrant living
substance; within it can be seen three fiery points. At the heart of the sphere is a central blaze
of light, emitting [Page 514] rays; these rays are given as seven in number, and
play upon these points or circles (analogous to the electrons in the atoms of
science) and at this stage produce most effect upon the astral permanent
atom. The physical permanent atom has a
position relatively close to the positive centre, and the force plays through
it, and passes on to the astral permanent atom in the form of five rays of parti-coloured light which
blend with the intensely vivid hue of the astral permanent atom, and increase
its intensity until the blaze is so excessive that it appears to the onlooker
as if the two points blended, or the two electrons merged, and (in merging)
produce such an intensity of light that they are seen as dissolving. The mental unit, having a position within the
causal body analogous to the planet furthermost from the sun, becomes vibrant
likewise, and the two other points (considered now as one) begin to interact
with the mental unit, and a similar process is set up and is pursued until
these two points—circulating around their positive centre—also approach each
other, blend, merge, and dissolve. The
centre of positive life gathers or synthesises the three points, and thus the
three fires of the personality repeat on their tiny scale the microcosmic
procedure as seen in the synthesis of electric fire, solar fire, and fire by
friction, and only a blazing unit is left.
This blazing unit, through the combined heat of its being, burns up the
causal body, and escapes back on to the planes of abstraction. Thus man is the Path itself, and also the
pilgrim upon the Path; thus does he burn, but is also the burning-ground.
TCF, page 573
Perhaps if we could visualise a swastika of ten arms revolving at right
angles, of a radiant green colour,
all the ten arms emanating from a central
blazing sun, we might have some idea of the thought-form that formed the
basis of System I, the activity system.
The basic thought-form for the second system embodies the green swastika
of the first manifestation, and adds to it concentric
and interlaced circles in blue, in groups of three, linked by one large circle.
TCF, page 574
1. The Law of Vibration.--This is the law of the first plane, and it
governs all the atomic subplanes of each plane.
It marks the beginning of the work of the Logos, the first setting in
motion of mulaprakriti. On each plane
the vibration of the atomic subplane sets in motion the matter of that
plane. It is the key measure. We might sum up the significance of this law
in the words, "light" or "fire." It is the law of fire; it governs the transmutation of differentiated
colours back to their synthesis.
It controls the breaking up of the One into the seven, and then the
reabsorption back into the One. It is
really the basic law of evolution, which necessitates involution. It is analogous to the first movement the
Logos made to express Himself through this solar system. He uttered the Sound, a threefold Sound, one
sound for each of His three systems, and started a ripple on the ocean of
space. The Sound grows in volume as time
progresses, and when it has reached its full volume, when it is fully
completed, it forms one of the notes in the major cosmic chord. Each note has six subtones, which, with the
first, make the seven; the Law of Vibration, therefore, comprises eighteen
lesser vibrations and three major, making the twenty-one of our three
systems. Two multiplied by nine (2x9),
makes the necessary eighteen, which is the key number of our love system. Twenty-seven holds hid the mystery of the
third system.
TCF, page 577
The atomic subplane sets the rate of
vibration; the Law of Cohesion might be said to fix the colouring of each plane.
TCF, page 655
Just as each man has a body which, in its main characteristics and
form, resembles other bodies, yet in its quality and personal distinctive
features is unique, so each of the Heavenly Men builds for Himself a body out
of deva substance or spirit-matter which is of the same nature as that of His
brothers, and yet which is distinctive, coloured by His own peculiar colouring,
vibrant to His own particular key, and able to demonstrate His own unique
quality. This is produced through the
peculiar type of deva [Page 656] essence He chooses, or (to word it perhaps
more occultly) it has involved the response of certain peculiar groups of devas
to His note. They embody in themselves
just those constituents which He requires to build His body or scheme. It will, therefore, be recognised that the
devas of Group A, being what we might call the key-devas, are of prime
importance, and, from our present standpoint, must remain abstract and
esoteric. If we consider this under the
Law of Analogy, and study the essentially esoteric nature of the plane of the
Logos (the first plane, called Adi) the reason for this will be apparent. If the devas of Group A could be recognised,
or even contacted by advanced men, the study of their nature, colouring and
tone would reveal to unprepared humanity the colouring and tone of our
particular planetary Logos. For this
knowledge the race is not ready. It
would reveal also, through the study of the Law of Action and Reaction, which
of the incarnating Egos were on the ray of this Logos; the deductions from this
would lead men into dangerous realms, and put power into hands as yet
unprepared to wield it wisely.
TCF, page 666
In the three worlds, we have the parallel
evolutions—deva and human in their many varying grades—the human naturally
concerning us the most intimately, though the two evolve through interaction
with each other. In the higher four
worlds, we have this duality viewed as a unity, and the aspect of the synthetic
evolution of the Heavenly Men is the one considered. It would interest us much could we but
understand a little of the point of view of those great devas Who co-operate intelligently
in the plan of evolution. They have Their own method of expressing
these ideas, the medium being colour which can be heard, and sound which can be
seen. Man reverses the process and sees
colors and hears sounds. A hint lies
here as to the necessity for symbols, for they are signs which convey cosmic
truths, and instruction, and can be comprehended alike by the evolved of both
evolutions. It should be borne in
mind, as earlier pointed out, that:
a. Man is demonstrating the aspects of
divinity. The devas are demonstrating
the attributes of divinity.
b. Man is evolving the inner vision and must
learn to see. The devas are evolving the
inner hearing and must learn to hear.
c. Both are as yet imperfect, and an imperfect
world is the result.
d. Man is evolving by means of contact and experience. He expands.
The devas evolve by means of the lessening of contact. Limitation is the law for them.
e. Man aims at self-control. Devas must develop by being controlled.
f. Man is innately Love,—the Force which
produces coherency. The devas are
innately intelligence,—the force which produces activity.
g. The third type of force, that of Will, the
balancing equilibrium of electrical phenomena, has to play equally upon and
through both evolutions, but in the one it demonstrates as self-consciousness,
and in the other as constructive vibration.
TCF, page 674
When the psychic nature of the planetary Logos
is understood (which knowledge is entered upon after initiation, being a part
of the Wisdom) the nature of the different schemes, as regards their watery
aspect, for instance, will be found to be connected with a particular astral
state. As the initiate progresses in
wisdom, he intuitively comprehends the essential nature of the seven groups, or
of the logoic Septenate, which is that concerning their colour or quality. This colour or quality is dependent upon the
psychic nature of any particular planetary Logos, and His emotional or desire
nature can thereby be somewhat studied by the initiate. This will lead eventually to a scientific
consideration of the effect of this nature upon His dense physical body, and
particularly that portion of it which we call the astral plane, the liquid
sub-plane of the cosmic physical plane.
A reflection of this (or a further working out, if that term is preferred)
is found in the liquid portions of the physical planet.
The seventh subplane of the cosmic physical
plane can be subdivided into seven, which are our seven physical [Page 675]
subplanes. It is this knowledge which
enables a magician to work. Given a certain
physical phenomenon—such as the weight of water, for instance, upon a
planet—and an initiate of the higher orders can form deductions from it as to
the quality of the exalted Life manifesting through a plane. He arrives at this knowledge through a process
of reasoning from the liquid (sixth) subplane of the systemic physical plane
to:
a. The liquid subplane of the cosmic physical,
our systemic astral plane.
b. The fourth cosmic ether, the buddhic plane.
c. The second cosmic ether, the monadic plane,
or the plane of the seven Heavenly Men.
d. The cosmic astral plane, thus getting in
touch with the desire nature of the God.
TCF, page 697
To sum up:
There is a stage in the evolution of consciousness where the three, the
four and the five blend and merge perfectly.
Confusion on this point arises from two causes which are the point of
individual achievement of the student. We interpret and colour statements
according to the state of our own inner consciousness. H. P. B. hints at this32 when dealing with
the principles; also the interpretation of these figures varies according to
the key employed. The fifth or spiritual
kingdom is entered when the units of the fourth kingdom have succeeded in
vitalizing the fifth spirilla in all the atoms of the threefold lower man; when
they [Page 698] have unfolded three of the egoic petals and are in process of
unfolding the fourth and fifth and when they are becoming conscious of the
pranic force of the Heavenly Man.
TCF, page 707-708
The causal body, called sometimes (though inaccurately) the
"karana sarira," has its place on the third subplane of the mental
plane, the lowest abstract plane, and the one whereon the Ray of the third
Logos provides the necessary "light for construction." (This is because each subplane comes
specially under the influence of its Number, Name, or Lord.) When the hour [Page 708] strikes and the
vehicles for buddhi are to be co-ordinated certain great Beings, Lords of the
Flame, or Manasadevas, through driving external force, come in conjunction with
the material of that subplane, and vitalise it with Their Own energy. They form a new and positive impulse which
co-ordinates the material of the plane and produces a temporary balancing of
forces. Hence the meaning of the "white," or transparent condition
of the new causal body. It remains with
the new-born ego first to upset the equilibrium, and then to regain it, at the
close of the process, producing a radiant form, full of primal colours.
TCF, page 735
The third stage is the withdrawal of the life force from the astral
form so that it disintegrates in a similar manner and the life is centralised
within the astral permanent atom. It has
gained an increase of vitality through physical plane existence, and added colour through astral experience.
…
In each incarnation the life forces have
gained through the utilisation of the vehicles,
a. An increased activity, which is stored in
the physical permanent atom.
b.
An added colouring, which is stored in the astral permanent atom.
c. A developed quality of strength, or purpose
in action, which is stored in the mental unit.
TCF, page 743
The old Commentary says: "The deva shineth with added light when
the virtue of the will hath entered. He garnereth colour as the reaper
garners wheat, and storeth it up for the feeding of the multitude. Over all this deva host the mystic Goat
presideth. Makara is, and is not, yet the link persisteth."
TCF, page 745
c. The impartation of colour or
quality, which moulds that which has been prepared.
TCF, page 747 -- THE COMING
AVATAR
"From the zenith to the nadir, from dawn
to fall of night, from the emergence into being of all that is or may be to the
passing into peace of all that hath achieved, gleameth the orb of blue and the inner radiant fire. From the gates of gold down to the pit of earth,
out from the flaming fire down to the circle of gloom, rideth the secret
Avatar, bearing the sword that pierceth.
TCF, page 761-763 - egoic lotus
We have seen that on the third level of the
mental plane, the egoic lotus is found and the student should picture it to
himself as follows:
Concealed at the very centre or heart of the
lotus is a brilliant point of electric fire of a blue-white hue (the jewel in the lotus) surrounded, and completely
hidden, by three closely folded petals.
Around this central nucleus, or inner flame, are arranged the nine
petals in circles of three petals each, making three circles in all. These petals are formed out of the substance
of the solar angels, as are the central three,—substance which is not only
sentient as is the substance of the forms in the three worlds and the lunar
bodies, but which has an added quality of "I-ness" or of
self-consciousness, enabling the spiritual unity at the centre (by means of it)
to acquire knowledge, awareness, and self-realisation. These nine petals are of a predominant orange
hue, though the six other colours are found as secondary colours in a varying
degree. The inner three petals are of a
lovely lemon-yellow hue. At the base of
the lotus petals are the three points of light which mark the position of the
permanent atoms, and which are the medium of communication between the solar
Angels and the lunar Pitris. By means of
these permanent atoms the Ego, according to its state of evolution can
construct his lunar bodies, acquire knowledge on the lower three planes, and
thus buy his experience, and becomes aware.
On a higher turn of the spiral, the Monad through the egoic petals, and
thus with the aid of the solar Angels, acquires knowledge and equally on more
exalted levels becomes aware.
The light within these permanent atoms has a dull red glow and we have, therefore,
all the three fires demonstrating in the causal body—electric fire at the
centre, solar fire enclosing it as the flame encloses the central nucleus or
essence in a candle flame, and fire by friction, this latter fire resembling
the glowing red wick which lies at the base of the higher flame.
These three types of fire on the mental
plane—meeting and unified in the egoic body—produce in time a radiation or
warmth which streams out from all sides of the lotus, and forms that spheroidal
shape noted by investigators. [Page 763] The more fully developed the Ego may
be, and the more the petals are unfolded, the greater the beauty of the
surrounding sphere, and the more refined
its colouring.
At the early stages after individualisation,
the egoic body has the appearance of a bud.
The electric fire at the centre is not apparent, and all the nine petals
are closed down upon the inner three; the
orange colour has a dead aspect and the three points of light at the base
are just points and nothing more; the triangle which is later seen connecting
the points is not demonstrated. The
surrounding sphere is colourless and is only to be appreciated as undulatory
vibrations (like waves in the air or ether) reaching barely beyond the petal
outline.
By the time the third Initiation is reached, a
wondrous transformation has transpired.
The outer sphere is palpitating with every colour in the rainbow, and is of wide radius; the streams of
electrical energy circulating in it are so powerful that they are escaping
beyond the periphery of the circle, resembling the rays of the sun. The nine petals are fully unfolded, forming a
gracious setting for the central jewel, and their orange hue is now of a gorgeous translucence, shot with many colours,
that of the egoic ray predominating.
The triangle at the base is now quickened and scintillating, and the
three points are small blazing fires, showing to the eye of the clairvoyant as
sevenfold whorls of light, circulating their light from point to point of a
rapidly moving triangle.
TCF, page 820-824 -- egoic lotus
colors
In terms of the old Commentary, the truth is thus stated:
"The Lord of Life
Himself sits at the heart and watches.
The Lords of solar fire pursue their task and sacrifice themselves to
the lunar Lords of all the lower planes.
They die, but resurrect. They
pass without, and come again. Yet the
Lord of Life sits still.
The lunar Lords begin to die;
their power begins to wane with each successive cycle. The solar Lords shine forth in triumph and
consign the fourfold ones to fire,—the fire which burns and dissipates the
form.
Many times the work repeats
itself; the cycles wax and wane, until the day triumphant when the solar Lord
acclaims himself and knows himself the ruler.
The Lord of Life then turns
Himself, and arises in His might. He
consumes the solar Lords, and they perish as did the lunar Lords. He speaks a Word; the fire descends. The blaze bursts forth. Gone is the lower fire through the flame of
solar burning, gone is the middle fire through the intensity of fire from
Heaven.
Naught remaineth save a
threefold flame of violet, indigo and
yellow. THAT disappears. Then darkness reigns. Yet the Lord of Life persists, though
invisible."
As we know, the egoic lotus consists of three
circles,—each circle being composed of three petals, and all shielding the
inner bud where hides the jewel. It is
with the evolution of these petals that we are concerned, with their formation,
their vitalisation, their nurturing, and eventual unfoldment. It will be useful for the student at this
stage to remember that we are primarily dealing with the development of the
second aspect in man, the love-wisdom aspect, and are only secondarily
considering the third aspect, that of activity which finds its energising
centres in the three permanent atoms.
These three circles of petals are called in
the esoteric terminology:
1. The "outer knowledge" triad, or
the lords of active wisdom.
2. The middle "love" triad, or the
lords of active love.
3. The inner "sacrificial" triad, or
the lords of active will.
The first is the summation of experience and developed consciousness;
the second is the application of that knowledge in love and service, or the
expression of the Self and the Not-Self in reciprocal vibration; and the third
is the full expression of knowledge and love turned toward the conscious
sacrifice of all to the furthering of the plans of the planetary Logos, and to
the carrying out of His purposes in group work.
Each of these three groups of petals come under the definite guidance of
three groups of Agnishvattas, who form them out of their own substance and who
in essence are the threefold Ego during its manifestation. Through them flows the force and coherent
energy of those mysterious Entities whom (when considering the human family as
a whole) we call—
a. The Buddhas or Lords of Activity.
b. The Buddhas or Lords of Compassionate Love.
c. Buddhas of Sacrifice, of Whom the Lord of
the World is, to man, the best known exponent.
Through these three groups flows that
threefold energy which, on the mental plane, finds its medium of expression in
connection with the human kingdom, in the three groups of Agnishvattas or solar
Pitris above referred to. These groups
form the substance of the three circles of petals, and each group has also a
special influence upon the particular petal belonging to their especial scale
of vibrations. For the sake of clarity,
we might tabulate the various petals so that the student may [Page 822] get a
clearer comprehension of the conformation of his own causal vehicle, and some
idea of the various triangular relationships:
I. The outer "knowledge" triad:
a. Petal 1...Knowledge on the physical plane.
Colours:
Orange, green and violet.
b. Petal 2...Love on the physical plane.
Colours:
Orange, rose and blue.
c. Petal 3...Sacrifice on the physical plane.
Colours:
Orange, yellow and indigo.
These three petals are organised and vitalised in the Hall of
Ignorance, but remain unopened and only begin to unfold as the second circle is
organised.
II. The middle "love" triad:
a. Petal 1...Higher Knowledge applied through
love on the physical and astral planes.
Colours: Rose, and the original three.
b. Petal 2...Higher intelligent love on the
physical and astral planes.
Colours: Rose and the corresponding three.
c. Petal 3...Loving intelligent sacrifice on
the physical and astral planes.
Colours: Rose and the same three.
These three petals preserve the fundamental
orange but add the colour rose in every
petal, so that four colours are now seen.
These petals are organised and vitalised in the Hall of Learning, but
remain unopened. The outer tier of
petals simultaneously unfolds till it is open entirely, revealing the second
circle; the third remains shielded.
III. The inner "sacrificial" triad:
a. Petal 1...The Will to sacrifice through
knowledge on the mental plane, and thus intelligently to dominate the entire
threefold lower man.
Colours: Yellow and the four colours, orange, green,
violet and rose.
b. Petal 2...The will to sacrifice through
love on the mental plane, and thus to serve.
Colours: Yellow and the four colours, orange, violet,
rose and blue.
c. Petal 3...The utter sacrifice of all
forever.
Colours: Yellow, orange, rose, blue and indigo.
In the mystery of these subsidiary colours and
of the gradual shining forth within the lotus of five colours in any one petal
at one time, is veiled the mystery of
the five Kumaras.62 The student who
seeks the significance of the preponderance
of orange and of rose is approaching the secret of the two Kumaras Who
fell. More it is not possible to say,
but the colours hold the esoteric key to
this great occurrence.
TCF, page 893-894
The
secret of life lies hidden in the serpent stage,—not the life of the Spirit,
but the life of the soul, and this will be revealed as the "serpent of the
astral light" is truly approached, and duly studied. One of the four Lipika Lords, Who stand
nearest to our planetary Logos, is called "The Living Serpent," and
His emblem is a serpent of blue with
one eye, in the form of a ruby, in
its head. Students who care to carry the
symbology a little further can connect this idea with the "eye of
Shiva" which sees and knows all, and records all, as [Page 894] does the
human eye in lesser degree; all is photographed upon the astral light, as the
human eye receives impressions upon the retina.
The same thought is frequently conveyed in the Christian Bible, in the
Hebrew and Christian recognition of the all-seeing eye of God. The application and value of the hints here
given may be apparent if the subject of the third eye is studied, and its
relation to the spine, and the spinal currents investigated. This third eye is one of the objects of
kundalinic vivification, and in the spinal territory there is first the centre
at the base of the spine, the home of the sleeping fire. Next we have the triple channel along which
that fire will travel in due course of evolution, and finally we find at the
summit of the column, and surmounting all, that small organ called the pineal
gland, which when vivified causes the third eye to open, and the beauties of
the higher, subtler planes to stand revealed.
All this physico-psychical occurrence is possible to man owing to
certain events which happened to the Heavenly Serpent in the second, or
serpent, round. These happenings
necessitated the formation and evolution of that peculiar and mysterious family
we call the reptilian. These forms of
divine life are very intimately connected with the second planetary scheme,
being responsive to energy emanating from that scheme, and reaching the earth
via the second globe in the second chain.
A group of special devas (connected with a particular open sound in the
planetary Word), work with the reptile evolution.
TCF, page 855
Lotuses of revelation. … Those
in which the "jewel" is just about to be revealed.
Lotuses with perfume. Those
whose occult "smell" or aroma is permeating their environment. They are those Egos who have not yet
completely unfolded the final tier of petals, but whose lives are of magnetic
force in the three worlds, and whose careers are distinguished by altruistic
service.
Radiant lotuses, or those whose light is beginning to shine forth as
lights in a dark place.
They are grouped also according to primary
colour, to subsidiary colouring, according to key or tone, and one tabulation
is entirely numerical.
TCF, page 904
The Salamanders, or the fiery lives which can be seen by clairvoyants
leaping in the flames of a furnace or of a volcano; this group can be
subdivided into four groups according to color—red, orange, yellow, and violet—the last of which approximate very
closely to the devas of the fourth ether.
TCF, page 911-914
Devas
of all kinds and colours are found on the physical etheric levels, but the
prevailing hue is violet, hence the term so often employed, the "devas
of the shadows." With the coming in
of the ceremonial ray of violet, we have the amplification therefore of the violet
vibration, always inherent on these levels, and the great opportunity therefore
for contact between the two kingdoms. It
is in the development of etheric vision (which is a capacity of the physical
human eye) and not in clairvoyance that this mutual apprehension will become
possible. With the coming in likewise of
this ray will arrive those who belong thereon, with a natural gift of seeing
etherically. Children will frequently be
born who will [Page 912] see etherically as easily as the average human being
sees physically; as conditions of harmony gradually evolve out of the present
world chaos, devas and human beings will meet as friends.
As the two planes, astral and physical, merge
and blend, and continuity of consciousness is experienced upon the two, it will
be difficult for human beings to differentiate at first between devas of the
astral plane, and those of the physical.
At the beginning of this period of recognition, men will principally
contact the violet devas, for those of the higher ranks amongst them are
definitely making the attempt to contact the human. These devas of the shadows are of a dark purple on the fourth etheric level, of
a lighter purple, much the same colour as violet, on the third etheric level, a
light violet on the second, whilst on the atomic subplane they are of a
glorious translucent lavender.
Some of the groups of devas to be contacted on
the physical plane are as follows:
Four groups of violet devas, associated with
the etheric doubles of all that exists on the physical plane. These four are in two divisions, those
associated with the building of the etheric doubles, and those out of whose
substance these doubles are built.
The green devas of the vegetable kingdom. These exist in two divisions also. They are of high development, and will be
contacted principally along the lines of magnetisation. The greater devas of this order preside over
the magnetic spots of the earth, guard the solitude of the forests, reserve
intact spaces on the planet which are required to be kept inviolate; they
defend them from molestation, and with the violet devas are at this time
working definitely, though temporarily, under the Lord Maitreya. The Raja Lord of the astral plane, Varuna
[Page 913] and his brother Kshiti, have been called to the council chamber of
the Hierarchy for specific consultation, and just as the Masters are
endeavouring to prepare humanity for service when the World Teacher comes, so
these Raja Lords are working along similar lines in connection with the devas. They are arduous in Their work, intense in
Their zeal, but much obstructed by man.
The white devas of the air and water who preside over
the atmosphere work with certain aspects of electrical phenomena, and control
the seas, rivers, and streams. From
among them, at a certain stage in their evolution, are gathered the guardian
angels of the race when in physical plane incarnation. Each unit of the human family has his
guardian deva.
Each group of devas has some specific method
of development and some means whereby they evolve and attain a particular goal.
For
the violet devas the path of attainment lies through feeling, and through
educating the race in the perfecting of the physical body in its two
departments.
For
the green devas the path of service is seen in magnetisation, of which the human
race knows nothing as yet. Through this
power they act as the protectors of the vegetable plant life, and of the sacred
spots of the earth; in their work lies the safety of man's body, for from the
vegetable kingdom for the remainder of this round comes the nourishment of that
body.
For
the white devas the path of service lies in the guarding of the individuals
of the human family, in the care and segregation of types, in the control of
the water and air elementals, and much that concerns the fish kingdom.
Thus in the service of humanity in some form
or another lies attainment for these physical plane devas. They have much to give and do for humanity,
and in time [Page 914] it will be apparent to the human unit what he has to
give towards the perfecting of the deva kingdom. A great hastening of their evolution goes
forward now coincident with that of the human family.
There is another group of devas about which
much may not as yet be communicated.
They have come in from another planetary scheme, and are specialists in
their particular line. They have
attained, or passed through, the human kingdom, and are of equal rank with
certain members of the Hierarchy, having chosen to stay and work in connection
with the physical plane evolution. They
are not many in number, being only twelve.
Four work in the violet group,
five in the green group, and two in the white, with a presiding officer of
rank equal to a Chohan. The number of
the deva evolution is six, as that of man is now five, and as ten stands for
perfected man, so twelve stands for perfection in the deva kingdom. This group presides over the three earlier
enumerated. Certain subsidiary groups
are found.
Under group 1 are found all the elementals
working with the etheric doubles of men, all the elementals forming the etheric
bodies wherein is life, and all the elementals working with the etheric
counterparts of so-called inanimate objects.
These are named in the order and the importance of their
development. The violet devas are on the evolutionary path; the elementals are on
the involutionary path, the goal for them being to pass into the deva kingdom
of violet hue.
TCF, page 932
Second. The builders of the
vegetable kingdom. They exist in many
groups and are termed "the surface alchemists" and "the bridging
units." They build the doubles of
every form of vegetable life, and just as the "alchemists" of the
mineral kingdom are mostly concerned with the action of fire, these other
alchemical workers are concerned with the liquid action of divine [Page 932]
manifestation. They work, therefore, in
co-operation with the devas of the waters, or liquid substance, whilst the
earlier mentioned group work with the gaseous devas. A hint is here conveyed, but greater expansion
of the statement is not possible, owing to the danger of the knowledge to be
reached. With them is hidden three
secrets: One is concerned with the earlier solar system, or the green solar
system; another deals with the laws of bridging, or the interaction between
the kingdoms of nature, and the third is connected with the history of the
second round; this secret when revealed will make clear why man (under the law)
should be a vegetarian and not carnivorous.
Scientists are learning already certain things connected with the second
secret, and they may hope, as the knowledge of the significance of colour is extended, to glean hints as to the
first. The third secret will not be
indicated more clearly till the sixth race is living upon earth.
TCF, page 941
These may be considered as the three primary stages, and we find
demonstrated (in connection with the microcosm) the three factors of sound, colour and vibration, which,
under the Law of Analogy, reflect the three aspects of the macrocosm.
TCF, page 945
Another group [Page 945] is to be seen working
in connection with the circulatory system, and with all the liquids, juices,
and waters of the body; whilst the third is largely involved in the
construction of the frame, through the right apportioning of the minerals and
chemicals. A hint in connection with
medicine is here to be found; it is occultly true that just as the liquid devas
and elementals are closely related to the vegetable kingdom, and both to the
plane of the emotions, the logoic liquid body, so the ills of men which affect
the circulatory system, the kidneys, the bladder, and the lubrication of the
joints, will find a CURE in vegetable constituents and above all in the right
adjustment of the emotional nature.
Several influences other than those mentioned
have to be considered when the subject of the work of these builders of man's
body is under discussion. Not only are
they affected by:
a. A man's note,
b.
The colour poured forth by the transmitting agents,
c. The karmic agents,
TCF, page 970-971
When the reaction between the two factors, the
Ego and the receptive physical brain, is established, the interplay is
reciprocal, and the two are keyed or tuned to each other, the second stage is
entered upon. The idea is conceived.
A period of gestation is then pursued, itself
divided into various stages. The man
broods over the idea; he ponders upon it, thereby setting up activity in mental
matter, and attracting to his germ thought the material necessary for its
clothing. He pictures to himself the
contour of the thought form, clothing it with colour, and painting in its
details. Hence will be seen the great
value of a true imagination, and its ordered scientific use. Imagination is kama-manasic in origin, being
neither pure desire nor pure mind, and is a purely human product, being
superseded by the intuition in perfected men, and in the higher Intelligences
of Nature.
When his will, or the initial impulse is
sufficiently strong, and when the
imagination, or power of visualisation, is adequately vivid, the second
part of the gestation period is entered upon, and the vitalisation by desire is
begun. The interplay of mental impulse
and desire produce what might be called a pulsation in the organising form of
the idea, and it becomes alive. It is
yet but nebulous and its tenuosity is great, but it shows signs of organisation
and the outline of its form. Students
must remember that this entire process is being carried on now during this
stage which we are considering from within the brain.
TCF, page 997
a. Six Rules for the Mental Plane.
Certain of the laws of speech will be given, and the significance of
colour and of sound will appear beneath the exoteric form of the phrasing to
those whose perception suffices.
TCF, page 1007
If students will study the effect of the human
eye on the physical plane, and then extend the concept to the work of the
interior Thinker, as he utilises the third eye, they will get an interesting
light upon the subject of thought control.
The old Commentary says:
"When the eye is blind, the forms created
revolve in circles and fulfill not the law.
When the eye is open, force streams forth, direction is assured,
fulfillment is certain, and the plans proceed under law; the eye which is blue in color, and the eye which sees not red,
when open, produce that which is intended with great facility."
TCF, page 1011
The
"Eye of Shiva," when perfected, is blue in colour, and as our solar
Logos is the "Blue Logos" so do His children occultly resemble Him;
but this colour must be interpreted esoterically. It must be remembered also that prior to the
final two Initiations (the sixth and seventh), the eye of the white magician,
when developed, will be coloured according to the man's ray—again esoterically
understood. More anent this question of
colour may not be communicated. According
to the colour, so will be the type of energy manipulated, but here it
must be borne in mind that all magicians work with three types of energy:
a.
That which is the same as their own Ray,
b. That
which is complementary to their own type of force,
c.
Their polar opposite,
and they work, therefore, either along the line of least resistance, or through attraction, and repulsion.
It is through the medium of this
"all-seeing eye" that the Adept can at any moment put Himself in
touch with His disciples anywhere; that He can communicate with His compeers on
the planet, on the polar opposite of our planet, and on the third planet which,
with ours, forms a triangle; that He can, through the energy directed from it,
control and direct the builders, and hold any thought form He may have created
within His sphere of influence, and upon its intended path of service; and that
through his eye by means of directed energy currents He can help and stimulate
His disciples or groups of men in any place at any time.
TCF, page 1018
The analogy in all form building holds good
for gods, men and atoms. The solar
system is (from the higher cosmic planes), seen as a vast blue lotus, and so on down the scale; even the tiny atom of
substance can be so considered. The
distinction between these various lotuses exists in the number and arrangement
of the petals. The solar system is
literally a twelve-petalled lotus, each petal being formed of forty-nine lesser
petals. The planetary lotuses differ in
each scheme, and one of the secrets of initiation is revealed when the number
of the petals of
a.
Our earth planet,
b.
Our planetary polar opposite,
c.
Our complementary or equilibrising planet,
is committed to the initiate. Armed
with this knowledge, he can then work out certain formulas of magic which
enable him to create in the three spheres.
It is the same basic concept which governs thought form building, and
which enables a magician of white magic to produce objective phenomena on the
physical plane.
TCF, page 1024
RULE XIII. The magician must
recognise the four; note in his work the shade of violet which they evidence, and thus construct the shadow. When this is so, the shadow clothes itself,
and the four become the seven.
TCF, page 1081
Many more names might be given but these will suffice to indicate the
general nature of these energy summations, under which all the members of the
human family are gathered and placed according to:
a. Their rhythm,
b. Their quality, [VSK: quality and color synonomous? - thus
color = 2nd aspect?)
c. Their heat,
d. Their light,
e. Their magnetic influence,
f. Their radiation,
g. Their activity.
This tabulation is but an extension of the major one which grouped all
Egos under the divisions of colour,
sound and vibration.
TCF, Page 1082
6. Atoms from the crimson sphere—a
reference to certain Egos who have come to the earth from the planetary scheme
whose note is red,
TCF, Page 1086-1087
Systemic wheels or the atomic life of
individual constellations. These again
are divided into 343 groups, known to the Adept again through a series of
characters forming a word which—through its ideographic nature—conveys
essential information to the Adept. The
ideograph for our solar system may in part be disclosed—not the characters
themselves but a digest of that for which the characters stand. Our solar system is disclosed as being:
a. A system of the fourth order, having its
force centres upon the fourth cosmic plane, and making its objective manifestation
from the fourth systemic plane, via the fourth subplane of the systemic
physical plane.
b.
Blue in colour, esoteric orange and green.
c. A system which is occultly known to the
Adept as "in an airy sign in which the Bird can fly."
d. A system formed of "three fires which
form a fourth."
e. A system in which the Bird has "four
tail feathers" [Page 1087] and hence can occultly "mount to a higher
plane and find its fifth."
f. A system which has four major cycles, and
minor periods of manifestation which are multiples of that figure.
g. A system which in the alchemical
phraseology of the Masters is viewed as being "a product of the fourth;
the fourth itself in process of transmutation; and the living stone with four
shells." All this can be seen at one
glance by the Master who has the ideographic word before Him. Other ideograms are available for His use
which give Him the immediate information as He studies the influences
contacting our solar system.
TCF, Page 1091
It may interest students to know that there
are certain colours, veiling these groups of non-incarnating Monads, at present
totally unknown to humanity. These will
sweep into the consciousness of the human being in another solar system, or
after the taking of the sixth Initiation.
All that we have on earth are reflections of the true colours, and
likewise the reflection of the lowest aspect.
Every colour in the cosmos exists in three
forms:
1.
The true colour.
2.
The illusory appearance of the colour.
3.
Its reflection.
The reflection is that with which we are
familiar; the appearance, or that which veils the reality, is contacted and
known when we see with the eye of the soul, the Eye of Shiva, and the true
colour is contacted after the fifth kingdom has been passed through, and group consciousness
is merging in that of the divine.
Students will, therefore, note that the monadic cosmic wheel can be
[Page 1092] visioned in terms of "true colour," and is seen by the
illumined seer as the combined blending of the primary colours of the three
solar systems.
The monadic systemic wheel, which concerns
this solar system alone, is distinguished by being the totality of the seven
colours of the seven Heavenly Men, and from the vision of the adept of the
fifth Initiation is the sumtotal of the primary colours of the egoic groups of
the differing planetary schemes.
The monadic planetary wheel, which concerns
the particular group of Monads incarnating in a particular scheme, is seen by
the seer as the blending of egoic groups, but with the difference that the
colour is a dual one, and the colouring of the personality ray of the
incarnating Ego is also seen.
TCF, page 1094
It will be apparent [Page 1094] to all conscientious students that the
founders of the symbolical method managed to convey in the symbol of the wheel
an idea of the triplicity of all atomic activity:
a. The central point of active; the hub; positive force
b. The negative stream of life the radiating spokes.
c. The sphere of activity itself, the
circumference of the wheel; the effect
of the interplay of these two
If the student can picture those wheels in
activity, if he can visualise all parts of the wheel as composed of lesser
living wheels, and if he can work into his picture a hint of the interplay of
all these fiery essences, coloured with
certain predominant hues, he will become aware of conditions, and see
before him a picture which is ever apparent to the illuminated seer. If, before doing this, he can vision the
whole of the systemic wheel as in a constant state of circulation, in which the
tiny lesser lives are impelled by the force of the central solar life to pass
throughout the extent of the wheel so that they come in contact with all parts
of the wheel, and are impressed by all the varying types of
"power-substance," then the general nature of the method can be
somewhat ascertained.
TCF, page 1111 -- By looking at
the egoic lotus, the seer can tell the nature of the:
·
Personal self through the condition of the atomic
triangle, and the outer tier of petals.
·
Higher Self, through the colour and arrangement of
the central tier of petals. This tier
gives the "family" of the solar Angel through the arrangement of
atomic lives which form the petals, and the circulation of the streams of
forces in those petals.
·
Monad, through the inner circle of petals; its stage
of lower awareness is revealed in a similar way.
The number of the Ray concerned is known through the quality of the
"light" of the concealed jewel.
TCF, page 1158-1159
The sevenfold energy of the planes, and
therefore of substance, finds its consummation when the four lower centres are
fully active. The sevenfold energy of
the psyche, the consciousness aspect, demonstrates when the three higher in the
three worlds are vibrating with accuracy.
The sevenfold activity of spirit makes itself felt when each of these
seven centres is not only fully active but is rotating as "wheels turning
upon themselves," when they are fourth dimensional and are not only
individually alive but are all linked up with the sevenfold head centre. A man is then seen as he is truly—a network
of fire with flaming focal points, transmitting and circulating fiery
energy. These centres not only receive
the energy through the top of the head, or through a point slightly above the
top of the head, to be more accurate, but pass it out through the head centre
likewise, that which is being passed out being seen as differing in colour, being brighter and vibrating more rapidly than
that which is being received. The
etheric body is formed of a negative aspect of fire, and is the recipient of a
positive fire. As the various types of
fire blend, merge, and circulate, they gain thereby and produce definite
effects in the fires of the microcosmic system.
The centre at the base of the spine (the
lowest with which man has consciously to deal) is one of a peculiar interest,
owing to its being the originating centre for three long streams of energy
which pass up and down the spinal column.
This triple stream of force has most interesting correspondences which
can be worked out by the intuitive student. Some hints may here be given. This channel of threefold energy has itself
three points of supreme interest, which (to word it so as to convey sense to
the interested) may be regarded as:
1. The basic centre at the extreme lowest
point of the spine.
2. The alta major centre at the top of the
spine.
3. The supreme head centre.
TCF, page 1164
So likewise the body macrocosmic has myriads
of energy focal points or feeders which have their place, their function, and
their felt effects. These centres, with
no dense physical globe, constitute what has sometimes been called "the
inner round" and transmit their force through those greater centres which
have been spoken of in occult books as having a connection with the inner
round.
Each of these planetary schemes can be seen as
a lotus having seven major petals, of which each chain forms one petal, but
having also subsidiary petals of a secondary
colour according to the nature and karma of the Entity concerned. It is in the enumeration of these solar
lotuses that occult students go astray.
It is, for instance, correct to say that the planetary scheme
corresponding to the microcosmic base of the spine is a fourfold lotus and has,
therefore, four petals. There are four
outstanding petals of a peculiar hue,
but there are three of a secondary colour, and nine of a tertiary nature. (To students with intuition the hint here
conveyed may reveal the name of the planet, and the nature of its evolution).
TCF, page 1171-1172 -- 7. The Law of Colour.
To get any comprehension of this law students
should remember that colour serves a twofold purpose. It
acts as a veil for that which lies behind, and is therefore attracted [Page
1172] to the central spark; it demonstrates
the attractive quality of the central life.
All colours, therefore, are
centres of attraction, are complementary, or are antipathetic to each other, and students who
study along these lines can find out the law, and comprehend its working
through a realisation of the purpose, the activity, and the relation of colours
to or for each other.
TCF, page 1177-1179 Planetary Schools
URANUS—The School of Magic of the tenth
order. It is sometimes called "the
planet of the violet [Page 1178] force," and its graduates wield the power
of cosmic etheric prana.
EARTH—The School of Magnetic Response. Another name given to its pupils is "The
graduates of painful endeavour" or the "adjudicators between the
polar opposites."
A further hint to be taken in connection with
the two names above given, is that its graduates are said to undergo
examination upon the third subplane of the astral plane.
VULCAN—The School for Fiery Stones. There is a curious connection between the
human units who pass through its halls and the mineral kingdom. The human units on the earth scheme are called
in mystical parlance "the living stones"; on Vulcan they are called
"fiery stones."
JUPITER—The School of Beneficent
Magicians. This planet is sometimes
called in the parlance of the schools, the "College of Quadruple Force
units," for its members wield four kinds of force in constructive magical
work. Another name given to its halls is
"The Palace of Opulence" for its graduates work with the Law of Supply,
and are frequently called "The Sowers."
MERCURY—The pupils in this planetary school
are called "The Sons of Aspiration" or "The Points of Yellow
Life." They have a close connection
with our Earth scheme, and the old Commentary refers to this in the words:
"The points of golden flame merge and blend with the four-leaved plant of
tender green, and change its colour to a tinge of autumn yellow. The four-leaved plant through new and fresh
[Page 1179] inflow becomes the plant with seven leaves and three white flowers."
VENUS—The School with five strict Grades. This again is a planetary scheme closely
related to ours, but its planetary Logos is in a more advanced group of
students in the cosmic sense than is our planetary Logos. Most of its hierarchical instructors come
from the fifth cosmic plane, and are a peculiar group of Manasadevas of very
exalted rank. They are each depicted in
the archives of our Hierarchy as holding a trident of fire surmounted by five
green emeralds.
MARS—The School for Warriors, or the open
grades for soldiers. Four of these
planetary schools are responsible for the energy flowing through the foremost
exponents of the four castes and this not only in India but in all parts of the
world. Its teachers are spoken of as the
"Graduates of the ruddy Fire," and are frequently portrayed as
clothed in red robes, and carrying ebony wands.
They work under the first Aspect logoic and train those whose work is
along the lines of the destroyer.
NEPTUNE—This school concerns itself with the
development and fostering of the desire element and its graduates are called
"the Sons of Vishnu." Their
symbol is a robe with a full sailed boat portrayed over the heart, the
significance of which will be apparent to those who have eyes to see.
It is not permissible to touch upon the other
planetary schools, nor would it profit.
Certain further facts can be ascertained by the student of meditation
who is aligned with his Ego, and in touch with his egoic group.
TCF, page 1183
The streams of energy [a. From the sevenfold
great Bear; b. From the Sun Sirius; c. From the Pleiades] which pour forth
through the medium of the Sun from the egoic lotus and which are in reality
"logoic Soul energy" attract to them that which is akin to them in
vibration. This may sound rather like
the statement of a platitude, but is susceptible of really deep significance to
the student, being accountable for all systemic phenomena. These streams pass in different directions, and in the knowledge of occult direction
comes knowledge of the various hierarchies of being, and the secret of the
esoteric symbols.
The main stream of energy enters at the top
depression in the solar sphere and passes through the entire ring-pass-not,
bisecting it into two halves.
With this stream
enters that group of active lives whom we call the "Lords of Karma." They preside over the attractive forces, and
distribute them justly. They enter, pass
to the centre of the sphere and there (if I may so express it) locate, and set
up the "Holy Temple of Divine Justice," sending out to the four
quarters of the circle the four Maharajahs, their representatives. So is the equal armed Cross formed—and all
the wheels of energy set in motion. This is
conditioned by the karmic seeds of an earlier system, and only that substance
is utilised by the Logos, and only those lives come into manifestation who have
set up a mutual attraction.
These
five streams of living energy (the one and the four) are the basis of the
onward march of all things; these are sometimes esoterically called "the
forward moving Lives." They embody
the Will of the Logos. It is the note
they sound and the attractive pull which they initiate which bring into contact
with the solar sphere a group of existences whose mode of activity is spiral
and not forward.
These
groups are seven in number and pass into manifestation [Page 1184] through what is for
them a great door of Initiation. In some
of the occult books, these seven groups are spoken of as the "seven cosmic
Initiates Who have passed within the Heart, and there remain until the test is
passed." These are the seven
Hierarchies of Beings, the seven Dhyan Chohans.
They spiral into manifestation, cutting across the fourfold cross, and
touching the cruciform stream of energy in certain places. The places where the streams of love energy
cross the streams of will and karmic energy are mystically called the "Caves of dual light" and
when a reincarnating or liberated jiva enters one of these Caves in the course
of his pilgrimage, he takes an initiation, and passes on to a higher turn of
the spiral.
Another stream of energy follows a different
route, which is a little difficult to make clear. This particular set of active lives enter the
heart shaped depression, pass around the edge of the ring-pass-not to the
lowest part of the solar sphere and then mount upwards, coming into opposition
therefore with the stream of downpouring energy. This stream of force is called
"lunar" force for lack of a better term. They form the body of the raja Lord of each
of the planes, and are governed by the Law of Economy.
All these streams of energy form geometrical designs of great beauty to the
eye of the initiated seer. We have the transverse and bisecting lines,
the seven lines of force which form the planes, and the seven spiralling lines,
thus forming lines of systemic latitude and longitude, and their interplay and
interaction produce a whole of wondrous beauty and design. When these are visualised in colour, and
seen in their true radiance, it will be realised that the point of
attainment of our solar Logos is very high, for the beauty of the logoic Soul
is expressed by that which is seen.
TCF, page 1196
Hierarchy I. The first great
Hierarchy is emanated from the Heart of the central Spiritual Sun.32 It is the Son of God Himself, the First Born
in a cosmic sense, even as the Christ was the "Eldest in a vast family of
[Page 1197] brothers," and the "first flower on the human
plant." The symbol of this
Hierarchy is the Golden Lotus with
its twelve petals folded.
TCF, page 1220 -- The Laws and
Symbols
For each of these Laws, there is a definite
formula and symbol. At this stage of
teaching or through this Treatise, it is not possible to reveal or impart the
formulas. The symbol may be described,
and if the student will carefully ponder upon the nomenclature of the Law, its
occult name and its symbol, much may be gathered anent group
inter-relations. It is these laws which
the coming cycle of regeneration will enunciate, and which the Great Lord will
demonstrate upon His appearing, and it is these laws which will gradually be
applied to the working methods of all organisations, brotherhoods, fraternities
and masonic circles. The symbols are as
follows:
Law 1.
A rosy cross, with a bird hovering above it.
Law 2.
Two balls of fire united by a triangle of fire, thus picturing the
triple interplay between all atomic structures.
Law 3.
A pitcher of water, balanced on the head of a man, standing in the form
of a cross. It is this law which brings
in the energy, symbolised by the sign Aquarius, and this law is the governing
factor of the Aquarian age. It might
here be added that the symbol for Law 2 was the [Page 1221] origin of the
balance or scales of the sign Libra, but in the course of the ages its true
form was distorted. Not all the
astrological signs can be traced to the symbols, for only a few can be traced
back as far as the Master's ashram.
Law 4.
Here we have the angel with the flaming sword turning in all
directions. This symbolism is held true
in the Bible where the Angel guards the treasure, and drives man forth in
search of another way of entrance, thus forcing him through the cycle of
rebirth until he finds the portal of initiation. This portal is occultly regarded as freed
from the intervention of the sword as man has developed the ability to soar and
mount as an eagle on wings.
Law 5.
The symbol for this is the mountain with a goat standing on the summit,
and again an astrological sign, that of Capricorn, can be noted. All hard places can be surmounted, and the
summit reached by the "Divine Goat," symbol of the group, viewed as a
unit.
Law 6.
The symbol contains a flaming rosy sun with a sign in the centre—a sign
symbolising the union of fire and water; below this sign is found a
hieroglyphic which may not be given as it gives the clue to the Earth sign, and
the keynote of the physical body of the planetary Logos.
Law 7.
This symbol takes the form of a male and female figure standing back to
back, the male figure holding above his head what looks like a shield or tray
of silver, a great reflector, whilst the female figure holds aloft an urn full
of oil. Below this sign is another
hieroglyphic which [Page 1222] contains the secret of the astral plane, which
has to be dominated by the mental.
These seven laws can be worked out along the
line of correspondences. It will be
found that the energy of any particular centre and that of any one law can be
brought into line with each other.
TCF, page 1222 - The Twenty-two
methods of Group Interplay.
These methods of group interplay can only be grasped through a consideration of the fact that all groups are to be found on one or other of the seven Rays, and that their interaction will, therefore, be triple. This must again be regarded as having:
a. A triple internal interplay.
b. A triple external interaction.
We might, therefore, take the seven Rays and
give the names for the three ways in which the groups on any particular ray
interact with each other, remembering that as we consider them, we are really
studying the twenty-one vibrations of the Law of Attraction or motion, with the
basic vibration, which is the synthesis of the twenty-one added, thus making
the twenty-two:
RAY
METHODS OF ACTIVITY
I. Ray of Power.
1. Destruction of forms through group
interplay. RED
2. Stimulation of the Self, or egoic
principle. ORANGE/AHAMKARA
3. Spiritual impulse, or energy. INDIGO
II. Ray of Love Wisdom.
4. Construction of forms through group
intercourse. INDIGO
5. Stimulation of desire, the love principle. ROSE, HEART
6. Soul impulse, or energy. BLUE
III. Ray of Activity or Adaptability.
7. Vitalising of forms through group work. GREEN
8. Stimulation of forms, the etheric or pranic
principle. VIOLET
9. Material impulse, or energy. BLACK
IV. Ray of Harmony, Union.
10. Perfecting of forms through group interplay. CREAM
11. Stimulation of the solar Angels, or the
manasic principle. YELLOW
12. Buddhic energy. GOLD
V. Ray of Concrete Knowledge.
13. Correspondence of forms to type, through
group influence. ORANGE
14. Stimulation of logoic dense physical body,
the three worlds. INDIGO
15. Manasic energy or impulse. YELLOW
VI. Ray of Abstract Idealism or Devotion.
16. Reflection of reality through group work. ROSE
17. Stimulation of the Man through desire. RED
18. Desire energy, instinct and aspiration. BLUE
VII. Ray of Ceremonial Order.
19. Union of energy and substance through
group activity. WHITE
20. Stimulation of all etheric forms. VIOLET
21. Vital energy. GOLD/GREEN
These twenty-one methods and their synthesis
sum up very largely all that can be said anent the actions and motions of all
deva substance and all forms. Under the
Law of Attraction, the interplay between these ray forces and all atomic forms
is brought about, and manifestation becomes a fact in nature, and the great Maya
is. It might here be noted in conclusion
that the following factors:
3
Atomic Relations
7 Laws
22
Methods of activity
32
make the thirty-two vibrations necessary to produce, as far as man is
concerned, the five planes of evolution.
There are, as we know, the thirty-five subplanes, or in reality the
thirty-two minor vibrations and the three which dominate. Just as the three planes of the Ego on the
mental plane dominate the remaining planes in the three worlds, so in the five
worlds of the Hierarchy the three higher subplanes of the atmic plane hold an
analogous place.
TCF, page 1224-1227 -- THE SEVEN
HIERARCHIES
In closing, we might give certain of the
symbols for the twelve Creative Hierarchies.
It is not possible to give the symbols whereby the Adepts know them, for
in those symbols would be revealed much that it is deemed wiser to guard in
secrecy, but the symbols, as they are [Page 1225] found in records accessible
to disciples, may be given, and from the close scrutiny of these some knowledge
as to the essential character of the hierarchy may be revealed.
The symbols for the five hierarchies which
have passed on may be stated as follows:
1. A ball of green fire with three rays of
rose. PISCES
2. A sphere, divided by a Tau, in colours green
and silver. ARIES
3. A bird, with plumage dark and with the eye
of radiant fire. TAURUS
4. Two stars of vivid rose linked by a band of
violet. GEMINI
5. An ovoid of colour indigo with 5 letters/
symbolic words within its borders. CANCER
These hierarchies are also classed together
and viewed as one and are called in esoteric parlance: "The Lives of that
which appeared, rotated and gathered to themselves the fifth aspect of
Mahat." This symbol, which
signifies the liberation achieved and the gains attained in System One, takes
the form of a blazing altar of pure fire out of which is escaping a bird of
green and gold plumage with five wings outspread. Above this symbol appear certain
hieroglyphics in the earliest Sensa script signifying, "Still I seek."
The symbols of the seven Creative Hierarchies
now in manifestation are all enclosed in a circle denoting limitation and the
circumscribing of the Life. All these
hierarchies are Sons of Desire, and are paramountly an expression of the desire
for manifested life of the solar Logos.
They receive their primary impulse from the cosmic astral plane. They are also the expression of a vibration
emanating from the second row of petals in the logoic Lotus on the cosmic
mental plane.
They are, therefore, one and all an expression
of His love nature, and it is for this reason that buddhi is found at the heart
of the tiniest atom, or what we call in this [Page 1226] system, electric
fire. For the positive central life of every
form is but an expression of cosmic buddhi, and the downpouring of a love which
has its source in the Heart of the Solar Logos; this is itself an emanating
principle from the ONE ABOVE OUR LOGOS, HE OF WHOM NAUGHT MAY BE SAID.
It is love limiting itself by desire, and for
that which is desired. It is love
pouring itself out into forms which are stimulated and aided thereby; it is the
fulfillment of divine obligations incurred in the dim and distant kalpas which
antedate the triplicity of solar systems which we can dimly vision, and it is
the "Father of Light" (in a cosmic connotation) pouring Himself out
for that which binds Him and which it is His dharma to lift up to His
Throne. It is not possible to picture
the revelation of the Love of the solar Logos as it reveals itself to the eye
of the illuminated seer, nor to show the nature of the cosmic Lord of Sacrifice
as He limits Himself in order to save.
At each step along the Path, the extent of that love and sacrifice is
opened up as the disciple knows himself to be in tiny measure also a Lord of
Sacrifice and Love. It can only be
appreciated as the two inner rows of egoic petals are unfolded; knowledge would
not reveal it, and it is only as a man transcends knowledge, and knows himself
to be something non-separative, and inclusive that this particular revelation
comes to him.
This is the secret behind the seven symbols,
each one of which hides an aspect of the sevenfold Love of God as it is
revealed through the hierarchy of Beings, or as the Son reveals it, Who is the
sumtotal of the Love of God. We might
at the same time consider the type of force wielded by a particular hierarchy.
TCF -- ALL OF -- SECTION
THREE (The Electric Fire of Spirit)
Division A.
Certain Basic Statements.
Division B.
The Nature of the Cosmic Paths.
Division C.
Seven Esoteric Stanzas.
DIVISION A. CERTAIN BASIC STATEMENTS.
In connection with this final section of the
Treatise on Cosmic Fire, dealing with the Electric Fire of Spirit it should be
remembered that it will be quite impossible to impart information of a definite
character; this subject is considered (from the standpoint of the esoteric
student) to be devoid of form and therefore incognisable by the lower concrete
mind. The nature of Spirit can only be
intelligibly revealed to the higher grades of the initiates, that is, to those
who (through the medium of the work effected in the third Initiation) have been
put in conscious contact with their "Father in Heaven," the
Monad. Esoteric students, disciples and
the initiates of lower degree are developing contact with the soul, or the
second aspect, and only when this contact is firmly established can the higher
concept be entertained. The nature of
Spirit is dealt with in the New Testament in one of the esoteric statements
addressed by the Great Lord to the initiate, Nicodemus. As he was an initiate of the second degree it
may be supposed that he had some glimmering of understanding as to the meaning
of the words, which were spoken to him as part of his training in preparation
for the third Initiation.
"The wind
(prana or Spirit) bloweth where it listeth, and thou hearest the sound thereof
but canst not tell whence it cometh nor whither it goeth. So is everyone that is born of the
Spirit."
Two ideas are conveyed in this
thought-form,—those of an emanating sound and direction, and that which is:
the result of the sound. This is evolution and the effect of the
directing energy or activity of Spirit.
From the point of view of consciousness these are the only things which
the disciple can intelligently comprehend.
All that it will be possible for us to do in
this section will be to impart the truth in three ways. Through the illumination of the student's
mind as he studies the stanzas of Dzyan which will be found at the commencement
of the treatise. Secondly, through the
realisation that will come to the student as he correlates and ponders upon the
various occult fragments found scattered through the pages, primarily centering
his attention upon the following words:
"The secret
of the Fire lies hid in the second letter of the Sacred Word. The mystery of life is concealed within the
heart. When the lower point vibrates,
when the Sacred Triangle glows, when the point, the middle centre and the apex,
connect and circulate the Fire, when the threefold apex likewise burns, then
the two triangles—the greater and the lesser—merge into one Flame, which
burneth up the whole."
Thirdly, through the consideration of the
various charts and word pictures which will be found also scattered through the
Treatise. The student of the new era
will approach much that he has to master through the medium of the eye,
learning thereby to appreciate and solve that which is presented to him in the
form of lines and diagrams. All is
symbol and these symbols must be mastered.
It
must also be borne in mind that students who approach the subject of SPIRIT
need to grasp the following facts.
I.
Whilst in manifestation and therefore during the period of an entire solar
system, it is not possible for the highest Dhyan Chohan to think in terms of
the negation of organised substance and of the non-existence of form. The goal of realisation for man is
consciousness of the nature of the Soul, the medium through which the Spirit
[Page 1232] aspect, ever works. More it
is not possible for him to do. Having
learnt to function as the soul, detached from the three worlds, man then
becomes a conscious corporate active part of that Soul which permeates and
pervades all that is in manifestation.
Then, and only then, the pure light of Spirit per se becomes visible to
him through a just appreciation of the Jewel hidden at the heart of his own
being; then only does he become aware of that greater Jewel which lies hidden
at the heart of solar manifestation. Even
then at that advanced stage all that he can be aware of, can contact and
visualise, is the light which emanates from the Jewel and the radiance which
veils the inner glory.
The seer (see-er) has then become pure
vision. He perceives but as yet
comprehends not the nature of that which is perceived, and it remains for
another solar system and another kalpa to reveal to him the meaning of that
revelation, the source of that illumination, and the essence of that Life whose
quality is known to him already by its vibratory rate, its heat and its light. Needless it is, therefore, for us to study
and consider that which the initiate of high degree can only dimly sense;
useless it is for us to seek for terms to express that which lies safely hidden
behind all ideas and all thought, when thought itself is not perfectly
understood, and the machinery for comprehension is not perfected. Man himself—a great idea and a specific
one—knows not the nature of that which he is seeking to express.
All that we can do is to apprehend the fact
that there exists THAT which may not as yet be defined, to realise that a
central life persists which permeates and animates the Soul and which seeks to
utilise the form through which the soul expresses itself. This can be stated to be true of all forms,
of all souls, human, subhuman, planetary and solar.
II.
The wise student will likewise regard all forms of expression as in the nature
of symbols. A symbol has three
interpretations; it is itself an expression of an idea, and that idea has
behind it, in its turn, a purpose inconceivable as yet. The three interpretations of a symbol might
be considered in the following way:
1. The exoteric interpretation of a symbol is
based largely upon its objective utility, and upon the nature of the form. That which is exoteric and substantial serves
two purposes:
a. To give some faint indications as to the idea or the concept. This links the symbol in its exoteric nature with the mental plane, but does not release it from the three worlds of human appreciation.
b. To limit and confine and imprison the idea
and so adapt it to the point in evolution which the solar Logos, the planetary
Logos and man have reached. The true
nature of the latent idea is ever more potent, complete and full than the form
or symbol through which it is seeking expression. Matter is but a symbol of a central
energy. Forms of all kinds in all the
kingdoms of nature, and the manifested sheaths in their widest connotation and
totality are only symbols of life—what that Life itself may be remains as yet a
mystery.
These exoteric symbolic forms
are of many kinds and serve many purposes, and this is largely responsible for
the confusion in the minds of men on these matters. All symbols emanate from three groups of
Creators:
The solar Logos, Who is constructing a
"Temple in the Heavens not made with hands."
The Planetary Logoi, who—in Their seven
groups—create through seven ways and methods, and thus produce a diversity of
symbols and are responsible for concretion.
Man, who builds forms and
creates symbols in his work of every day, but who as yet works blindly and
largely unconsciously. Nevertheless, he
merits the name of creator, because he utilises the faculty of mind and employs
the rational quality.
The lesser devas and all the
subhuman entities and all those builders who must in some distant future pass
through the human state of consciousness are not regarded as creators. They work under impulses emanating from the
other three groups. Each of the three
groups is free within certain specified limits.
2. The subjective interpretation is the one
which reveals the idea lying behind the objective manifestation. This idea, incorporeal in itself, becomes a
concretion on the plane of objectivity, and as stated above, an idea lies
behind every form without exception and no matter which group of creators is
responsible for its construction. These
ideas become apparent to the student after he has entered the Hall of Learning,
just as the exoteric form of the symbol is all that is noted by the man who is
as yet in the Hall of Ignorance. As soon
as a man begins to use his mental apparatus and has made even a small contact
with his ego three things occur:
a. He reaches out beyond the form and seeks to
account for it.
b. He arrives in time at the soul which every
form veils, and this he does through a knowledge of his own soul.
c. He begins then himself to formulate ideas in the occult sense of the term and to create and make manifest that soul-energy or substance which he finds he can manipulate.
To train people to work in mental
matter is to train them to create; to teach people to know the nature of the
[Page 1235] soul is to put them in conscious touch with the subjective side of
manifestation and to put into their hands the power to work with soul energy;
to enable people to unfold the potencies of the soul aspect is to put them en
rapport with the forces and energies hidden in the akasha and the anima mundi.
A man can then (as his soul
contact and his subjective perception is strengthened and developed) become a
conscious creator, co-operating with the plans of the Hierarchy of Adepts who
work with ideas, and who seek to bring these ideas (planetary ideas) into
manifestation upon the physical plane.
As he passes through the different grades in the Hall of Learning his ability
so to work and his capacity to get at the thought lying behind all symbols
increases. He is no longer taken in by
the appearance but knows it as the illusory form which veils and imprisons some
thought.
3. The spiritual meaning is
that which lies behind the subjective sense and which is veiled by the idea or
thought just as the idea itself is veiled by the form it assumes when in
exoteric manifestation. This can be
regarded as the purpose which prompted the idea and led to its emanation into
the world of forms. It is the central
dynamic energy which is responsible for the subjective activity.
These three aspects of a
symbol can be studied in connection with all atomic forms. There is, for instance, that unit of energy
which we call the atom of the physicist or chemist. It has itself a form which is the symbol of
the energy which produces it. This form
of the atom is its exoteric manifestation.
There are likewise those atomic aspects which we call—for lack of a
better term—the electrons; these electrons are largely responsible for the
quality of any particular atom, just as the soul of a man is responsible for
his peculiar nature. They represent the
subjective aspect or life. Then,
finally, there is the positive aspect, the energy responsible for the coherence
[Page 1236] of the whole and for the uniformity of the dual manifestation,
exoteric and subjective. This is
analogous to the spiritual meaning, and who can read that meaning?
In man likewise, the human
atom, these three aspects are found. Man
on the physical plane is the exoteric symbol of an inner subjective idea which
is possessed of quality and attributes and a form through which it seeks
expression. That soul in its turn is the
result of a spiritual impulse, but who shall say what that impulse is? Who as yet shall define the purpose behind
the soul or idea, whether logoic or human?
All these three factors are yet in process of evolution; all are as yet "imperfect
Gods," each in their degree and therefore unable to express fully that which
is the spiritual factor lying behind the conscious soul.
III.
The wise student will also ponder well the words "the mystery of
electricity," which is the mystery surrounding that process which is
responsible for the production of light and therefore of vibration itself. We have concerned ourselves in the other two
sections primarily with effects, with the results produced through the
operation of the subjective side of nature (that alone which the occultist
considers and works with) and the consequent production of objective
manifestation. Now we arrive at the
realisation that there is a cause lying behind that which has hitherto itself
been regarded as a cause, for we discover that behind all subjective phenomena
there lies an essentially spiritual incentive.
This incentive, this latent spiritual cause, is the object of the
attention of the spiritual man. The man
of the world is occupied with objective phenomena, with that which can be seen,
be touched, and handled; the occult student is engaged in studying the
subjective side of life, and is occupied with the forces which produce all that
is familiar [Page 1237] upon the terrestrial plane. These forces fall into three main groups:
a. Forces emanating from the mental plane in
its two divisions.
b. Forces of a kamic nature.
c. Forces of a purely physical description.
These the occult student
studies, experiments with, manipulates and correlates; through the knowledge
thus gained there comes an understanding of all that can be known in the three
worlds, and likewise an understanding of his own nature.
The spiritual man is he who
having been both a man of the world and an occult student has reached the
conclusion that behind all those causes with which he has been hitherto engaged
is a CAUSE; this causal unity then becomes the goal of his search. This is the mystery lying behind all
mysteries; this is the secret of which all that has hitherto been known and
conceived is but the veil; this is the heart of the Unknown which holds hid the
purpose and the key to all that IS, and which is only put into the hands of
those exalted Beings Who—having worked their way through the manifold web of
life—know Themselves indeed and in truth to be Atma, or Spirit itself, and
veritable sparks in the one great Flame.
Three times the cry goes out
to all the Pilgrims upon the Path of Life:
"Know thyself" is the first great injunction and long is the
process of attaining that knowledge.
"Know the Self" comes next and when that is achieved, man
knows not only himself but all selves; the soul of the universe is to him no
longer the sealed book of life but one with the seven seals broken. Then when the man stands adept, the cry goes
forth "Know the One" and the words ring in the adepts' ears: "Search for that which is the responsible
Cause, and having known the soul, and its expression, form, search for THAT
which the soul reveals."
Here is to be found the clue
to the search which the adept or perfected man undertakes when He puts His foot
upon one of the seven possible paths.
The only way in which any light can be thrown upon the mystery lies in
the consideration of those seven cosmic Paths, of their names, and
symbols. Very little can be said for the
secrets of the higher initiations may not be revealed, nor the information
given in a book for exoteric publication.
All that can be done is to make certain suggestions, caution against
certain conclusions, and indicate certain symbols which, if pondered upon, may
bring a certain amount of illumination.
DIVISION
B. THE NATURE OF THE SEVEN COSMIC PATHS.
It should be carefully borne
in mind that when the term PATH is used, it is simply an energy term, and
streams of energy are indicated,—seven streams which blend and merge to form
one Path. It should also be noted that
the Adept Who undergoes the discipline and who passes through initiatory rites
which will enable him to tread those seven Paths, has transcended colour, has
passed beyond the veil and has expanded His consciousness so that he is at-one
with the conscious life of His planetary Logos.
He has therefore arrived at a stage incomprehensible to man now; He is
passing out of the realm of substantial forms altogether into the realm of
energy. He knows the life of the two
aspects, the soul and the body, and is passing away from the realm of awareness
altogether. This will sound to the
average reader as a foolish jingling of words and a splitting of hairs but he
who reasons by the Law of Correspondences and who has grasped the basic essential
relativity of the three aspects to each other has arrived at the knowledge that
back of all form is a subjective Life which is known by its quality, its
colour, and its attributes; he has expanded his consciousness until gradually
he has ascertained and made a part of his own conscious ensemble those
attributes and qualities. But the
pulsating dynamic vibration which is the producing cause of both the subjective
life and its qualitative form is as yet—to him—the mystery of mysteries and the
ineffable secret. It becomes the goal of
his endeavour as he sets foot upon one of the seven Paths which face him after
the fifth Initiation. If a Master of the
Wisdom and the one who has unified both the manas (intellect) and wisdom
(buddhi) knows not what shall be revealed to him as he treads the cosmic Path
which is his choice, surely it is needless for us to try and comprehend (at our
relatively low stage of evolution) what is the true [Page 1242] connotation of
the word "Spirit." Pondering
upon these matters is (for the average man) not only useless but also
dangerous. He has not yet the apparatus
of thought necessary for its safe undertaking.
It is as if one tried to force a child in the first grade in school to
comprehend the differential calculus and the laws of trigonometry.
These seven Paths, when
trodden, prepare a man to pass certain cosmic initiations, including those upon
the Sun Sirius. One hint may here be
given. Each of these Paths eventually
leads to one or other of the six constellations which (with ours) form the
seven centres in the body of the ONE ABOUT WHOM NAUGHT MAY BE SAID. Those adepts therefore who stay for a
prescribed length of time upon our planet are a correspondence to those greater
initiates who remain for many kalpas within the solar system, taking certain
mysterious initiations concerned entirely with solar evolution. Their work is concerned with the system as a
centre in the body of that Existence Who vitalises the Logos of our own system.
It might be of value here to
list the seven cosmic Paths as follows:35
Path I.....The Path of Earth Service.
Path II....The Path of Magnetic Work.
Path III...The Path of the Planetary Logos.
Path IV....The Path to Sirius.
Path V.....The Ray Path.
Path VI....The Path of the Solar Logos.
Path VII...The Path of Absolute Sonship.
It must be borne in mind and
no confusion of thought must be permitted that these terms are the generic
names given in the mystic parlance of the Lodge of Masters to the seven methods
of work, of endeavour and of aspiration whereby the perfected sons of Earth's
humanity pass on to specific cosmic Paths or streams of energy, making in their
totality one great cosmic WAY.
The seven paths at a certain
stage which may not be defined become the four paths, owing to the fact that
our solar system is one of the fourth order.
This merging is effected in the following way:
The initiates upon Path I "fight their
way" on to path VI.
The initiates upon Path II "alchemise
themselves" on to Path VII.
The initiates upon Path III through
"piercing the veil" find themselves upon Path V.
This leaves Path IV to be accounted for. Upon this Path pass all those who, through
devotion and activity combined, achieve the goal but who lack as yet the full
development of the manasic principle.
This being the solar system of love-wisdom, or of astral buddhic
development, the fourth Path includes the larger number of the sons of
men. In the hierarchy of our planet the
"Lords of Compassion" are numerically greater than the "Masters
of the Wisdom." The former must
therefore all pass to the sun Sirius there to undergo a tremendous manasic
stimulation, for Sirius is the emanating source of manas. There the mystic must go and become what is
called "a spark of mahatic electricity."
These seven Paths are not concerned with
nature or the balancing of the pairs of opposites. They are concerned only with unity, with that
which utilises the pairs of opposites as factors in the production of
LIGHT. They deal [Page 1244] with that
unknown quantity which is responsible for the pairs of opposites; therefore
they are primarily concerned with that which lies outside the manifested forms,
with the true abstraction or the Absolute.
Spirit and matter are never dissociated during manifestation; they are
the duality lying back of all that is objective. Yet some factor is responsible for them—that
which is neither Spirit nor matter, that which will be regarded as nonexistent
by anyone except the initiate. At the
third Initiation some glimmering light upon this Abstraction is sensed by the
initiate, and by the time the fifth Initiation is reached enough is apprehended
by him to enable him to set forth with ardour on the search for its secret.
Path
I. The Path of Earth Service.
The nature of the spiritual
force which animates the group of our peculiar planetary initiates will become
apparent perhaps if the methods and purposes of their work are studied from the
standpoint of subjective energy, and not so specifically of the material
form. This point of view can be gleaned
most easily from a consideration of the animating impulse lying behind all
world groups which are particularly consecrated to the uplift of the race. This will necessarily include all political,
religious, scientific and metaphysical organisations. It will be found that each and all are
definitely related and have a point of at-one-ment with certain of the numerous
occult bodies which are (usually unknown to the affiliated group) responsible
for the vitalisation of the principal units in any of these organisations doing
this pioneer work.
This first path is the one
that keeps a man linked to the Hierarchy which is pledged to the service of our
planetary scheme. It comprises those who
work under the Lord [Page 1245] of the World in the seven groups into which our
Masters of the Wisdom are divided. Not
so many Masters follow this Path as some of the others, and only enough are
permitted to do so to carry on planetary evolution satisfactorily. More is known about this Path than about any
of the others, and more will continuously be found out as members of our
humanity fit themselves to contact the Brothers of the Hierarchy. Their field of employ, Their methods of work
will eventually become exoteric, and as the seven groups are recognised and known,
schools of development for the filling of posts in these groups will be the
logical sequence.
The adepts who stay upon this
Path are distinguished by a dual attribute, which is their guarantee of
attainment along this line of spiritual endeavour. They are animated by wise-compassion. These words should be carefully studied for
they hold the clue to the nature of this first Path. The adepts who choose this Path are called
esoterically the "beneficent dragons," and the energy with which they
work and the stream of living force upon which they are found emanates from the
constellation of the Dragon, working through the zodiacal sign Libra. This special spiritual energy produces in all
those groups which come under its direct influence a profound faculty for
identification. This identification does
not concern the form nor the soul but only the spiritual point of positive life
which in the human unit we call the "Jewel in the Lotus." It should
be remembered in this connection that there is a jewel at the heart of every
atom. Every jewel has seven facets which
are the seven doorways to the seven Paths.
The "beneficent
dragons" are distinguished by their "luminosity," and it is this
basic quality which lies behind the injunction given by all spiritual teachers
to their pupils in the words "let your light shine forth."
When the adept enters through
the "luminous door" he has before him four very peculiar and esoteric
IDENTIFICATIONS. This entrance takes
place after he has passed the fifth Initiation and has demonstrated his fitness
so to do through a long period of service in connection with our planetary
evolution. These identifications
eventually bring about within the jewel, which is essentially the true
spiritual unit, a momentous happening, and are undergone within the monadic
consciousness after the transcendence of the atmic sheath. These four identifications are connected with
the fourfold lotus of the solar Logos, or with His twelve-petalled heart
centre. This lotus is sometimes called
the "heart of the Sun," and concerns the subjective sun. It is not, however, possible to say more
along this line.
These four Identifications
are only undergone upon this particular Path and are each preceded by three
lesser identifications which make a totality of twelve Identifications,
corresponding to the twelve-petalled lotus.
It will be noted by the accurate student that we are now discontinuing
the use of the word "initiation" which has to do specifically with
consciousness and therefore with duality and are utilising a word which
connotes synthesis, though very inadequately.
The energy which is
manipulated in the process of these identifications is largely that pouring
through the sixth Hierarchy, which has an esoteric relation to the sixth Path
on to which the initiates of Path I have eventually to fight their way. The form through which the adept must work in
order to demonstrate his control of the energy concerned may not here be
given. It may only be stated that luminosity
is gained upon the battle ground through a fight with a dragon. The following summation may be found
suggestive:
PATH I.
EARTH SERVICE
Attributes.......Wise-compassion.
Source...........Constellation of the Dragon,
via Libra.
Method...........Twelve cosmic
Identifications.
Hierarchy........The sixth.
Symbol...........A green dragon issuing from
the centre of a blazing sun. Behind the
sun and over-topping it can be seen two pillars on either side of a closed
door.
Quality gained...Luminosity.
Path
II. The Path of Magnetic Work.
In considering this Path
students must bear in mind that they are dealing with that Path which of all
the seven expresses most fully the effects of the Law of Attraction. It will be remembered by those who have
carefully read this Treatise that this law is the expression of the spiritual
will which produces the manifestation of the Son (Sun). Magnetism—physical, attractive and dynamic—is
the expression of the law in the three worlds as far as the human unit is
concerned. It will be apparent,
therefore, that the adept who passes upon this Path is dealing with that
reality which is the basis of all coherency in nature, and with that essence
which through the force of its own innate quality produces the attractive
energy which brings together the pairs of opposites; it is the force which is
responsible for the interplay of electrical phenomena of every kind. The adept who chooses this cosmic stream of
energy upon which to make certain cosmic approaches and upon which to make a
series of cosmic unfoldments is one who has worked primarily upon the second
ray path prior to the fifth Initiation, and who frequently has also been upon
the fourth ray path. Adepts who have
been upon the fourth ray path and who pass from thence upon the second ray do
not as a rule choose this cosmic line of endeavour.
Those who do the work of
wielding forces or electrical magnetism for the use of the Great Ones on all
planes pass to this Path. They wield the
elemental formative energy, manipulating matter of every density and vibration. Great waves of ideas and surging currents of
public opinion on astral levels as well as on the higher levels where work the
Great Ones, are manipulated by them. A
large number of fifth Ray people, those who have the Ray of Concrete Knowledge
for their monadic ray, pass to this line of endeavour. The inherent quality in the type of the Monad
settles the line of activity. The karma
of the fifth ray is one of the factors which produces this. These Monads work with fohat, and must, to
the end of the greater manvantara. They
have their eventual position on the cosmic mental plane, but as yet the
capacity for abstract thought is so little developed that it is impossible for
us to comprehend the significance of this expression.
Three types of magnetic work
have been mastered by the adept who treads this second Path. He has mastered (in the three worlds) the
magical work of form construction through the manipulation of magnetic energy
and the utilisation of fohatic attractive energy in order to "bind the
builders." This he does through the
medium of a purified lower nature which can act as a perfect transmitter.
He has learnt also the secret
of group coherence on the higher levels of the mental plane in connection with
his own planetary Logos, and with those two other Logoi Who form with his own
Logos a systemic triangle within the solar system. He has passed on also to a comprehension of
the forces which unite the various streams of living energy emanating from Them
in the furthering of the plans of solar evolution. This becomes possible to him when he can
function in the monadic vehicle and is conscious in that unit of force.
This has been expressed in
the old Commentary in the following words:
"The seven Brothers love
each other, yet each seeketh for many aeons the path of hatred. They hate and kill each other until they find
that which dieth not and is not hurt.
Together then they stand and serve and through their service the seven
suns burn up."
The seven suns are destroyed
because when synthesis and unity are reached and when the differentiated forces
become one homogeneous force, the attractive or magnetic effect of this
coherence is a manifested unit on the physical plane as well as on the
subjective side of nature. This produces
necessarily the destruction of all limiting forms, the merging of the fires,
and the blazing forth into objectivity of the vital body of the Logos prior to
the final abstraction and the subsequent dying out or obscuration of the solar
system.
The will or purpose aspect
which is the spiritual life behind all subjective and objective phenomena
suddenly makes itself felt and also seen.
It is the production of this which is the main work of the adept who
passes on to Path II from off his particular ray path.
Those who tread this second
Path work with magnetic or attractive energy because they have identified
themselves with it. Eventually they will
all pass on to Path VII, which is the Path of Absolute Sonship. All that can be said here in regard to their
efforts is the statement that this Path carries them (through the medium of the
logoic head centre) into the Heart of the ONE ABOUT WHOM NAUGHT MAY BE
SAID. They are swept out of systemic
evolution altogether upon a great tide of attractive energy which emanates from
one of the major centres of that great Existence Who is the source of the life
of the solar Logos. This centre is of
course one of [Page 1250] the seven constellations. As it is the most potent constellation as far
as our system is concerned owing to the fact that this system predominantly
expresses love or attractive energy and our Logos is as yet polarised in His
cosmic astral body, it is not permitted to hint at the name of the
constellation. The reason is that if the
name were known and if enough people could do the work of occult meditation and
visualisation, accompanying the work with a vivid imagination, it might be
possible to attract into our system such a downpour of attractive energy from
the constellation involved as to unduly speed up the processes of evolution
upon our planet, and thus upset the systemic economy most dangerously. People do not yet realise the potency of
meditation and especially of group meditation.
The zodiacal sign concerned
is Gemini, and the reason will be apparent to all trained initiates.
A word here is necessary in explanation
of the expression used earlier in connection with the passing of adepts from
off this second Path on to the Seventh Path.
It is stated that they "alchemise themselves" on to it. Some idea as to the meaning of this phrase
may be gained through a consideration of the purposes of heat, when divorced
from moisture, and of the method of employing such heat. The adepts use the "dry alchemical
fires" to produce the results they desire in aiding the evolutionary
process. As they use these "dry
fires" the reaction upon themselves is such that they transmute the
electrical spark (or the Monad within the flame of the planetary Life) and
break it up in such a manner that it can pass through the systemic etheric web
and on to that stream of cosmic energy emanating from the constellation
mentioned above.
They are then known as
"Absolute sparks of parental love," or (in the exoteric language of
the initiates) they pass on to Path VII, that of "Absolute Sonship."
The attributes which the
adept on this path has to possess prior to taking the needed training for the
seventh cosmic method of approach is responsiveness to heat and a knowledge of
rhythm. These words will, of course,
mean nothing to the uninitiated but to some it will convey much and when it is
noted that there will be found coupled with these two attributes an ability to
"see the dancing of the particles of heat and the waves of warm
vibration" (as it is called in an old manual which those in training for
this path employ) it will be apparent that the effects of fire and the laws of
fiery energy and vibration are here dealt with.
Those sons of men who at this time search for the "heat of the love
nature" of the human unit and who add to that search a cultivation of a
vivid imagination and an intense power to visualise are laying a groundwork
upon which this later knowledge may be superimposed. But this is not the easy thing it sounds, for
it involves an identification at present impossible to the majority, and a
power to realise the nature of that which is visualised which negates the idea
of duality,—that which visualises and that which is visualised.
The method employed can only
be expressed as the "entering of the burning-ground." The power to do this is gained through
passing through three preliminary burning-grounds, as is easily to be seen:
1. The burning-ground which
lies between the Hall of Ignorance, and the Hall of Learning. This is the destructive fire which man
creates under the working of the Law of Karma.
2. The burning-ground of the
dead personality which lies between the Hall of Learning and the Hall of
Wisdom. It is found upon the shores of
the river of life and has to be passed prior to the third Initiation.
3. The burning-ground which
is found when a man is ready to pass out of the Hall of Wisdom as a full
adept. It is a triple burning-ground and
is found "upon the mountain top, being kept alive and flaming by all the
winds of heaven." It is responsible
for the destruction of the egoic or causal body.
The third produces a spiritual
alchemicalisation, whereas the other two produced results in the objective or
form side and the subjective or consciousness aspect of his triple nature. When these three burning grounds are passed
then the adept is prepared for another and fiercer experience.
The hierarchies connected
with this Path are mainly the third and the fourth. Only the human units can pass on to these two
paths. The deva hierarchies of the third
order have already passed upon them, and it is their previous work which
enables man to do so. This is a great
mystery and more must not be revealed about it.
The group of the Silent Watchers of all degrees are closely connected
with this second cosmic path. All of
Them are Lords of Sacrifice, and are animated solely by love, and all have
therefore passed through the sacrificial burning grounds.
It is only possible to give
the most elementary of the exoteric symbols.
It takes the form of a funeral pyre in full conflagration, and with four
flaming torches one at each corner. From
the centre of the pyre a fivefold star mounts like a rocket towards a flaming
sun of a predominantly rosy hue.
PATH II.
PATH OF MAGNETIC WORK
Attributes.........Responsiveness to heat and
knowledge of rhythm.
Source.............An unknown constellation
via Gemini.
Method............The entering of the
burning-ground.
Hierarchy.........The third and fourth.
Symbol.............A funeral pyre, four
torches, and a fivefold star mounting towards the sun.
Quality gained...Electrical velocity.
Path
III. Path of training for Planetary
Logoi.
This path is one that
attracts to itself only a few comparatively of the sons of men. It involves a peculiar form of development
and the faculty of continued awareness along with spiritual identification
which is the distinguishing characteristic of the seven cosmic paths.
The adept who chooses this
path preserves in a peculiar way the faculty of sense-perception plus
identification with the spiritual aspect.
They are constantly spoken of in the occult archives as the "Lords Whose
mayavirupa continuously recurs." As
they work with the psyche or the soul of manifestation and are primarily
concerned with the subjective side of life they are connected with that centre
in the Body of the ONE ABOUT WHOM NAUGHT MAY BE SAID which is the source of
conscious sensation. Therefore, they are
vitalised from the solar plexus of that great Existence Whose all-embracing
vitality holds our Logos, along with other solar Logoi, within the sphere of
His consciousness. As is well known, the
solar plexus is the centre which synthesises the reactions and the essential
virtues of the lower three centres. This
point must be borne in mind when studying this cosmic path.
These adepts are also called
the "Lords of cosmic Maya" for they work with that faculty which is
responsible for illusion and with the relation of the Knower to that which is
to be known. Remember here that we are
not considering the three worlds of human endeavour except in so far as they
form a part of a whole. The attributes
which predispose a man for the work of training himself for the path of a
planetary Logos are three in number and may be expressed thus:
1. Cosmic vision. These adepts are connected with the logoic
third eye.
2. Deva hearing.
3. Psychic correlation.
All the senses are, as we know, connected with
some centre, and these centres are in turn connected with planetary centres
which are themselves energised from an analogous cosmic source. The adept on this third Path has a specific
connection with the energy which emanates from those cosmic centres which are
related to spiritual vision and spiritual hearing. The sense of touch has primarily to do with
the objectivity of the dense physical form, and with it this particular group
of adepts has nothing to do. Sight, hearing
and the power to correlate the relation between the Self and the Not-Self is
theirs, but the Not-self comes specifically under the guidance and the
stimulation of a totally different group of cosmic workers. It is difficult to convey a clear meaning in
this connection and the student must remember that we are dealing with spirit
and with the other two types of cosmic energy.
This path is trodden by those
who will take up the work of the seven planetary Logoi of the next solar
system, and of the forty-nine sub-planetary Logoi, Their assistants and of
certain other entities working in that particular department. There will be seven systems, though we are
only concerned with the major three, of which our present solar system is but
the second.
Each Chohan of a Ray takes a
certain number of initiates of the sixth Initiation and trains them specially
for this work. Special aptitude in colour and sound predisposes
the choice, and the ability to work with "psyche," or with the
Spirits in evolution, marks a man out for this high post. We might say that the planetary Logoi are the
divine psychologists, and therefore in the training for [Page 1255] this post
psychology is the basic subject, though it is a psychology inconceivable as yet
to us.
Every planetary Logos has, in
His own special planet, schools for the development of subordinate Logoi, and
there trains them, giving them opportunity for wide experience. Even the Logoi Themselves progress onward,
and Their places must be taken.
Students may be surprised to
know that the source of the peculiar cosmic energy which is found streaming
towards our system along this cosmic Path is that of the sun Betelgeuse. This name is, however, a blind. The reason that certain facts connected with
this sun have lately come more prominently before the public is in reality a
subjective one. The science of the soul
in its various aspects (mental, psychical, and spiritual) is making much
headway now in the world, and is absorbing more and more the attention of
thinkers. This is the result of certain
waves of energy impinging upon our solar system and thus eventually finding
their way to our planet. Betelgeuse from
the occult standpoint is a system of the second order, just as our solar system
is one of the fourth order. There is
consequently a relation between these two numbers both in the system and the
cosmos. This influence reaches our
system via the sign Sagittarius.
The work that adepts on this
path have to accomplish primarily is to make possible the manifestation of the
Monad of the solar Logos through the medium of the body of consciousness, or
through the soul-form. They thus repeat
on a higher level the work of those Builders who create and make manifest the
body through which the soul seeks to express itself. They are not concerned with objectivity, and
have a relation to that fifth Hierarchy which gives to man his egoic body.
The adepts on our Earth
planet who seek this path do so through the department of the Mahachohan, which
[Page 1256] works with the intelligence or mental aspects of
manifestation. From this third
department they pass under the direct training of one of the Buddhas of
Activity, and in the final stages are personally taught by Sanat Kumara,
functioning as the embodied planetary Logos.
This training concerns itself with three main subjects:
1. With colour, that which veils the Spirit aspect,
as dense form veils the soul.
2. With sound, that which
Spirit utters in order to make itself conscious, and to produce psychic
awareness. The whole science of mantra
yoga is mastered by them, but only in connection with the higher planes and
where the cosmic planes are concerned.
3. With the nature of
duality, that which is basically the science of the soul.
It is difficult to express in
words the method employed by a Master of the Wisdom as he enters this cosmic
Path. It has been called the method of
prismatic identification, for it concerns the colour veils which shroud the
spiritual energy. Another mode of
expressing the same truth is to say that it is the method of understanding the
song of life. As the "stars sing
together," as the "chant of the Gods" peals forth in the great
choir of the Heavens, it produces a corresponding colour symphony. This particular mode of identification
enables the adept to act as a director in the chorus and to produce the needed
colour effects and chords. When he can
do this to perfection he is then in a position to take up office as a planetary
Logos. More it is not permitted to say
and the above is but a symbolic way of expressing a basic and difficult truth.
The symbol of this Path (and the only one it is
possible to make exoteric) is a radiant Cross of coloured light; it [Page 1257]
has the long limb formed of the seven colours of the solar spectrum, and the
transverse limb is composed of twelve gradations of colours as yet unknown to
man. In the centre of the Cross is to be
seen a five-pointed star in a deep indigo shade, and behind it is a blazing sun
of a warm dark blue. Above the whole are
certain Sensa characters, depicted in gold, and conveying to the initiated
adept the name of one or other of the planetary Schools in which this
particular line of study is undertaken.
There are, as has been already said, seven such schools and candidates
for this Path from our planetary scheme are transferred to the inner round and
from thence to the Jupiter scheme.
The quality gained is cosmic
etheric vision, the extent of the vision developed being within the seven
systems which form (along with our solar system) the seven centres in the
cosmic Life with whom our solar Logos is allied. This is sometimes called septenary cosmic
clairvoyance.
One more fact of interest
might here be added. This Path is
sometimes called the "Lotus Path," as it concerns itself with the
construction of the logoic Lotuses of solar Logoi. The schools which prepare for this work are
called in the mystic parlance of the adepts the "lotus lands." The curriculum is termed at times the
"Lotus sleep," as it involves a condition of complete negation where
the form side of manifestation is concerned and an entire abstraction, thus
producing a type of solar samadhi.
Whilst this is being undergone the adept functions in a form or vehicle
which is a correspondence upon the plane of atma to the mayavirupa on the plane
of mind.
PATH III.
THE PATH OF TRAINING FOR PLANETARY LOGOI
Attributes.......cosmic vision, deva hearing
and psychic correlation.
Source...........Betelgeuse, via the sign
Sagittarius.
Hierarchy.......the fifth.
Method..........prismatic identification.
Symbol...........a coloured Cross, with a star
at the centre, and backed by a blazing sun, surmounted by a Sensa Word.
Quality............cosmic etheric vision or
septenary clairvoyance.
Path
IV. The Path to Sirius.
This path is of all the Paths
the most veiled in the clouds of mystery.
The reason for this mystery will only be apparent to the pledged
initiate, though a clue to the secret may be gained if it is realised that in a
peculiar and esoteric sense the sun Sirius and the Pleiades hold a close
relation to each other. It is a relation
analogous to that which lower mind holds to higher mind. The lower is receptive to, or negatively
polarised to the higher. Sirius is the
seat of higher mind and mahat (as it is called, or universal mind) sweeps into
manifestation in our solar system through the channel of the Pleiades. It is almost as if a great triangle of
mahatic energy was thus formed. Sirius
transmits energy to our solar system via that
"...sevenfold brooding
Mother, the silver constellation, whose voice is as a tinkling bell, and whose
feet pass lightly o'er the radiant path between our worlds and hers."
Within the solar system there
is an interesting correspondence to this cosmic interplay in the relation
between the Venus scheme, our Earth scheme and the Venus chain in our scheme.
Curiously enough it will be
through a comprehension of the human antaskarana, or the path which links
higher and lower mind and which is constructed by the Thinker during the
process of evolution, that light on this abstruse matter will come. There is (in connection with our planetary
Logos) just such an antaskarana, and as He builds and constructs it, it forms
part of the fourth Path, and permits the passage of the bulk of our humanity to
this [Page 1259] distant objective, and this without obstruction. A clue to the nature of this Path and as to
the reason why so many of the human Monads seek this particular stream of
energy lies in the right understanding of the above suggestion.
The initiates who tread this
way are primarily those of the fourth and the sixth order. As earlier pointed out, this is the Path that
the "lords of compassion" most frequently follow, and at this time
the Egyptian Master and the Master Jesus are preparing Themselves to tread it. The mystics of the Occident who have come
into incarnation during the past one thousand years are a peculiar group of
Egos whose impulse is towards this type of cosmic energy. In this system they have developed certain
basic recognitions and the "ecstasy" of the occidental mystic is the
germ, latent within him, which will some day flower forth into that cosmic
rapture for which we have as yet no name.
Cosmic rapture and rhythmic
bliss are the attributes of the fourth path.
It is a form of identification which is divorced from consciousness
altogether. The reason also why the
majority of the sons of men follow this Path lies in the fact of its numerical
position. These units of the fourth
kingdom, the bulk of the fourth Creative Hierarchy on this fourth globe of the
fourth scheme in a solar system of the fourth order are innately compelled to
seek this fourth WAY in order to perfect themselves. They are called the "blissful dancing
points of fanatical devotion." This
is as near as we can get to the true description. They have also been described as the
"revolving wheels which turn upon themselves, and find the open door to
perfect bliss."
The energy of Path IV reaches
us from Sirius via the Sun. This must be
understood as a blind behind which one of the signs of the zodiac veils itself.
The hierarchies concerned
with this specific type of [Page 1260] cosmic force hide themselves under the
numbers fourteen and seventeen. This
will serve as a complete blind to the average reader, but will carry to the
pledged chela the hint needed to produce illumination.
The method whereby the adept
fits himself to pass upon this path is termed that of duplex rotary motion and
"rhythmic dancing upon the square."
The symbol, which is first
given to the pledged disciple to study but which may, however, be described, is
a duality of interlocked wheels revolving at a great pace in opposite
directions, and producing a unified whole.
These wheels are portrayed as manifesting electric blue flame, rotating
and revolving with great rapidity around an equal-armed Cross. The Cross is pictured in orange fire with a
deep emerald green circle, flaming at the point in the centre where the four
arms of the Cross meet. The symbolism of
these colours links this fourth path to the solar system preceding this
one. In that system the Sirian influence
was more potent than in the present one.
It is not possible to add
more to this beyond pointing out that the quality gained by the adept who
treads this path may not be revealed. He
comes under the concentrated influence of the energy which is identified with
the planetary antaskarana. It is not
permitted, therefore, to state what its specific quality may be, as it would
convey too much information to the intelligent reader as to the nature and the
objective of our particular planetary Logos.
PATH IV.
THE PATH TO SIRIUS
Attributes.......cosmic rapture and rhythmic
bliss.
Source...........Sirius via the Sun which
veils a zodiacal sign.
Hierarchy.......veiled by the numbers 14 and
17.
Method..........duplex rotary motion and
rhythmic dancing upon the square.
symbol............two wheels of electric fire,
revolving around an orange Cross, with an emerald at the centre.
quality.............unrevealed.
Path
V. The Ray Path.
This Path is one of the great
distributing paths of the system, and is trodden by the adept who has a clear
understanding of the laws of vibration.
It leads to the next cosmic plane with great facility and is therefore
called "the outer door of entry."
As we know, the seven Rays which manifest throughout our solar system,
are but the seven subrays of one great ray, that of Love-Wisdom. This ray Path is the one upon which the
majority of the "Masters of the Wisdom" pass. In the same way many of the "Lords of
Compassion" pass on to Path IV.
Five-eighths of the former pass on to this path just as four-fifths of
the adepts of suffering pass on to Path IV.
In considering these numbers it must be borne in mind that the figures
are of very great magnitude. One-fifth
of the Compassionate Lords is a vast number, whilst three-eighths is a
stupendous number of monads. We must
remember in this connection also that we are only dealing with the adepts of
the fifth Initiation, and are not taking into consideration initiates of lower degrees
nor disciples of many grades. It is
useless for average man to ponder upon these figures. They are too difficult to compute and involve
calculations most abstruse and intricate.
This can be demonstrated by pointing out that from these figures must be
subtracted that two-fifths which (in the next round) pass before the Judgment
Throne and are rejected. Out of the
remaining three-fifths only a percentage which may not be revealed reach final
adeptship, though all pass upon the Path.
The five-eighths above referred to and the four-fifths have reference
only to the two great groups of asekha initiates.
Adepts who pass upon the Ray
Path have to possess attributes which make them exceedingly responsive to
vibration. In their group work
(regarding all the units upon this Path as forming a unified Whole) the results
achieved might be compared to that of a compass upon a ship. They respond primarily to a basic vibration,
not through sensation but through that which is the outgrowth of
sensation. It is a form of realisation
which is the cosmic correspondence to the reaction which comes when the skin is
touched. It is not consciousness but
knowledge through vibration. They are
themselves identified with a certain vibration and they respond to that vibration
alone which is the higher correspondence upon the cosmic planes. Other vibrations they ignore.
They are taught how to
insulate themselves so that no vibration save the one which reaches them from
the cosmic source of the synthetic ray can touch them. Students can get some idea of the lower
correspondence to this as they study the compass, its responsiveness to a
certain magnetic current, and the tendency which it demonstrates to point ever
towards the north. These adepts of the
fifth Path are the constituent factor which occultly holds our solar system
steadily equilibrised in one specific direction. Their main characteristic or attribute may be
described as a sense of cosmic direction.
The source of energy to which
they respond may be regarded as the Pole Star.
It should nevertheless be pointed out that this star serves only as a
blind for a constellation which lies behind,—a constellation which exists only
in etheric matter. It is consequently
ignored by astronomers, though its influence is exceedingly potent within our
system. It should be borne in mind also
that upon another planet within our solar ring-pass-not this fifth Path is the
one that the majority of their adepts follow.
Adepts who are on this Path, therefore, will pass to this other planetary
scheme prior to finding their way [Page 1263] to the Sun and from thence to
cosmic spheres. Adepts from other
schemes are not transferred to our Earth scheme as a school of training as it
is not a sacred planet and therefore lacks such a specific school.
The influence which emanates
from the Pole Star and which is such a potent factor in our solar system
reaches our planet via the sign Aquarius.
The reasons will be noted if the student bears in mind the significance
of water as a symbol of the emotions, which are but a lower manifestation of
love-desire. Aquarius is a force centre
from which the adept draws the "water of life" and carries it to the
multitude. This force from the Pole
Star, via Aquarius, is of special power at this time and the day of opportunity
is therefore great. It is one of the
agencies which make the coming of the Great Lord a possibility. He is Himself upon the fifth Path just as the
Manu is upon the third. Hence the close
link between the two paths, for those on the fifth path can pass to the third
and vice versa. The first and the
seventh, the second and the fourth, and the third and the fifth are but the two
sides of one whole, or the two aspects of the one Path. These three paths (with the fourth Path)
constitute two Paths and the two Paths are but one. This great mystery may not further be
enlarged upon.
The Hierarchies which play a
great part in the introduction of polar influence are the first and the
second. It was this occult truth which
had such a bearing upon the nature of the first two races of mankind and upon
their habitat.
The method whereby the adept
develops the needed powers for this Path have been hinted at above. They might be expressed as a process of
electrical insulation and the imprisonment of polar magnetism. It is not permitted to say more.
The symbol of this path is
five balls of fire (blue fire) confined within a sphere. This sphere is formed by a [Page 1264]
serpent biting its tail, and the entire body of the serpent is closely covered
with written Sensa characters; these characters embody the mantram whereby the
adept insulates himself from the magnetic flow of all currents save that for
which he is responsible.
The quality which the adept
develops as he treads this Path can only be given in the words of the old
Commentary:
"The depression at the
northern point permits entrance of that which stabilises, and acts as the
factor of resistance to that which seeketh to deter or to distract." Perhaps cosmic stability and magnetic equilibrium
serve best to convey the necessary idea.
PATH V.
THE RAY PATH
Attributes.........A sense of cosmic
direction.
Source.............The Pole Star via Aquarius.
Hierarchies.......The first and the second.
Method............A process of electrical
insulation and the imprisonment of polar
magnetism.
Symbol............Five balls of fire enclosed
within a sphere. Sphere is formed of a
serpent inscribed with the mantram of insulation.
Quality.............Cosmic stability and
magnetic equilibrium.
There is no way in which we can express any
teaching or give any information anent the sixth and seventh Paths. All that can be said is as follows:
Path
VI. The Path the Logos Himself is on.
It will be apparent to all
those students who have studied with care the world processes in the light of
the law of correspondences that the Logos on the cosmic planes is evolving
inner cosmic vision, just as man in his lesser degree is aiming at the same
vision in the system. This might be called
the development of the cosmic third [Page 1265] EYE. In the physical plane structure of the eye
lies hid the secret and in its study may come some revelation of the mystery.
A certain portion of the eye
is the nucleus of sight and the apparatus of vision itself. The remainder of the eye acts as a protecting
shell; both parts are required, and neither can exist without the other. It is so in the cosmic sense also, but the
analogy exists on such high levels that words only dim and blur the truth. Certain of the sons of men, a nucleus who reached
a very high initiation in a previous solar system, formed an esoteric group
around the Logos when He decided upon further progress. In consequence He formed this solar system,
desire for cosmic manifestation urging Him on.
This esoteric group remains with the Logos upon the atomic or the first
plane of the system, on the subjective or inner side, and it corresponds in an
occult sense to the pupil of the eye.
The real home of these great Entities is upon the cosmic buddhic plane.
Gradually and by dint of hard
effort, certain Masters have qualified themselves, or are qualifying
themselves, to take the place of the original members of this group thus
permitting of Their return to a cosmic centre around which our system, and the
greater system of Sirius, revolves.
Only one adept here and there
has the necessary qualities, for the development involves a certain type of
response to cosmic vibration. It means a
specialising of the inner sight, and the development of a certain amount of
cosmic vision. More of the deva
evolution pass to this Path than do the human.
Human beings pass to it via the deva evolution, which can be entered by
transference to the fifth, or Ray Path.
On this latter Path the two evolutions merge and from the fifth, the
sixth Path can be entered.
Path
VII. The Path of Absolute Sonship.
This sonship is a
correspondence on the highest plane to that grade of discipleship which we call
"Son of the Master." It is the
Sonship to a Being higher than our Logos of Whom we may not speak. It is also the great controlling Path of
Karma. The Lipika Lords are upon this
Path, and all who are fitted for that line of work, and who are close to the
Logos in a personal and intimate sense pass to this seventh Path. It is the Path of the special intimates of
the Logos and into their hands He has put the working out of karma in the solar
system. They know His wishes, His will
and His aim, and to Them He entrusts the carrying out of His behests. This group, associated with the Logos, forms
a special group linked to a still higher Logos.
These two paths enter into
cosmic states of consciousness as inconceivable to man as the consciousness of
the Ego of a human being is to an atom of substance. It is unnecessary and profitless therefore to
enlarge further upon these exalted states.
DIVISION
C. SEVEN ESOTERIC STANZAS.
STANZA I
(From Archaic Formulas. No. 49)
PATH 1.
The Path of Earth Service.
The Dragon who hideth within
the lowest of the Sacred Three ariseth in His might. In His mouth He holdeth the balances, and in
the balances He weigheth the sons of men who upon the field of battle are
impaled upon His spear.
In the great balance upon
which His eyes are fixed, one scale is veiled in fire of vivid green; the other
hides itself behind a screen of red.
Those sons of Men whose note
responds not to the note of red enter the scale upon the right hand side. From thence they pass upon a path which dimly
can be seen behind the dragon's form.
This path is entered by a
fourfold door. The sacred phrases of the
Sons of Light define it thus: "The
portal of the luminous light, which leadeth from the green into the heart of
indigo, by that rare fire and [Page 1268] richly coloured blaze for which no
name on earth hath yet been found."
Its tone is hidden.
The sons of men (and few
their number is) enter that door of luminous fire when they surmount the crest
of gold which riseth on the dragon's head above the point where gleams
"the eye of fire."
This eye of fire transmits a
strong vibration from the triple Lhas unto a centre in the Adept's head. This when aroused, reveals the Life that is,
the form that shall be, and the work united of the two and four.
These two are drawn
together. Their essence blends. The man who seeks this path is then impaled
upon the spear and thrust within the fiery light which veils the balance. The mystic process then proceeds and...Thus
is the work of SATURN seen, and thus the consummation is effected.
Through SATURN'S fateful
force the victor then is swiftly projected to the summit of the crest, and
thence to that vibrating disk which guards the fourfold door of luminosity.
Three Words are then
committed to the Liberated One. He
stands triumphant on the speeding disk and when their utterance has...the door
is seen ajar, and from its other side a voice is heard to say: "Son of Compassion, Master of Love and
Life, the wheel turns all the time for those who battle on the fiery ground
beneath the dragon's feet."
The first Word having entered
on its mission, the victor lifts His head and seeks to utter forth the second
Word. But, as He sounds it forth, He
arrests its wide vibration, drawing again its power within His heart.
The motion of the disk slows
down. The portal of the fiery light
opens more widely yet. A form is
seen. Unto the Master of the Fiery
Heart, this form presents three precious jewels. Their names are hidden from those sons of men
who have not yet attained the dragon's crest.
These jewels three give to
the Master of the Fiery Heart a portion of the triple force which circulates
within the planet's sphere.
With eye intent and heart
alive with burning love the Master utters not the final Word. He steps from off the disk and turns His
Lotus Feet back to that Path He earlier left behind, and from the other side
remounts the Dragon's crest. Himself a
dragon, He now identifies Himself with those who seek the beast. And thus He serves, turning His back upon the
door of light. He is the offspring of
the dragon and serves His time....
Unknown and unseen by Him, a
greater disk becomes apparent, turning unceasingly. He seeth not its movement for His eyes are on
the world He has returned to serve. The
disk revolves and brings around—before His yet unseeing eye—a greater wider
Door....His eye of vision opens....He treads the first great path, yet knows it
not.
The note that sounds forth
from that first great WAY is yet unheard by Him. Its sound is lost in the uprising cry of the
children of the lesser dragon.
STANZA XVII
(From Archaic Formulas. No. 49)
PATH II. The Path of Magnetic Work.
The cosmic Burning-ground of
living fire lieth in the nethermost part of the western heavens. Its smoke riseth unto that high place where
dwell the Sacred Lhas to Whom the triple Unity within our solar space tender Their
offerings and Their fealty. Its scent of
spices sweet and faint aroma of incandescent...reach to the utmost confines of
the starry vault.
The Two arise and pass the
essential Flame through Their burning-ground, blending Their lesser smoke with
the greater.
This smoke formeth a Path
which reacheth forth unto those spheres within the radiant form of that
Attractive Life, to Whom the sons of being and of men in all their many grades
offer their prayers, their life and adoration.
The Master on this sphere,
which is known as the fourth and is not holy, seeth the fiery WAY; He
respondeth to its heat and seeks to warm Himself within its waves of radiant
fire electric.
A centre at the midway point
within the great Kumaric Body formeth the pyre.
It pulsates and it glows. It becomes
a sea of living fire and draws within itself its own. The smoke which issues from this fiery wheel
formeth a living WAY, veiling the steps ahead.
The Master—with the midway
wheel on fire—enters within the smoke, and enters blind. He sees no step ahead. He hears no voice. He feels no guiding hand. Only the fifth and latest known aids Him to
forward grope, and pass straight onward through the veiling clouds; only the
awakening of His wheel may indicate His progress through the new magnetic
field.
Only the sons of...(GEMINI)
know the way in; only the sons with blazing fire, issuing from the midway
point, may enter in. They throw their
beams ahead to illuminate the WAY. The Adept
of the funeral pyre, the Master of the blazing sphere consumes Himself. Offering Himself the One that is, the new-made
threefold Word, the sacred OM, the fire of God, He treads the burning-ground,
and blazes forth to those who watch as a radiant flaming sun.
He...and draws the people
onward to their goal, warming their hearts, producing dual fire, and leading
all towards the portal of the sun and thence to...(GEMINI).
The mystic Word is veiled by
letters four—E, M, and A and O—. In the
significance of their numbers and the utilisation of their colours is the smoke
dissipated.
STANZA XXXIX
(From Archaic Formulas. No. 49)
PATH III.
Training for Planetary Logoi.
The eye of Shiva opens wide
and those within its range of vision awaken to another form of sleep. They sleep, but yet they see and hear; their
eyes are closed, yet naught that passes in the greater cosmic Seven is missed
by them. They see, and yet they vision
not; they hear and yet their ears are deaf.
Three times the eye of Shiva
closes and three times it opens wide.
Thus three great groups of Lotus Lords are impelled upon Their way.
One group is called the
"Lotus Lords of deep unseeing sleep."
They dream, and as Their dreams take form, the worlds speed on. The great and cruel maya of the planes of
sweet illusion comes into being, draws into its snare the points of unconnected
light, and dims their lustre.
Thus is the work pursued....
The eye through which these
Lotus Lords contact the planes of cosmic vision is inward turned. They see not that which is upon the outer
rim.
The second group has for its
name "the Lords of the Inner Lotus."
These are They who sleep, yet not so deep. They wake enough to guard Themselves from
straying o'er the secret ring-pass-not which rims the great Illusion. They straitly stand, and, through Their very
steadfastness, the forms are held together.
The eye through which these
Lotus Lords look out [Page 1273] upon the great Illusion is upward turned. They see but that which lieth just above
Them; they onward look to that vast mountain top which pierceth through the
circumscribing wheel. This mountain top
shineth with radiant light, reflected from the face of Him Whom the Lords of
worlds within our solar sphere have never seen.
The third group is the strange mysterious triple
group whose name must not be heard as yet within those planetary spheres whose
colour blends not with the blue in just proportion.
The eye through which these Lotus Lords gaze out
upon the cosmic Path is outward turned.
Its hue is indigo. The eye
through which the middle group of Lotus Lords look up is turquoise blue, whilst
the Lords of deep unmoving slumber gaze in through sapphire blue. Thus is the WAY of triple blue formed into
one.
This latter aspect of the eye
of Shiva directs the other two, and gathers all its energy from a far distant
cosmic sphere. The two respond, and in
the treading of the cosmic WAY weave triple force into that path which meets
the need of those who later seek to tread it.
They see; They hear; They
dream, and dreaming build; Their eyes are blind; Their ears are deaf, and yet
They are not dumb. They sound the
several cosmic Words, and weave the seven with the twelve and multiply the
five.
Thus are the planets built;
thus guided, ruled and known.
STANZA LXXVII
(From Archive 49)
PATH IV. The Path to Sirius.
The mysterious Lhas of the sacred
hidden fire withdraw Their thought, emerge from meditation, and all that
is—between the first and third—is lost to sight. Naught is.
Sound dies away. The Words are
lost, for there is none to hear. The
colours fade, and every point grows dim.
The ocean passes into
quietude. The Mother slumbers and
forgets her Son. The Father too retreats
within the unknown place where fire lies hidden.
The serpent stretches forth
inert. Its coils smother the lower fire
and choke the sparks....Silence reigns.
The absent Lhas forget the worlds and play at other games....All passes
into nothingness. Yet still the Lhas
themselves remain.
The mysterious Lhas of the
fivefold force unite Their thought, sink into meditation deep and link the
first and third. The worlds emerge,
and—rushing into forms prepared—pursue their cycles.
The twelve-pointed play Their
part and are the result of the communion of the One above the Sun with one of
the seven wives.
The Master of the Sacred
Heart is He who builds a Path between the sphere whereon His lot is cast [Page
1275] and the great manasic orb. He
builds it knowingly, calling in the aid of points of blue. These emerge from the heart of one of the seven. (The PLEIADES.)
These He bloweth upon and
they find their place as stones in the one Way He constructeth for the treading
of the many as they wend their way through mind to mind and thence to
understanding. (Manas to mahat and
thence to buddhi.)
STANZA CXLVII
(From Archive 49)
PATH V.
The Ray Path.
The Adjuster holds the balances,
and the scales are duly set. The
energies converge, and shake them out of equilibrium. They descend sometimes upon the right hand
side and sometimes upon the left.
The Energies are five in number and their major hue
is gold.
Three
great Words are spoken by the Adjuster, and each Word is heard by those whose
ears have been deaf for seven cycles and whose lips have been sealed for nigh
upon fourteen rounded terms.
The first Word contains the value numerical of the
synthetic indigo. It reverberates forth. The scales descend. He who hath ears to hear it, mounteth the
scales and addeth to that Word another sound.
None have heard it save he who hath stood before the Prince of Doom, and
hath seen darkness descend upon the fivefold sons of flesh.
This dual Word buildeth a
wall which surroundeth the Son of Man whose lips are dumb. It holdeth Him secure until the Word is
spoken which will unseal the fount of speech.
This silence lasteth for
seven times forty-nine years and each year for a day.
When the Silent One within
the wall seeth the Ray [Page 1277] approach, when He changeth the key of the
earlier spoken Word, the disruption of the wall is seen and a door openeth
before Him.
The second Word holds hid
the number of the sacred blue. As it
reverberates, the scales ascend, and the man who seeketh to mount within them
seeth the moment pass and knoweth not what to do.
He struggleth for speech and
raiseth His right hand in supplication to the great Adjuster. From the sacred halls of the City of the
White Island there issueth a messenger who speaketh to Him the following mystic
words:
"As the power enters by
that which is uppermost, and as it issues from the lotus within the head of Him
who hath held His peace, utter this WORD...and look within."
He who hath held His speech
breaks then the silence. He utters the
four deep sounds which cause the scale again to drop within His reach. Another door is seen; it opens wide and thus
the WAY is trodden.
The third Word holds securely sealed the
key to the outer blue. It contains
the order for inversion, and only those can hear that Word whose ears have been
closed for eleven aeons. It is never
heard within the realms of pain. Few
therefore hear it, and those few elude the scales, escape the fiery eye of the
great Adjuster and in Their very blindness find the Path which lieth upon the
further side of the scales.
These Words of high direction
issue from that which lieth upon the...of the directing Life which holdeth our
Lord of Life upon His Path.
STANZA VERY IMPORTANT ((From Archive 49)
PATH VI.
The Path of the Solar Logos.
The major Third carrieth
within it the vibration of that which hath already been. The cosmic Lord from out the greater seven
(Whose sacred Name is hid) seeketh the centre of His life from out the sacred
seven. This is the mystery hid, the
inner secret found in the heart of cosmic space within the groups divine.
The sacred seven with the
greater seven approach their primary, the One Who standeth above, and in their
cyclic outer sweep will some day touch.
The two become the One and are lost in their primary.
Seek ye the same on lesser
scale within the inner round and on the plane of density see the lesser primary
manifest. The law holds good; the
mystery dissolves in TIME.
The major Third in both the
lesser and the greater, the cosmic Lord—with His dim reflection solar—completes
His cycle, meets His brother, becomes the Son, contacts the Mother, and is
Himself the Father. All is One, and
naught divides save in transition and through the agency of time.
The major fifth within the
Eternal Now carrieth with it the vibration of that which is. It marks the point of cosmic knowledge that
extendeth far ahead [Page 1279] into the lengthening present. The cosmic Lord, Whose sacred Name holdeth
for us the wisdom of the spheres, seeketh a form wherein to veil the Essence,
and through the progress of the aeons to perfect the great triplicity.
Hid is the mystery, and
veiled by that which is. Deep is the
essence, and sheathed by that which moves.
Profound the darkness, lost in the heart of being; dense are the forms,
which hide the inner light; gross is the sheath that acteth as a barrier, and
crude the material veiling the latent life.
The major fifth includes the
minor third; the double major marks the point attained. When the major third is synchronised to the
greater fifth and the cosmic note—apportioned to the Lord of Cosmic Love Whose
essence is the fire—the sacred Name is heard.
The cosmic Second approaches
to the denser and the greater. He merges
and He blends, and all is lost in dissonance adjusted. The spheres respond; the Now becomes the past
and blends within the time to be. The
essence and the life, the point within the circle, and the eternal
ring-pass-not becomes as one, and all is peace for aeons. Time ends; space disperses; naught is. Darkness reigns and silence on the
waters. The central calm persists.
The completed chord, the
third, the fifth and seventh within the Eternal Now, carrieth with it the
vibration of that which is to be. Cometh
the Day Be With Us on the greater cosmic plane.
Then life and love and power shew forth as one.
The cosmic Lord, Whose sacred
Name as yet is hid [Page 1280] e'en from the highest Chohan, holdeth within
Himself the source of cosmic action, and the gain of cosmic love. The triple All enters—from out of time and
space—into the centre of pralayic peace.
All is, yet all is not. The wheels turn not. The fires burn not. The veils of colour dissipate. The Three retire within the point of
peace. The triple ring-pass-not acteth
no longer as a barrier.
STANZA IV
(From Archive 63)
PATH VII.
The Path of Absolute Sonship
That which hath no beginning
and no end; That which is seen and yet remains unknown; That which we touch and
yet find unattained, That is the One Who passeth on His WAY.
That which we call the Father
and the Son; That which we deem too high for words to grasp; That which the
Mother deems her Lord and God, That is the One Who mounts the cosmic stair.
That which is seen when each
point of heavenly light sends out its beam upon the midnight blue; That which
we hear in every cosmic note and sense beneath the sound of every form, That is
the One Who chants the heavenly lay and lends His light to swell the cosmic
fire.
That which is known by every
Son of God, who masters step by step the Path of Gold; That which is heard by
every deva lord who hears the Word go forth as the aeons pass away; That which
sounds forth the triple cyclic AUM, reserving yet another sound for higher
cosmic planes, That is the One unknown, the Unrevealed, the One Who chants a
note within a cosmic chord.
That which in every aeon
cometh forth and passeth through His cycle upon a cosmic Path; That which in
greater kalpas will play a god-like game; That [Page 1282] which in all the
cosmic spheres is called "the One above the Son of violet hue," That
is the One Who shineth in the galaxy of stars.
Such is the One to Whom the
sons of glory give everlasting homage as He passes on His WAY. To Him be glory as the Mother, Father, Son,
as the One Who hath existed in the past, the now and That which is to come.
FINALE
The morning stars sang in their courses.
The great paean of creation echoeth yet, and
arouseth the vibration.
There comes cessation of the song when
perfection is achieved.
When all are blended into one full chord, the
work is done.
Dissonance in space soundeth yet. Discord ariseth in many systems. When all is resolved into harmony, when all
is blended into symphony, the grand chorale will reverberate to the uttermost
bounds of the known universe.
Then will occur that which is beyond the
comprehension of the highest Chohan—the marriage song of the Heavenly Man.
__________________
EP I, page 20-21,
Man is a psychic entity, a Life Who, [Page 21] through radiatory influence,
has built a form, coloured it with His
own psychic quality and thus presented an appearance to the environing
world which will persist for as long a time as He lives in form.
EP I, page 24
4. The Lord of Harmony, Beauty and Art.
The main function of this Being is the creation of Beauty (as an
expression of truth) through the free interplay of life and form, basing the
design of beauty upon the initial plan as it exists in the mind of the solar
Logos. The body of manifestation of this life is not revealed, but the activity
emanating from it produces that combination
of sounds, colours and word music that expresses—through the form of the
ideal—that which is the originating idea.
This fourth Lord of creative expression will resume activity upon the Earth
about six hundred years hence, though already the first faint impress of His
influence is being felt and the next century will see a re-awakening of
creative art in all its branches.
EP I, page 61
… golden lotus of the soul …
EP I, page 63 -- First Purpose of Deity (partial)
Let dynamic power, electric light, reveal the
past, destroy the form that is, and open up the golden door. This door reveals the way which leads towards
the centre where dwells the one whose name cannot be heard within the confines
of our solar sphere. … His robe of blue veils
his eternal purpose, but in the rising and the setting sun his orb of red is
seen.
EP I, page 65
This second
ray is the ray of Deity Itself, and is coloured by distinctive aspects of
desire or love. They produce the
totality of the manifested appearances, animated by the Life Which determines the quality. The Father, Spirit or Life, wills to seek the
satisfaction of desire. The Mother or
matter meets the desire and is attracted also by the Father. Their mutual
response initiates the creative work, and the Son is born, inheriting from the
Father the urge to desire or love, and from the Mother the tendency actively to
create forms.
Ray II. Love-Wisdom - The Word is issuing from the heart of God,
emerging from a central point of love.
That Word is love itself. Divine desire colours all that life of
love.
EP I, page 69 [Ray III, chanted
these phrases to him by 6 brothers]
4. God and His form are one. Reveal this fact, Oh sovereign Lord of
form. God and His form are one. Negate the dual concept. Lend
colour to the form. The life is one;
the harmony complete. Prove thus the two
are one. Quality...... the power to
produce synthesis on the physical plane.
5. Produce the garment of the Lord; set forth the robe of many colours. Then separate that robe from That Which hides
behind its many folds. Take off the
veiling sheaths. Let God be seen. Take Christ from off the cross. Quality......scientific investigation.
EP I, page 70 THE FOURTH PURPOSE
OF DEITY; Ray IV. Harmony, Beauty, Art
Colour,
and yet no colour now is seen. Sound and the
soundless One meet in an infinite point of peace. Time and the timeless One negate the thoughts
of men. But time is not.
EP I, page 78 [chanted to5th
ray Lord]
5. God and His Angels now arise and sense the odor rising from the
burning-ground of man. Let the fire do
its work. Draw man within the furnace
and let him drop within the rose-red centre the nature that retards. Let the fire burn. Quality......purification with fire.
EP I, Page 81 [questions to 6
Ray Lord]
1. Why is desire red? Why red as
blood? Tell us, Oh Son of God, why thy
way is red with blood?
Quality......power
to kill out desire.
EPI, page 86 [Whispered to 7th
Ray Lord by brother]
4. See all parts enter into the purpose. Build towards beauty, brother Lord. Make all colours bright and clear. See to the inner glory. Build the shrine well. Use care.
Quality......revelation
of the beauty of God.
EP I, page 88-89
Ray VII..Ceremonial ritual or organisation. This is the reflection on the physical plane
of the two above, and is likewise connected with the Mahachohan. It controls
the elemental forces and the involutionary process and the form side of the
three kingdoms in nature. It holds hid the secret of physical colour
and sound. It is the law.
EP I, page 98
The growth of the colour
sense and the capacity to respond musically to quarter tones and subtle
nuances indicate a thinning of the veil which separates the world of external
and tangible phenomena from that of subjective being and of more subtle
matter. The growth also of etheric
vision and the largely increased numbers of clairvoyant and clairaudient people
are steadily revealing the existence of the astral plane and the etheric
counterpart of the physical world. More
and more people are becoming aware of this subjective realm; they see people
walking around who are either the so-called "dead," or who in sleep
have dropped the physical sheath. They
become aware of colours and distinctive
hues and streams of organised light which are not of this physical world;
they hear sounds and voices which emanate from those who are not using the
physical vocal apparatus, and from forms of existence which are not corporeal.
EP I, page 102-103
An intensification of the light is going on
all the time, and this increase in intensity began on the earth at about the
time when man discovered the uses of electricity, which discovery was a direct
result of this intensification. The
electrification of the planet through the wide-spread use of electricity is one
of the things which is inaugurating the new age, and which will aid in bringing
about the revelation of the presence of the soul. Before long this intensification will become
so great that it will materially assist in the rending of the veil which
separates the astral plane from the physical plane; the dividing etheric web
will shortly be dissipated, and this will permit a more rapid inflow of the
third aspect of light. The light from the
astral plane (a starry radiance) and the light of the planet itself will be
more closely blended, and the result upon humanity and upon the three other
kingdoms in nature cannot be over-emphasized.
It will, for one thing,
profoundly affect the human eye and make the present sporadic etheric vision a
universal asset. It will bring within
the radius of our range of [Page 103] contact the infra-red and ultra-violet
gamut of colours, and we shall see what at present is hidden. All this will tend to destroy the platform
upon which the materialists stand, and to pave the way, first, for the
admission of the soul as a sound hypothesis, and secondly, for the
demonstration of its existence. We only
need more light, in the esoteric sense, in order to see the soul, and that
light will shortly be available and we shall understand the meaning of the
words, "And in Thy light shall we see light."
EP I, page 121-122
There is, for instance, a definite reason why
the bulk of the wild flowers and garden flowers in the occident, and also those
found during the autumn season, are at this time found in tones of yellow and orange; and the mental
calibre of the later sub-races of the Aryan race, as well as its general tone
throughout the Aryan age, is also related to the same reason. The influence of the fourth Ray of Harmony
and Beauty, and the developing power of the fifth Ray of Knowledge (synonymous
to the merging of the intuition and the intellect in highly evolved man) have a
definite effect upon the vegetable
kingdom and upon the human aura.
Yellow-orange shines forth in both.
I mention this as an illustration of an externalisation of ray force,
and as an indication of the value of the esoteric science when applied to the
exoteric.
The
blue ray of devotion passes now into the violet of what we term the ceremonial
ray. What do these words mean? Simply that the
great Musician of the universe is moving the [Page 122] keys, is sounding
another note and thus bringing in another turn of the wheel, and swinging into
the arc of manifestation the ray of
violet, the great note G. These rays
bring with them—in every kingdom in nature—all that is attuned to them: Human
beings, devas of order high or low, elementals of a desirable or undesirable
nature, flowers, fruits, and vegetable life of a certain kind, and animals and
forms of varying species. It is the
passing out of a ray that signals the ultimate extinction of some particular
form, some type of animal life, and leads to some vegetable aspect coming to an
end. Hence the confusion among the
scientists at this time. The process of
coming in is slow, as is all work in nature, and as is the process of passing
out. Simultaneously with the cyclic
birth and emergence of a new ray is the slow return to its source of the
prevailing ray, present at the advent of the new.
At
this time the sixth ray is passing out and is taking with it all those forms
whose keynote is blue—those people, for instance, who with devotion
(misplaced or not) followed some particular object, person or idea. With it passes, therefore, those whom we term
fanatics, those who with one-pointed zeal work towards some sensed
objective. Many of the flowers in which
you now rejoice are passing out, the bluebell, the hyacinth and the olive for
example; the sapphire will become scarce and the turquoise will lose its hue. Flowers of violet colour, of lavender and of
purple will come into favour. Behind
all this lies a purpose profound.
EP I, page 124-126
Secondly, when He Whom both angels and men
await, will approach near unto this physical plane, He will bring with Him not
only some of the Great Ones and the Masters, but some of the Devas who stand to
the deva evolution as the Masters to the human.
Forget not that the human evolution is but one of many, and that this is
a period of crisis among the devas likewise.
The call has gone forth for them to approach humanity, and with their
heightened vibration and superior knowledge unite their forces with those of
humanity, for the progression of the two evolutions. They have much to impart anent colour and
sound, and their effect upon the etheric bodies of men and animals. When that which they have to give is
apprehended by the race, physical ills will be nullified and attention will be
centred upon the infirmities of the astral or emotional body.
These violet devas of the four ethers form, as
you may imagine, four great groups with seven subsidiary divisions. These four
groups work with the four types of men now in incarnation, for it is a
statement of fact that at no time in this round are more than four types of men
in incarnation at any one time. Four
rays dominate at any given period, with one in excess of the other three. I mean by this, that only four rays are in
physical incarnation; for on the plane of the soul all [Page 124] seven types
are of course found. This idea is
brought out in the four castes in India, and you will find that these four are
found universally. The four groups of
devas are a band of servers to the Lord, and their special work is to contact
men and to give them definite and experimental teaching.
They will instruct in the effect of colour in
the healing of disease, especially the effect of the violet light in the
lessening of human ills and in the cure of those physical plane sicknesses which
have their origin in the etheric body or double.
They will teach men to see etherically, by
heightening human vibration by action of their own.
They will demonstrate to the materialistic
thinkers of the world the fact that the superconscious states exist—not the
superhuman only—and will also make clear the hitherto unrecognised fact that
other beings, besides the human, have their habitat on earth.
They will also teach the sounding of the tones
that correspond to the gradations of violet, and through that sounding enable
man to utilise the ethers, as he now utilises physical plane matter for his
various needs.
They will enable human beings so to control
the ethers that weight will be for them transmuted, and motion will be
intensified, becoming more rapid, more gliding, noiseless, and therefore less
tiring. In the human control of the
etheric levels lie the lessening of fatigue, rapidity of transit, and the
ability to transcend time. Until this
prophecy is a fact in consciousness, its meaning is obscure.
They will also teach men how rightly to
nourish the body and to draw from the surrounding ethers the requisite
food. Man will in the future concentrate
more on the sound condition of the etheric body, and the functioning of the
dense physical body will become practically automatic.
They will enable human beings, as a race, and
not as individuals, [Page 125] to expand their consciousness so that it will
embrace the superphysical. Forget not
the important fact that in the accomplishment of this the web that divides the
physical plane from the astral plane will be discovered by the scientists, and
its purpose will eventually be acknowledged.
With that discovery will come the power to penetrate the web, and so
link up consciously with the astral body.
Another material unification will have been accomplished.
Then what else will occur, and what will be
the method of approach to these devas?
More and more, during the next fifteen years, will men receive definite
teaching, often subconsciously, from devas to whom they are linked. This will be done telepathically at
first. Doctors today get much
information from certain devas. There
are two great devas belonging to the green group on mental levels who assist in
this work, and some physicians get much knowledge subjectively from a violet
deva working on the atomic subplane of the physical plane, aided by a deva of
the causal level who works with, or through, their egos. As men learn to sense and recognise these
devas, more and more teaching will be given.
They teach in three ways:
a. By means of intuitional telepathy.
b. Through demonstration of colour, proving
the accomplishment of certain things in this way.
c. By definite musical sounds, which will
cause vibrations in the ethers, which in their turn will produce forms.
The ether will eventually appear to the enhanced vision of humanity to
have more substance than it now has, and as etheric vision increases, the
ethers will be recognised as being strictly physical plane matter. Therefore when in sickness men shall call a
deva, when that deva can destroy diseased [Page 126] tissue by sounding a note
that will result in the elimination of the corrupt tissue, when by the presence
caused by the vibration new tissue is visibly built in, then the presence of
these devas will be generally acknowledged and their power will be utilised.
By what means will their presence be realised
and their powers employed?
First of all, by a definite development of the
human eye, which will then see that which is now unseen. It will be a change within the eye, and not a
form of clairvoyance. Next, by a steady
experimentation with invocations, and through their use the method of calling
the devas will be discovered. This
development must be approached with caution, for to the unprotected it leads to
disaster. Hence the necessity to
inculcate pure living, the learning of protective invocations and formulas, and
the power of the church and of Masonry to protect. Forget not that evil entities exist on other
planes than the physical, that they can respond to analogous vibrations, and
that the invocations that call a deva may, if sounded inaccurately, call a
being that will work havoc. In ritual
lies protection. Hence the emphasis laid
upon church forms and on the Masonic rituals,—an emphasis which will increase
and not grow less as the years slip by.
The force of invocations will be known later.
EP I, page 126-128
Every individual vibrates to some particular
measure. Those who know and who work
clairvoyantly and clairaudiently find that all matter sounds, all matter
pulsates, and all matter has its own colour.
Each human being can therefore be made to give forth some specific
sound; in making that sound he flashes into colour, and the combination of the
two is indicative of some measure which is peculiarly his own.
Every unit of the human race is on some one of
the seven [Page 127] rays; therefore some one colour predominates, and some one
tone sounds forth; infinite are the gradations and many the shades of colour
and tone. Each ray has its subsidiary
rays which it dominates, acting as the synthetic ray. These seven rays are linked with the colours
of the spectrum. There are the rays of
red, blue, yellow, orange, green and violet.
There is the ray that synthesises them all, that of indigo. There are the three major rays—red, blue and
yellow—and the four subsidiary colours which, in the evolving Monad, find their
correspondence in the spiritual Triad and the lower quaternary. The Logos of our system is concentrating on
the love or blue aspect. This—as the
synthesis—manifests as indigo. This
matter of the rays and their colours is confusing to the neophyte. I can but indicate some thoughts, and in the
accumulation of suggestion light may eventually come. The clue lies in similarity of colour, which
entails a resemblance in note and rhythm.
When, therefore, a man is on the red and yellow rays, with red as his
primary ray, and meets another human being who is on the blue and yellow rays,
with a secondary resemblance to the yellow, there may be recognition. But when a man on the yellow and blue rays,
with yellow as his primary colour, meets a brother on the yellow and red rays,
the recognition is immediate and mutual, for the primary colour is the
same. When this fundamental cause of
association or dissociation is better understood, the secondary colours will be
made to act as the meeting ground, to the mutual benefit of the parties
concerned.
Of the colours, red, blue and yellow are
primary and irreducible. They are the
colours of the major rays.
a. Will or Power Red
b. Love-Wisdom Blue
c. Active Intelligence Yellow
We have then the subsidiary rays:
d. Orange.
e. Green.
f. Violet.
and the synthesising ray, Indigo.
EP I, page 163 -- THE SEVEN RAYS
We are told that seven great rays exist in the
cosmos. In our solar system only one of
these seven great rays is in operation.
The seven sub-divisions constitute the "seven rays" which,
wielded by our solar Logos, form the basis of endless variations in His system
of worlds. These seven rays may be
described as the seven channels through which all being in His solar system
flows, the seven predominant characteristics or modifications of life, for it
is not to humanity only that these rays apply, but to the seven kingdoms as
well. In fact there is nothing in the
whole solar system, at whatever stage of evolution it may stand, which does not
belong and has not always belonged to one or other of the seven rays.
The following table may explain the various
characteristics of the seven rays:
Characteristics. Methods of Planet. Colour.
No.
development. (according to
Besant.)
I Will
or Power Raja Yoga Uranus Flame.
representing Sun.
II Wisdom.
Balance.
Intuition. Raja
Yoga Mercury Yellow.
Rose.
III Higher
Mind Exactitude in
thought Venus Indigo.
Higher
Mathematics. Blue.
Philosophy. Bronze.
IV Conflict Intensity of
struggle Saturn Green.
Birth
of Horus Hatha Yoga, the
most dangerous
method of psychic growth.
V Lower
Mind Exactitude in
action The Moon Violet
Practical
Science.
VI Devotion Bhakti Yoga Mars Rose.
Necessity
for an Blue.
object.
VII Ceremonial
Order Ceremonial
observances Jupiter Bright.
Control
over Clear.
forces
of nature. Blue.
EP I, page 196-197
The awakening aspirant begins to sense some of
the beauties
that lie unrevealed behind all forms; the awakened disciple lays the
focus of his attention upon the emerging world of qualities, and becomes steadily aware of colour, of
new ranges of sound, of an inner evolving and newer response apparatus which is
beginning to enable him to contact the unseen, the intangible, and the
unrevealed. He becomes aware of those
subjective impulses which condition the quality of the life, and which are
slowly and gradually revealing themselves.
It is this unrevealed inner beauty which lies
back of the emphasis laid by the churches upon the cultivation of the virtues, and
by the occultists upon the use of a seed thought in meditation. These seed thoughts and virtues serve a
valuable and constructive purpose. The
Biblical truism that "as a man thinketh in his heart, so is he," is
based on the same basic [Page 197] realisation, and the distinction between the
spiritual man and the man of worldly and material purpose consists in the fact
that one is attempting to work with the quality aspect of the life, and the
other is focussing his attention upon the appearance aspect. He may and does employ certain qualities as
he so works, but they are those qualities which have been developed during the
evolutionary process of the divine Life as It has cycled through the subhuman
and human kingdoms.
Each of the kingdoms in nature has developed,
or is developing, one outstanding quality, with the other divine attributes as
subsidiary.
The mineral kingdom has the quality of
activity primarily emphasized, and its two extremes are the tamasic quality, or
the static inert nature of the mineral world, and the quality of
radio-activity, of radiation which is its beautiful and divinely perfected
expression. The goal for all mineral
atomic forms is this radio-active condition, the power to pass through all
limiting and environing substances. This
is initiation, or the entering into a state of liberation, for all mineral
appearances, and the organising of all forms in this kingdom under the
influence of the seventh ray.
The
vegetable kingdom has the quality of attractiveness, expressed in colour, and its
liberation, or its highest form of activity, is demonstrated by the perfume of
its highest forms of life. This perfume
is connected with its sex life, which has group purpose and which calls to its
aid the initiating wind and the insect world.
This is not just a pictorial way of portraying truth. The very nature of perfume, its purpose and
intent, is to affect those agencies which will produce the spreading and the continuity
of the life of the vegetable kingdom.
The "aspirants" in the vegetable kingdom, and the most evolved
of its forms, have beauty and perfume, and are susceptible [Page 198] to the
hidden influences of Those to Whom is confided the initiating of the life-forms
and their bringing to a desired perfection.
Hence the influence of the sixth Ray of Devotion upon this kingdom, and
the application of the Ray of Devotion which (symbolically expressed)
"fixes the eye upon the sun; turns the life ever to the rays of warmth,
and causes the blending of the colours and
the glory of the perfumed radiance."
EP I, Page 198-199
Hence certain initiatory processes are working
out on a large scale in the shedding of blood through the slaughter of the
animal form of the human being in the Great War, for instance. In the war the blood of thousands was poured
out upon the soil, and from the standpoint of living [Page 199] purpose,
certain esoteric results have been achieved.
This fact is a difficult one for man to understand, for his awareness is
as yet primarily that of the form and not of the quality of the life. It is difficult for men to comprehend the
divine purpose working out behind the evils of animal slaughter and the
shedding of blood down the ages, pre-human and human. But through the "pouring out of that water which is of the colour red"
there is eventuating a liberation which will initiate the life of that kingdom
into new states of consciousness and of awareness.
EP I, page 201-202
The first ray man often has strong feeling and
affection, but [Page 202] he does not readily express it; he will love strong contrasts and masses of
colour, but will rarely be an artist; he will delight in great orchestral
effects and crashing choruses, and if modified by the fourth, sixth or seventh
rays, may be a great composer, but not otherwise; and there is a type of this
ray which is tone-deaf, and another which is colour-blind to the more delicate
colours. Such a man will distinguish red
and yellow, but will hopelessly confuse blue, green and violet.
EP I, page 206-207 & 208 & 209-210 & 210-211
[4th
Ray] It is pre-eminently the ray of colour, of the artist whose colour is
always great, though his drawing will often be defective. (Watts was fourth and second rays.) The fourth ray [Page 207] man always loves colour, and can generally
produce it. If untrained as an artist, a
colour sense is sure to appear in other ways, in choice of dress or
decorations.
[5th
Ray] The artist on this ray is very
rare, unless the fourth or seventh be the influencing … rays; even then, his
colouring will be dull
The sixth ray man
will be the poet of the emotions (such as Tennyson) and the writer of religious
books, either in poetry or prose. He is devoted to beauty and colour and all
things lovely, but his productive skill is not great unless under the [Page
210] influence of one of the practically artistic rays, the fourth or seventh.
[7th Ray] It is the ray of form, of
the perfect sculptor, who sees and produces ideal beauty, of the designer of
beautiful forms and patterns of any sort; but such a man would not be
successful [Page 211] as a painter unless his influencing ray were the
fourth. The combination of four with
seven would make the very highest type of artist, form and colour being both in excelsis.
EP I, page 215 -- CHAPTER
II -- The Rays and the Kingdoms in
Nature -- Introductory Remarks
In starting upon a consideration of the
relation of the rays to the seven kingdoms I shall refer to the seven kingdoms
on the upward or evolutionary arc, and not to the seven kingdoms as they can be
enumerated on the involutionary or downward arc. This latter (according to the Theosophical
literature) includes three kingdoms—nebulous, relatively formless, and
unexpressed—and the four kingdoms as enumerated by modern science. With the involutionary arc we have nothing to
do. The understanding of it is well nigh
impossible to the finite mind of the average reader. Though these three involutionary kingdoms
exist, and though the little known about them in the West has received written
form, any real comprehension of the implied truths is entirely lacking. This is quite unavoidable. Their comprehension lies hid in the capacity
to "recover" the past and to see that past as a whole.
The kingdoms which we shall consider in
connection with the rays may be enumerated under the following terms:
1. The Mineral Kingdom VII
2. The Vegetable Kingdom VI
3. The Animal Kingdom V
4. The Kingdom of Men IV
5. The Kingdom of Souls III
6. The Kingdom of Planetary Lives II
7. The Kingdom of Solar Lives I
These kingdoms might be regarded as
differentiations of the One Life, from the angle of:
1. Phenomenal appearance, objective
manifestation, or the externalisation of the solar Logos.
2. Consciousness or sensitivity to the
expression of quality, through the medium of the phenomenal appearance.
Certain of the rays, as might be expected, are
more responsible than certain others for the qualifying of any particular
kingdom. Their effect is paramount in
its determination. The effect of the
other rays is subsidiary, but not absent.
We must never forget that, in the close interrelation of forces in our
solar system, no one of the seven possible forces is without effect. All of them function, qualify and motivate,
but one or other will have a more vital effect than the rest. The following tabulation
will give the major effect of the seven rays and the result of their influence
upon the seven kingdoms with which we are concerned:
1. Mineral VII. Ceremonial Organisation
Radio-Activity.
I. Will or Power The basic Reservoir
of
Power.
2. Vegetable II. Love-Wisdom Magnetism.
IV.
Beauty or Harmony Uniformity of
Colour.
VI.
Idealistic Devotion Upward
Tendency.
3. Animal III. Adaptability Instinct.
VI.
Devotion Domesticity.
4. Human IV. Harmony thru Conflict Experience. Growth.
V.
Concrete Knowledge Intellect.
5. Egoic
or Souls V. Concrete Knowledge Personality.
II. Love-Wisdom Intuition.
6. Planetary
Lives VI. Devotion to Ideas The Plan.
III.
Active Intelligence Creative
Work.
7. Solar
Lives I. Will or Power Universal Mind.
VII.
Ceremonial Magic Synthetic
Ritual.
You will note one interesting difference in
this tabulation, and that is the fact that the vegetable kingdom is the
expression of three rays, whereas the others are expressions of two. Through these three the vegetable kingdom has
been brought to its present condition of supreme beauty and its developed symbolism of colour. The vegetable kingdom is the outstanding
contribution of our Earth to the general solar plan. Each of the planets contributes a unique and
specialised quota to the sum total of evolutionary products, and the unique
production of our particular planetary system is the vegetable kingdom. Other planets contribute forms and
appearances which are their specific offering.
It is needless for me to enumerate them here, for our language has no
equivalent terms, and where there is no equivalent in language there is for
mankind no equivalent in consciousness.
The Earth, then, contributes the vegetable kingdom, and this is possible
because it is the only Kingdom in which three rays have finally succeeded in
coalescing, in fusing and blending; they are also the three rays along a major
line of forces, 2-4-6. When we come to a
more detailed analysis of the rays and their effects on a kingdom in nature, we
shall see why this has produced so unique a contribution. Its success is demonstrated in the uniformity
of its production of green in the
realm of colour, throughout the entire planet.
EP I, page 226
Again speaking symbolically (and what else is possible when dealing
with a mechanism as yet so inadequate as the mind and brain of the average
aspirant?), the mineral kingdom marks the point of unique condensation. This is produced under the action of fire and
by the pressure of the "divine idea".
Esoterically speaking, we have, in the mineral world, the divine [Page
227] Plan hidden in the geometry of a crystal, and God's radiant beauty stored in the colour of a precious stone.
EP I, page 233
2. The Vegetable Kingdom Influences
The second Ray of Love-wisdom, working out in
a vastly increased sensibility.
The fourth Ray of Harmony and Beauty, working
out in the mineral harmonization of this kingdom throughout the entire planet.
The sixth Ray of Devotion or (as it has been
expressed symbolically in The Ancient Wisdom the "urge" to consecrate
the life to the Sun, the giver of that life," or again, the
"urge" to turn the eye of the heart to the heart of the sun.
Results These work out in the second kingdom as
magnetism, perfume, colour and growth towards the light. These words I commend to you for your earnest
study, for it is in this kingdom that one first sees clearly the glory which
lies ahead of humanity:
a.
Magnetic radiation. The blending of the
mineral and vegetable goals.
b.
The perfume of perfection.
c.
The glory of the human aura. The radiant
augoeides
d.
Aspiration which leads to final inspiraton.
Process Conformation,
or the power to "conform" to the pattern set in the heavens, and to produce below
that which is found above. This is done
in this kingdom with greater pliability than in the mineral kingdom, where the
process of condensation goes blindly forward.
Secret Transformation.
Those hidden alchemical processes which enable the vegetable growths in this
kingdom to draw their sustenance from the sun and. soil, and to "transform" it into form and
colour
EP I, page 238-239
At each initiation one of the five secrets is
explained to the initiate, and they are called by the following five names,
which are an attempt on my part to interpret symbolically the ancient name or
sign:
1. The mineral kingdom The secret of the brilliance of the light.
2. The vegetable kingdom The secret of the sacred perfume.
3. The animal kingdom The secret of the following scent.
4. The human kingdom The secret of the double path or of the double breath.
5.
The kingdom of souls....The secret of the golden rose of light.
The symbolic forms in which these five secrets
are hidden, and so conveyed to the intelligence of the initiate, are as
follows:
1.
The mineral secret A diamond,
blue white in colour.
2. The vegetable secret A cube of sandalwood in the heart of the lotus.
3. The animal secret A bunch of cypress, over a funeral urn.
4.
The human secret A twisted
golden cord, with seven knots.
5.
The egoic secret A closed
lotus bud with seven blue rays.
Be all this as it may, certain of the seven
logoic influences are at this time dominant in the five kingdoms; in four
cases, two rays control; in the case of the vegetable kingdom, three rays
control. It must not be forgotten that
these rays are related to each other, and in the great interfacing and
interlocking of the planetary and the solar forces every kingdom comes under
the influence of every ray, yet with certain rays always controlling and
certain others dominating cyclically.
The rays determine the quality of the manifesting life and indicate the
type of the appearance.
In resuming our consideration of the three
divisions of the vegetable kingdom it might be stated that...
Ray VI determines
the type, family, appearance, strength, size and nature of the trees upon our
planet.
Ray II is
the beneficent influence, expressing itself through the cereals and flowers.
Ray IV is
the life quality, expressing itself through the grasses and the smaller forms
of vegetable life,— those which provide the "green carpet whereon the
angels dance".
An important symbolic happening has been consummated [Page 240] at the
close of this Piscean Age, which is the period of the sixth ray influence. This has been the world-wide devastation of
the forests of the world. Everywhere
they have been sacrificed to the needs of man.
Thus have been brought under the influence of fire, those vegetable
forms of life which were ready for the initiation. The major agency in the development of this
kingdom has been water, and this new development, this bringing together of
fire and water in this kingdom, has constituted the subjective fact which
brought the steam age into being. The
vast forest fires, which form such a menace at this time in different parts of
the world, are also related to this "initiation by fire" of a kingdom
hitherto controlled and directed in its growth by the element of water.
Similarly, the coming in of the seventh ray
inaugurated a tremendous event in the mineral kingdom. This I referred to in an earlier book. Through the effect of sound and fire, the
mineral kingdom has also been initiated, and in the great world war, in the
steel factories and the other factories where metal is transmuted into articles
for the use of man, the world of minerals, and the entity which informs that
world, are passing through a major initiation.
This was made possible by the personality ray of the entity, manifesting
through this kingdom, subjecting itself to the initiatory fire. This is of course expressed symbolically,—the
only way in which any aspect of this planetary truth can be grasped by man. It is an interesting, though quite
unimportant fact, that at all the initiations of the kingdoms in nature, the
planetary Logos of a particular ray always functions as the Initiator. This ray cyclically alters. In the major initiations at this time, for
instance, in connection with humanity, not only is the first Initiator, the
Christ, officiating, not only is the Ancient of Days, the embodiment of our
planetary Logos, participating (either actively or behind [Page 241] the
scenes), but behind Them both stands now the Lord of the fifth Ray of Knowledge
and Understanding.
One point of
interest might here be noted. It is
known esoterically that the vegetable kingdom is the transmitter and the
transformer of the vital pranic fluid to the other forms of life on our
planet. That is its divine and unique
function. This pranic fluid, in its form
of the astral light, is the reflector of the divine akasha. The second plane therefore reflects itself in
the astral plane. Those who seek to read
the akashic records, or who endeavour to work upon the astral plane with
impunity, and there to study the reflection of events in the astral light
correctly, have perforce and without exception to be strict vegetarians. It is this ancient Atlantean lore which lies
behind the vegetarian's insistence upon the necessity for a vegetarian diet,
and which gives force and truth to this injunction. It is the failure to conform to this wise
rule which has brought about the misinterprertions of the astral and akashic
records by many of the psychics of the present time, and has given rise to the
wild and incorrect reading of past lives.
EP I, page 246
In the emergence of colour in
the vegetable kingdom another vast influence is seen, and the problem of the
ray influences becomes still more complicated.
In the basic colour, green, we have the indication of the potency of
Saturn. Esoterically speaking, the
vegetable kingdom is upon an advanced stage of the path of discipleship, and
hence Saturn and Mars are active. The influence of the latter planet is to be
seen in the prevalence of the colours
red, rose, yellow and orange in the flowers at this time.
Again, readers would find it interesting to
note mentally the relation of growth to the idealism of the sixth ray. They [Page 247] could learn therefrom the
part that the Ray of Devotion plays in bringing about the urge to evolve. It is growth towards an ideal, or towards a
divine prototype or archetype. Here is
where the secret of this kingdom appears.
The secret is hidden in the word "transformation,"
for the rays 2.4.6 are the great transformers.
The clue to the secret is to be found in the processes of
assimilation and in the building forces that transmute the assimilated
minerals, the absorbed moisture, the food in the air, and the proffered
offering of the insect kingdoms into the manifested bodies, the radiant colours, the magnetic auras,
and the distilled perfumes of this kingdom.
Much along this line has been the subject of investigation by the modern
scientist, but until he recognises the fact of ray influences, and the part
they play in the producing of these factors, he will fail to discover the true
secret of the transformations which he notes.
It will appear, therefore, to the careful
reader, that in the relation of the rays to the kingdoms in nature, and in the
similarity of the rays found functioning in widely differing kingdoms, will be
found their point of contact or door of entry, whereby they can contact each
other.
EP I, Page 262-265 -- C. The
Five Points of Contact
There are five points of contact whereby the
material world can be occultly "raised" up into life and power, just
as there are five centres always to be found in our planet, through which life
and energy pour into the natural world. I refer here to certain centres which
are active where the physical and material life of the planet are
concerned. … These five points, with
their fire "elevating" influences, are as follows, omitting the two
earlier and intangible races which are not strictly human at all, and beginning
with the first of the five races which are human throughout:
1. The Lemurian Race fifth ray The
coming of the Sons of Fire.
2. The Atlantean Race sixth ray The
devotion of the Lords of Love.
3. The Aryan Race third ray The activity of the
Men of Mind.
4. The Coming Race fourth ray The
vision of the Units of Light.
5. The Final Race first ray The will of the
Lords of Sacrifice.
The two earlier races were governed by the
second and seventh rays, respectively, and embody the activity of the form
builder and the constructive energy of the magical organiser. The reader must bear in mind, as he studies
these major ray cycles, that they cover inconceivably long periods of time, and
produce two effects which must be considered.
First, the ray energies, five in number, play
upon the human kingdom itself, and in the course of the ages raise man from the
dead to life; they lift him out of the dark prison of matter into the light of
day. These are the five life-giving
forces that raise the human consciousness to heaven, and the form to
understanding. I know no word to express
the concept except the word "understanding," and its true sense is
seen when divided into its two component parts.
Secondly, these ray energies, working this
time through [Page 264] the human kingdom, raise the subhuman kingdoms in
nature also (after much effort) to life and conscious understanding. Through the five points of spiritual contact,
in each of the three kingdoms, is life brought to nature itself. For this "the whole creation groaneth
and travaileth together in pain until now". Herein is found the secret of the
resurrection, viewing it in the planetary sense,— a resurrection enacted also
individually by each achieving son of God.
This is the great Masonic secret, and the central mystery of the sublime
or third degree in Masonry. It is
sometimes occultly referred to as "the relation of death to the five
life-giving energies seen working upon the third day of revelation" or,
speaking still more symbolically:
"In the chamber of death, the blue light
of dawning day reveals the group of workers who seek to raise the dead. Naught avail their efforts until they blend
the five great forces of the Lord of Magic.
When thus they work as one, in unity complete the work is done they fuse
the life-giving force; the dead are raised, and the work of building can
proceed. The temple can be glorified and
the Word be uttered forth within a chamber of life-giving force and not of
death. Through death to life, from
struggle in the dark to building in the light!
Such is the Plan. Thus do we
enter into life that is a death; pass onward through the door whose pillars
twain stand there forever as a sign of strength and truth divine; thus do we
enter quick within the tomb and die.
Thus are we raised again upon a Word divine, upon a fivefold sign,
and—springing forth—we live'
Then in relation to humanity, the Old
Commentary says: "The Lords of the
fifth great ray of mind have sent us on our way. The Lords of the sixth great ray forced us to
suffer in the cause, yet love it too, and through our deep devotion learn. The Lords of the third great ray bring us,
through mind, unto the funeral pyre, to the stage wherein we die, yet rise
again. In the third room, and on the
third dark day, the Master disappears.
He dies; is lost to sight. But
the five great [Page 265] Lords unite their forces. In fellowship sublime, they work to raise the
dead. Only thus can that Word be spoken
which brings the dead to life. Such is
the work of man for God, of God for man."
EP I, page 289
First, the energies below the diaphragm have
to be lifted up and blended with those above the diaphragm. With the process and rules for so doing we
cannot here deal, except in one case,—the raising of the sacral energy to the
throat centre, or the transmutation of the process of physical reproduction and
of physical creation into that of the creativeness of the artist in some field
of creative expression. Through the
union of the energies of these two centres we shall come to that stage in our
development wherein we shall produce the children of our skill and minds. Where, in other words, there is a true union
of the higher and the lower energies, you will have the emergence of beauty in
form, the enshrining of some aspect of truth in appropriate expression, and
thus the enriching of the world. Where
there is this synthesis, the true creative artist begins to function. The
throat, the organ of the Word, expresses the life and manifests the glory and
the reality behind. Such is the
symbolism lying behind the teaching of the fusion of the lower energies with
the higher, and of this, physical plane sex is a symbol. Mankind today is rapidly becoming more
creative, for the transfusion of the energies is going on under the new
impulses. As we develop the sense of
purity in man, as the growth of the sense of responsibility is fostered, and as
his love of beauty, of colour and of ideas proceeds, we shall have a rapid
increase in the raising of the lower into union with the higher, and thereby
the beautifying of the Temple of the Lord will be tremendously accelerated.
EP I, page 311-313
Man is a living entity, a conscious son of God
(a soul) occupying an animal body. Here
lies the point. He is therefore in the
nature of a link, and a far from missing link.
He unifies in himself the results of the evolutionary process as it has
been carried on during the past ages, and he brings into contact with that
evolutionary result a new factor, that of an individual self-sustaining, self-knowing
aspect. It is the presence of this
factor and of this aspect which differentiates man from the animal. It is this aspect which produces in humanity
a consciousness of immortality, a self-awareness and a self-centredness which
make man truly to appear in the image of God. It is this innate and hidden
power which gives man the capacity to suffer which no animal possesses, but
which also confers on him the ability to reap the benefits of this experience
in the realm of the intellect. This same
capacity, in embryo, works out in the animal kingdom in the realm of the
instincts. It is this peculiar property
of humanity [Page 312] which confers upon it the power to sense ideals, to
register beauty, to react sensuously to music, and to enjoy colour and harmony.
It is this divine something which makes of mankind the prodigal son,
torn between desire for the worldly life, for possessions and experience, and
the attractive power of that centre, or home, from which he has come.
Man stands midway between heaven and earth,
with his feet deep in the mud of material life and his head in heaven. In the
majority of cases his eyes are closed, and he sees not the beauty of the
heavenly vision, or they are open but fixed upon the mud and slime with which
his feet are covered. But when his open
eyes are lifted for a brief moment, and see the world of reality and of
spiritual values, then the torn and distracted life of the aspirant begins.
Humanity is the custodian of the hidden
mystery, and the difficulty consists in the fact that that which man conceals
from the world is also hidden from himself.
He knows not the wonder of that which he preserves and nourishes. Humanity is the treasure-house of God (this
is the great Masonic secret), for only in the human kingdom, as esotericists
have long pointed out, are the three divine qualities found in their full
flower and together. In man, God the
Father has hidden the secret of life; in man, God the Son has secreted the
treasures of wisdom and of love; in man, God the Holy Spirit has implanted the
mystery of manifestation. Humanity, and
humanity alone, can reveal the nature of the Godhead and of eternal life. To man is given the privilege of revealing
the nature of the divine consciousness, and of portraying before the eyes of
the assembled sons of God (at the final conclave before the dissolution) what
has lain hidden in the Mind of God. Hence the injunction before us today (in
the words of the great Christian teacher) to possess in ourselves "the
mind of Christ." This mind
must dwell in us and reveal itself [Page
313] in the human race in ever greater fullness. To man is given the task of raising matter up
into heaven, and of glorifying rightly the form side of life through his
conscious manifestation of divine powers.
EP I, page 372
What can now be seen in the organisation of a
crystal, a jewel and a diamond, with their beauty of form and line and colour, their radiance and geometrical
perfection, will appear likewise through the medium of the universe as a whole.
The Grand Geometrician of the universe
works through this [Page 373] seventh ray, and thus sets His seal upon all form
life, particularly in the mineral world.
This the Masonic Fraternity has always known, and this concept it has
perpetuated symbolically in the great world cathedrals, which embody the glory
of the mineral world and are the sign of the work of the Master Builder of the
universe.
EP I, page 374-375
We talk of the necessity of increasing human
vitality and the vitality of animals and plants; the quality of the
vitality-producing factors—food, sun and the coloured rays so widely used now—is creeping slowly into all
medical thought, whilst even the advertisers of the tinned goods of our modern
civilisation lay the emphasis upon the quota of vitamins. This, esoterically [Page 375] speaking, is
due to the shift of human consciousness on to etheric levels.
EP I, Page 402
b. The emotional desire nature, which is to be found influenced and
controlled by the ray which colours the totality of astral atoms.
EP I, page 406
14. The egoic or soul ray begins to make its presence actively felt,
via the astral body, as soon as alignment has been achieved. The process is as follows:
a. It plays on the astral body externally.
b. It stimulates it internally to greater
size, colour and quality.
c. It brings it and all parts of the physical
life into activity and under control.
EP I, Page 418-421 - REFERENCES TO THE SECRET DOCTRINE
Ray 1...... Will or
Power
Planet Sun,
substituting for the veiled planet Vulcan.
Day Sunday.
Exoteric Colour Orange. S.D.III. p. 478.
Esoteric Colour Red.
Human Principle Prana or life-vitality.
Divine Principle The One Life. Spirit. This is regarded as a principle only when
our seven planes are seen as the seven sub-planes of the cosmic physical plane.
Element The
Akasha. "It is written."
Instrument of Sensation The Light of Kundalini.
Bodily location Vital airs in the skull.
Plane governed The
logoic plane. Divine Purpose or Will.
Metal Gold.
Sense A
synthetic sense, embracing all.
Esoterically. this power is viewed as the life
principle seated in the heart.
Ray
II..........Love-Wisdom
Planet Jupiter.
Day Thursday.
Exoteric Colour Indigo with a tinge of purple.
Esoteric Colour Light blue. S.D.III. p.
461.
Human Principle The auric envelope.
Divine Principle Love.
Element Ether.
"It is spoken." The Word.
Instrument of Sensation Ears. Speech. The Word.
Bodily location The heart.
Plane The
Monadic.
Sense Hearing.
Esoterically, this power is the consciousness
or soul principle, seated in the head.
Ray III..........Active
Intelligence or Adaptability
Planet Saturn.
Day Saturday.
Exoteric Colour Black.
Esoteric Colour Green.
Human Principle Lower mind.
Divine Principle Universal mind.
Element Fire.
"Fire by friction."
Sensation Nervous
system. "It is known."
Bodily location Centres up spine.
Plane The
atmic, or plane of spiritual will.
Sense Touch.
Esoterically, this principle of creative mind
is seen as seated in the throat.
Ray IV...... Intuition,
Harmony, Beauty, Art
Planet Mercury.
Day Wednesday.
Exoteric Colour Cream.
Esoteric Colour Yellow.
Divine Principle Buddhi. Intuition. Pure reason.
Human Principle Understanding. Vision. Spiritual perception.
Element Air.
"Thus is Unity produced."
Instrument of Sensation Eyes. Right eye particularly.
Plane The
Buddhic or Intuitional plane.
Sense Sight.
Esoterically, this is the pure reason, seated
in the ajna centre, between the eyes.
Functioning when the personality reaches a high stage of co-ordination.
Ray V...... Concrete
Knowledge of Science
Planet Venus.
The Lords of mind came from Venus.
Day Friday.
Esoteric Colour Yellow.
Esoteric Colour Indigo.
Human Principle Higher mind.
Divine Principle Higher knowledge. "God saw that it was good."
Element Flame.
Instrument of Sensation Astral body.
Plane Lower
mental plane.
Sense Consciousness
as response to knowledge.
Bodily location Brain.
Esoterically, this principle of sentiency is
seated in the solar plexus.
Ray VI.....Abstract
Idealism, Devotion
Planet Mars.
Day Tuesday.
Exoteric Colour Red.
Esoteric Colour Silvery Rose.
Human Principle Kama-manas. Desire.
Divine Principle Desire for form.
Element Water.
"I long for habitation."
Instrument of Sensation Tongue. Organs of speech.
Plane Astral
or emotional Plane. Desire plane.
Sense Taste.
Esoterically, this principle of desire is
seated in the sacral centre, with a higher reflection in the throat.
Ray VII......
Ceremonial Order or Magic
Planet The
Moon. She is the mother of form.
Day Monday.
Exoteric Colour White.
Esoteric Colour Violet.
Human Principle Etheric force or prana.
Divine Principle Energy.
Element Earth.
"I manifest."
Instrument of Sensation Nose.
Plane Physical
plane, etheric levels.
Sense Smell.
Esoterically, this principle of vitality or
prana is seated in the centre at the base of the spine.
Note:—Esoterically speaking, the planets which
are the expression of the three major rays are:
Ray I....... Uranus.
Ray II...... Neptune.
Ray III..... Saturn.
A study of this will make it
apparent why Saturn is ever the stabiliser.
In this present cycle, the two rays of Power and Love are directing
their energies to Vulcan and Jupiter, whilst Saturn's attention is turned
towards our planet, the Earth.
Thus we have the ten rays of
perfection, the vehicles of manifestation of what H.P.B. calls, "the
imperfect Gods," the planetary Logoi. See A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, where
this is elaborated. Use the Index.
EP I, page 424
Vegetable Kingdom
Secret Transformation, those
hidden alchemical processes which enable the vegetable growths in this kingdom
to draw their sustenance from the sun and soil and "transform" it
into form and colour.
EP II, page 61
Divinity (using the word in its separative sense) connotes the
expression of the qualities of the second or building aspect of God,—magnetism,
love, inclusiveness, non-separativeness, sacrifice for the good of the world,
unselfishness, intuitive understanding, cooperation with the Plan of God, and
many [Page 61] other such qualitative phrases.
Mechanism, after all, implies the creation of a form out of matter and
the infusing of that form with a life principle which will show itself in the
power to grow, to reproduce, to preserve identity of some kind, to flower forth
into certain instinctual reactions, and to preserve its own specific
qualitative nature. Life resembles the
fuel which, in conjunction with the mechanism, provides the motivating
principle and makes activity and the needed movement possible. But there is more to manifestation than forms
which possess a life principle. There is
a diversity running through nature and a qualifying principle which
differentiates the mechanisms; there is a general synthesis and purpose, which
defies the powers of man to emulate it creatively, and which is outstandingly
the major characteristic of divinity. It expresses itself through colour and beauty,
through reason and love, through idealism and wisdom, and through those many
qualities and that purpose which, for instance, animate the aspirant. This is—briefly and inadequately
expressed—Divinity. It is, however, a
relative expression of Divinity. When
each of us stands where stand the Masters and the Christ, we will regard this
whole question from another point of view.
The developing of virtues, the cultivation of understanding, the
demonstration of good character and high aims, and the expression of an ethical
and moral point of view are all necessary fundamentals, preceding certain
definite experiences which usher the soul into worlds of realisation which are
so far removed from our present point of view that any definition of them would
be meaningless. What we are engaged in
is the development of those qualities and virtues which will "clear our
vision", because they produce the purification of the vehicles so that the
real significance of divinity can begin to emerge in our consciousness.
EP II, page 168 -- The Direction
of Ray IV.
"'I take and mix and
blend. I bring together that which I
desire. I harmonise the whole.'
Thus spoke the Mixer, as he stood within his
darkened chamber. 'I realise the unseen
beauty of the world. Colour I know and
sound I know. I hear the music of the
spheres, and note on note and chord on chord, they speak their thought to
me. The voices which I hear intrigue and
draw me, and with the sources of these sounds I seek to work. I seek to paint and blend the pigments
needed. I must create the music which
will draw to me those who like the pictures which I make, the colours which I
blend, the music which I can evoke. Me,
they will therefore like, and me, they will adore....'
But crashing came a note of
music, a chord of sound which drove the Mixer of sweet sounds to quiet. His sounds died out within the Sound and only
the great chord of God was heard.
A flood of light poured
in. His colours faded out. Around him naught but darkness could be seen,
yet in the distance loomed the light of God.
He stood between his nether darkness and the blinding light. His world in ruins lay around. His friends were gone. Instead of harmony, there was
dissonance. Instead of beauty, there was
found the darkness of the grave....
The voice then chanted forth
these words: 'Create again, my child,
and build and paint and blend the tones of beauty, but this time for the world
and not thyself.' The Mixer started then
his work anew and worked again."
EP II, page 169 -- The Direction
of Ray V.
"Deep in a pyramid, on
all sides built around by stone, in the deep dark of that stupendous place, a
mind and brain (embodied in a man) were working. Outside the pyramid, the world of God
established itself. The sky was blue;
the winds blew free; the trees and flowers opened themselves unto the sun. But in the pyramid, down in its dim
laboratory, a Worker stood, toiling at work.
His test tubes and his frail appliances he used with skill. In rows and rows, the retorts for fusing, and
for blending, for crystallising and for that which sought division, stood with
their flaming fires. The heat was
great. The toil severe....
Dim passages, in steady
progress, led upward to the summit.
There a wide window stood, open unto the blue of heaven, and carrying
one clear ray down to the worker in the depths....He worked and toiled. He struggled onwards toward his dream, the
vision of an ultimate discovery. He
sometimes found the thing he sought, and sometimes failed; but never found that
which could give to him the key to all the rest....In deep despair, he cried
aloud unto the God he had forgot: 'Give
me the key. I alone can do no more good. Give me the key.' Then silence reigned....
Through the opening on the
summit of the pyramid, dropped from the blue of heaven, a key came down. It landed at the feet of the discouraged
worker. The key was of pure gold; the shaft of light; upon the key a label, and
writ in blue, these words: 'Destroy that which thou has built and build
anew. But only build when thou has
climbed the upward way, traversed the gallery of tribulation and entered [Page
170] into light within the chamber of the king.
Build from the heights, and thus shew forth the value of the depths.'
The Worker then destroyed the
objects of his previous toil, sparing three treasures which he knew were good,
and upon which the light could shine. He
struggled towards the chamber of the king.
And still he struggles."
The Direction of Ray VI.
"'I love and live and
love again,' the frenzied Follower cried aloud, blinded by his desire for the
teacher and the truth, but seeing naught but that which lay before his
eyes. He wore on either side the
blinding aids of every fanatic divine adventure. Only the long and narrow tunnel was his home
and place of high endeavor. He had no
vision except of that which was the space before his eyes. He had no scope for sight,—no height, no
depth, no wide extension. He had but
room to go one way. He went that way
alone, or dragging those who asked the way of him. He saw a vision, shifting as he moved, and
taking varying form; each vision was to him the symbol of his highest dreams,
the height of his desire.
He rushed along the tunnel,
seeking that which lay ahead. He saw not
much and only one thing at a time,—a person or a truth, a bible or his picture
of his God, an appetite, a dream, but only one!
Sometimes he gathered in his arms the vision that he saw, and found it
naught. Sometimes, he reached the person
whom he loved and found, instead of visioned beauty, a person like
himself. And thus he tried. He wearied of his search; he whipped himself
to effort new.
The opening dimmed its
light. A shutter seemed to close. The vision he had seen no longer shone. The Follower stumbled in the dark. Life ended and the world of thought was
lost...Pendent he seemed. He hung with
naught below, before, behind, above. To
him, naught was.
From deep within the temple
of his heart, he heard a Word. It spoke
with clarity and power: 'Look, deep
within, around on every hand. The light
is everywhere, within the heart, in Me, in all that breathes, in all that
is. Destroy thy tunnel, which thou has
for ages long constructed. Stand free,
in custody of all the world.' The
Follower answered: 'How shall I break my
tunnel down? How can I find a way?' No answer came....
Another pilgrim in the dark
came up, and groping, found the Follower.
'Lead me and others to the Light,' he cried. The Follower found no words, no indicated
Leader, no formulas of truth, no forms or ceremonies. He found himself a leader, and drew others to
the light,—the light that shone on every hand.
He worked and struggled forward.
His hand held others, and for their sake, he hid his shame, his fear,
his hopelessness and his despair. He
uttered words of surety and faith in life, and light and God, in love and
understanding....
His tunnel disappeared. He noticed not its loss. Upon the playground of the world he stood
with many fellow-players, wide to the light of day. In the far distance stood a mountain blue,
and from its summit issued forth a voice which said: 'Come forward to the mountain top and on its
summit learn the invocation of a Saviour.'
To this great task the Follower, now a leader, bent his energies. He still pursues this way...."
The Direction of Ray VII.
"Under an arch between
two rooms, the seventh Magician stood.
One room was full of light and life and power, of stillness which was
purpose and a beauty which was space. The
other room was full of movement, a sound of great activity, a chaos without
form, of work which had no true objective.
The eyes of the Magician were fixed on chaos. He liked it not. His back was towards the room of vital
stillness. He knew it not. The arch was tottering overhead....
He murmured in despair: 'For ages I have stood and sought to solve
the problem of this room; to rearrange the chaos so that beauty might shine
forth, and the goal of my desire. I
sought to weave these colours into a dream of beauty, and to harmonise the many
sounds. Achievement lacks. Naught but my failure can be seen. And yet I know there is a difference between
that which I can see before my eyes and that which I begin to sense behind my
back. What shall I do?'
Above the head of the
Magician, and just behind his back, and yet within the room of ordered beauty,
a magnet vast began to oscillate....It caused the revolution of the man, within
the arch, which tottered to a future fall.
The magnet turned him round until he faced the scene and room, unseen
before....
Then through the centre of
his heart the magnet poured its force attractive. The magnet poured its force repulsive. It reduced the chaos until its forms no
longer could be seen. Some aspects of a
beauty, unrevealed before, emerged. And
from the room a light shone forth and, by its powers and life, forced the
Magician to move forward into light, and leave the arch of peril."
Such are some thoughts,
translated from an ancient metrical arrangement, which may throw some light
upon the duality of personality and the work to be done by the beings found
upon the septenate of rays. Know we
where we stand? Do we realise what we
have to do? As we strive to enter into
light, let us count no price too great to pay for that revelation.
EP II, page 217
3. To develop a station of light, through the
medium of the fourth kingdom in nature, which will serve not only the planet,
and not only our particular solar system, but the seven systems of which ours
is one. This question of light, bound up as it is with the colours of the seven
rays, is as yet an embryo science, and it would be useless for us to
enlarge upon it here.
EP II, page 228-229
… The seven rays, as has often been stated, [Page 229] colour or qualify the divine instincts
and potencies, but that is not all. They
are themselves determined and controlled by these potencies. It must never be forgotten that the rays are
the seven major expressions of the divine quality as it limits (and it does so limit) the
purposes of Deity. God Himself
hews to a pattern, set for Him in a still more distant vision. This purpose or defined will is conditioned
by His instinctual quality or psyche, in just the same way as the life purpose
of a human being is both limited and conditioned by the psychological equipment
with which he enters into manifestation.
I have earlier stated that we were dealing with abstruse and difficult
matters, and that much presented might lie beyond our immediate concrete
understanding. The above statement is,
however, relatively simple, if interpreted in terms of one's own life purpose,
and quality.
EP II, page 237
… The mystic and the occultist have both testified to this vision, and
to it all that is beautiful and
colourful in the world of nature and of thought also bears silent
witness. But what is it? How define it? Men are no longer satisfied to call it God,
and they are right, for it is, in the last analysis, that to which God bends
every effort.
EP II, page 247-248
Secondly, the constant effort to render oneself sensitive to the world
of significant realities and to produce, therefore, those forms on the outer
plane which will run true to the hidden impulse. This is brought about by the cultivation of
the creative imagination. As yet, humanity knows little about [Page
248] this faculty, latent in all men. A
flash of light breaks through to the aspiring mind; a sense of unveiled
splendour for a moment sweeps through the aspirant, tensed for revelation; a sudden realisation of a colour, a beauty,
a wisdom and a glory beyond words breaks out before the attuned
consciousness of the artist, in a high moment of applied attention, and life is
then seen for a second as it essentially is.
But the vision is gone and the fervour departs and the beauty fades out.
EP II, page 293
The second and the sixth rays colour the astral body of every human
being, whilst the physical body is controlled by the third and the seventh
rays.
EP II, page 299 These four charts, depicted or drawn in colour
according to ray, form the dossier of a disciple, for the Master only deals with
general tendencies and never with detail.
EP II, page 368 -- Ray Five.
"'Towards me I draw the garment of my God. I see and know His form. I take that garment, piece by piece. I know
its shape and colour, its form and type, its parts component and its
purposes and use. I stand amazed, I see
naught else. I penetrate the mysteries
of form, but not the Mystery. I see the
garment of my God. I see naught else.'
EP II, page 389
2. The fiat which initiated this creative
activity, as far as it relates to man, has been inadequately couched in the
words: "Let the earth bring forth
abundantly", thus inaugurating the age of creativity. This creative fecundity has steadily shifted
during the past few thousand years into the creation of those effects of which
ideas are the cause, producing within the creative range of man's mind:
a. That which is useful and so contributing to
man's present civilisation.
b. That which is beautiful, thus gradually
developing the aesthetic consciousness, the sense of colour, and the
recognition of the use of symbolic forms in order to express quality and
meaning.
EP II, page 400 [meditation on
presented attributes]
2. This theme opens up a wide range wherein
the creative imagination can roam, and provides a fertile source of specialised
divine expression. The purer the agent,
the better should be the functioning of the imagination, which is essentially
the planned activity of the image making faculty. By its means, subtle divine attributes and
purposes can be presented in some form to the minds of men, and can thus in
time achieve material expression. This
involves the higher sensitivity, power to respond intuitionally, intellectual
ability to interpret that which is sensed, focussed attention in order to
"bring down" into manifestation the new potentiality and possibility
of the divine nature, and an organised stability and purity of life. Ponder on this.
3. This use of the creative imagination will
appear to you immediately as constituting, in itself, a definite field of service. Of this service, the highest of which you can
know anything is that of the Group of Contemplatives, connected with the inner
planetary Hierarchy, Who are called Nirmanakayas in the ancient books. They are entirely occupied with the task of
sensing and with the endeavour to express the presented attributes which must
some day be as familiar to men (theoretically, at least) as are the gradually
expressing attributes of Love, Beauty or Synthesis today. On a much lower plane, those of you who are
occupied with the effort to make soul quality expressed factors in your lives
are beginning [Page 401] to perform, on your level of consciousness, a task
somewhat similar to that of the Divine Contemplatives. It is good training for the work you may have
to do as you prepare for initiation.
EP II, page 429
4. That the capacity, innate in that
imaginative creature, man, to act "as if", holds the solution to the
problem. By the use of the creative imagination, the bridge between the lower
aspect and higher can be built and constructed.
"As a man thinketh, hopeth and willeth" so is he. This is a statement of an immutable fact.
When modern psychologists comprehend more
fully the creative purpose of humanity, and seek to develop the creative
imagination more constructively, and also to train the directional will, much
will be accomplished. When these two
factors (which are the signal evidence of divinity in man) are studied and
scientifically developed and utilised, they will produce the self-releasing of
all the problem cases which are found in our clinics at this time. Thus we shall, through experiment, arrive at
a more rapid understanding of man.
Psychology can count definitely upon the innate ability of the [Page
429] human unit to understand the use of the creative imagination and the use of directed purpose, for it is
found frequently even in children. The
development of the sense of fantasy and the training of children to make
choices (to the end that ordered purpose may emerge in their lives) will be two
of the governing ideals of the new education.
The sense of fantasy calls into
play the imagination, perception of beauty, and the concept of the subjective
worlds; the power of choice, with its implications of why and wherefore and to
what end (if wisely taught from early days), will do much for the race,
particularly if, at the time of adolescence, the general world picture and the
world plan are brought to the attention of the developing intelligence. Therefore:
1.
The sense of fantasy
2. The sense of choice
3. The sense of the whole plus
4. The sense of ordered purpose
should govern our training of the children which are coming into
incarnation. The sense of fantasy brings the creative imagination into play, thus
providing the emotional nature with constructive outlets; this should be
balanced and motivated by the recognition of the power of right choice and the
significance of the higher values.
EP II, page 455-456
Creative
thought is not the same as creative feeling and this distinction is often
not grasped. All that can be created in
the future will be based upon the expression of ideas. This will be brought about, first of all,
through thought perception, then through thought concretion and finally through
thought vitalisation. It is only later
that the created thought form will descend into the world of feeling and there assume
the needed sensuous quality which will add colour and beauty to the
already constructed thought form.
It is at this point that danger eventuates for
the student. The thought form of an idea
has been potently constructed. It has
taken to itself also colour and beauty. It is, therefore, capable of holding a man
both mentally and emotionally. If [Page
456] he has no sense of balance, no sense of proportion and no sense of humour,
the thought form can become so potent that he finds he is an avowed devotee,
unable to retreat from his position. He
can see nothing and believe nothing and work for nothing except that embodied
idea which is so powerfully holding him a captive.
EP II, page 568
3. The mystic upon the path of vision who
(through the bringing in of energy from the soul through meditation and
aspiration) stimulates the solar plexus or throat centres and thus opens a door
on to the astral plane.
In all cases, it is the astral plane which
stands revealed. The statement can here
be made that where there is colour, form
and phenomena analogous to or a replica of that to be found upon the
physical plane then there is to be seen the "duplicating phenomena"
of the astral plane. Where there is
materialisation of forms upon the physical plane you see the joint activity of
the astral and etheric planes. You do
not have the phenomena of the mental or soul levels. Bear this definitely in mind. The astral plane is—in time and space and to
all intents and purposes—a state of real being plus a world of illusory forms, created by man himself and
by his imaginative creativity.
EP II, page 589
c. One other practical hint may be useful here. When the psychic is at the Aryan stage of
unfoldment and is not simply at the Atlantean then much good can [Page 590]
come from the frequent use of the colour yellow. He should surround himself with that
colour, for it serves to keep the inflowing energies in the head or to prevent their descent no
lower than the diaphragm. This deprives the solar plexus of a constant
inflow of energy and greatly aids in freeing of the psychic from the astral
plane. I would point out here that
the psychic with the Atlantean consciousness (and they constitute the great
majority) is functioning normally when displaying the psychic faculties, though
along an arc of retrogression, but the man with the Aryan consciousness who
displays these powers is an abnormality.
EP II, page 608-609
Again, this registering of the light falls
into certain definite stages and takes place at certain definite points in the
unfoldment of the human being, but is more likely to occur in the earlier
stages than the later. These are:—
1. The sensing of a diffused light outside the
head, either before the eyes or over the right shoulder.
2. The sensing of this diffused misty light
within the head, permeating, apparently, the entire head.
3. The concentrating of this diffused light
until it has the appearance of a radiant sun.
4. The intensifying of the light of this inner
sun. This is in reality the recognition
of the radiance of the magnetic field, established between the pituitary body
and the pineal gland (as expressions of the head and the ajna centres). This radiance can at times seem almost too
bright to be borne.
5. The extension of the rays of this inner sun
first to the eyes, and then finally beyond the radius of the head so that (to
the vision of the clairvoyant seer) the halo makes its appearance around the
head of the disciple or aspirant.
6. The discovery that there is, at the very
heart of this, a point of dark blue
electric light, which gradually grows into a circle of some size. This occurs when the light in the head
irradiates the central opening at the top of the head. Through this opening the various energies of
the soul and the forces of the personality can be synthesised and thus flow
into the physical body, via the major centres.
It is also the esoteric "door of departure" through which the
soul withdraws the consciousness aspect in the hours of sleep and the
consciousness aspect plus the life thread at the moment of death.
EA, page 23
The initiate has to be aware of the zodiacal
influences which emanate from outside of the solar system altogether. These can
be recognised as
a. A vibration, registered in one or other of
the seven centres.
b. A
revelation of a particular type of light, conveying a specific colour to the
initiate.
c. A peculiar note.
d. A directional sound.
EA, page 155-158
In an ancient astrological treatise which has
never yet seen the light of day but which will be some day discovered when the
right time has arrived, the relation between the horned animals of the zodiac
is thus described: "The Ram, the Scapegoat and the sacred Goat are Three in
One and One in Three. The Ram becomes the second and the second is the third.
The Ram that breeds and fertilises all; the Scapegoat, in [Page 156] the
wilderness, redeems that all; the sacred Goat that merges in the Unicorn and
lifts impaled upon his golden horn the vanquished form—in these the mystery
lies hid."
It here becomes apparent that three mysteries
are hidden in the three horned signs:
1. The mystery of God the Father Creation
2. The mystery of God the Son Redemption
3. The mystery of God the Holy Spirit Liberation
It might also be pointed out here that it is
the will of the Father aspect, manifesting through Aries, that governs
Shamballa; the loving desire of the Son which attracts to the Hierarchy; and
the permeating, intelligent activity of the Holy Spirit which animates that
centre of divine life which we call humanity. Therefore we have:
Shamballa Hierarchy Humanity
Will Love Intelligence
Aries Taurus Capricorn
In both their higher and their lower aspects
these signs hold the secret of the "horns of strife and the horn of plenty
subjected to and guarded by the horn of life." Again, an ancient proverb
runs: "The Ram—when it has become the Scapegoat, has sought illumination
as the Bull of God and has climbed the mountain top in the semblance of the
Goat—changes its shape into the Unicorn. Great is the hidden key." If the
symbolism is carried a little further, it might be stated that:
1.
The Ram leads us into the creative life of Earth and into the darkness of
matter. This is the blue of midnight.
2.
The Bull leads into the places of desire in search of "wrathful
satisfaction." This is the red of greed and anger, changing eventually
into the golden light of illumination.
3.
The Goat leads us into arid ways in search of food and water. This is the
"need for green," but the Goat is equal also to climbing to the
mountain top.
This is the experience of the Mutable Cross in
connection with these three signs. Upon the Fixed Cross:
1. Eventually the Ram becomes the Scapegoat
and the will of God in love and salvage is demonstrated.
2. The Bull becomes the bestower of light, and
the darkness of the earlier cycle is lightened by the Bull.
3. The Goat becomes the Unicorn, and leads to
victory. The Crocodile, the Goat and the Unicorn depict three stages of man's
unfoldment.
Aries, Taurus, and Capricorn are the great
transformers under the great creative plan. They are in the nature of
catalysts. Each of them opens a door into one of the three divine centres of
expression which are the symbols in the body of the planetary Logos of the
three higher centres in man: the head, the heart and the throat.
·
Aries opens the door into Shamballa, when the
experience of Taurus and Capricorn has been undergone.
·
Taurus opens the door into the Hierarchy when the
significance of Gemini and Leo is understood and the first two initiations can
therefore he taken.
·
Capricorn opens the door into the Hierarchy in a
higher aspect when the last three initiations can be undergone and the
significance of Scorpio and of Virgo is understood.
In these signs and their relationship upon the
Fixed Cross lies hid the mystery of Makara and of the Crocodiles. The keynotes
of this sign are all indicative of a crystallisation process. This concretising
faculty of Capricorn can be considered in several ways. …
EA, page 163-166
The exoteric and the esoteric planetary rulers
of Capricorn are the same, and Saturn rules the career of the man in this sign,
no matter whether he is on the ordinary or the reversed wheel, or whether he is
on the Mutable or the Fixed Cross. When he has taken the third initiation and
can consciously mount the Cardinal Cross, he is then released from the ruling
of Saturn and comes under the influence of Venus, who is governor or ruler of
the Hierarchy which is that of the Crocodiles. A reference to the tabulation
heretofore given will show this. It is only when a man is upon the Cardinal
Cross that the significance, purpose and potencies of the Creative Hierarchies
become clear to [Page 164] him and the "doors of entrance" into all
of them stand wide open. On the Mutable
Cross and on the Fixed Cross we have the so-called green ray, controlling not
only the daily life of karmic liability upon the path of evolution, but also
controlling the experiences and processes of evolution. The reason for this is
that Capricorn is an earth sign and because the third and fifth rays work
pre-eminently through this sign, embodying the third major aspect of divinity,
active intelligence plus that of its subsidiary power, the fifth Ray of Mind. These
pour through Capricorn to Saturn and to Venus and so reach our planet, the
Earth. Saturn is one of the most potent of the four Lords of Karma and forces
man to face up to the past, and in the present to prepare for the future. Such
is the intention and purpose of karmic opportunity. From certain angles, Saturn
can be regarded as the planetary Dweller on the Threshold, for humanity as a
whole has to face that Dweller as well as the Angel of the Presence, and in so
doing discover that both the Dweller and the Angel are that complex duality
which is the human family. Saturn, in a peculiar relation to the sign Gemini,
makes this possible. Individual man makes this discovery and faces the two
extremes whilst in the sign Capricorn; the fourth and fifth Creative
Hierarchies do the same thing in Libra.
Through Saturn and Venus, therefore, Capricorn
is connected with Libra and also with Gemini and Taurus, and these four
constellations—Taurus, Gemini, Libra and Capricorn—constitute a potent
quaternary of energies and between them produce those conditions and situations
which will enable the initiate to demonstrate his readiness and capacity for
initiation. They are called the "Guardians of the Four Secrets."
·
Taurus—Guards the secret of light and confers
illumination upon the initiate.
·
Gemini—Guards the mystery or secret of duality and
presents the initiate with a word which leads to the fusion of the greater
pairs of opposite.
·
Libra—Guards the secret of balance, of equilibrium
and finally speaks the word which releases the initiate from the power of the
Lords of Karma.
·
Capricorn—Guards the secret of the soul itself and
this it reveals to the initiate at the time of the third initiation. This is
sometimes called the "secret of the hidden glory."
Through certain other of the planetary rulers,
through the medium of which the third
and fifth rays work, Capricorn is connected with other constellations
besides the four above mentioned, but these four are for our purposes the most
important. Students can work out the remaining interlocking energies for
themselves, if they so desire, by relating the rays, planetary rulers and
constellations through reference to the tabulations already given. The subject
is, however, definitely confusing to the beginner, and it is for this reason
that I am dealing here with the philosophy and symbolism of the signs first of
all, so as to familiarise the student with the general scheme and the universal
broad interlocking.
The third
and fifth rays are peculiarly active upon the Path of Discipleship, just as
the sixth and fourth are dominant upon the Path of Evolution and the first and
seventh upon the Path of Initiation. The second ray controls and dominates all
the other rays, as you well know.
Evolution 6
and 4 Mars. Mercury Aries. Gemini.
Cancer. Virgo. Scorpio
Discipleship 3
and 5 Venus. Saturn Gemini. Sagittarius.
Capricorn.
Initiation 1
and 7 Vulcan. Uranus. Taurus. Libra. Pisces.
Pluto.
EA, page 212 & 215
The
colour assigned to Mars is, as you know, red and this is a correspondence
to the colour of the blood stream and hence also the association of Mars with
passion, with anger and a sense of general opposition. The sense of duality is
exceedingly powerful. Hence also the necessity for the entire life of man (for
the blood is the life in this sense) to be swung into the conflict, leaving no
side of human nature uninvolved; hence again the need for the disciple to carry
his physical nature, his emotional or desire nature and his mental processes up
into heaven. This takes place as a consequence of overcoming the "serpent
of evil" (the form nature with its promptings and demands) by the means of
the "serpent of wisdom," which is the esoteric name oft given to the
soul.
In connection with the symbolic connection between Mars and the blood, producing the resultant conflict between life and death (for Scorpio is one of the signs of death), it is interesting to note that Christianity is governed by Mars. One is apt to recognise with ease that the sixth ray, working through Mars, rules Christianity.
[What is correlation of
red/blood/oxygen/Mars and blue/blood/?/? -- the ruby and sapphire and
transmutation.]
… The reference here to Sagittarius is clear. The disciple—after the
death of the personality and after the killing out [Page 215] of desire—goes on
towards Pisces where again he dies "unto an eternal resurrection." In
Scorpio there is the death of the personality, with its longings, desires,
ambitions and pride. In Pisces there is the death of all attachments and the
liberation of the soul for service upon an universal scale. Christ, in Pisces,
exemplified the substitution of love for attachment. Christianity exemplifies
the death of the personality, with individual and not universal implications;
love has been conspicuously lacking and the controlling colour of Christianity has indeed been red. It is not
Christ's expression but the Scorpio-Mars
presentation of St. Paul. Mars has ruled Christianity because St. Paul
misinterpreted the esoteric significances of the New Testament message and he
misinterpreted because the truth—like all truths as they reach humanity—had to
pass through the filter of his personality mind and brain; it was then
unavoidably given a personal slant and twist and this is responsible for the
sorry historical story of Christianity and the dire plight of the nations
today—ostensibly Christian nations yet swept by hate, ruled by fear and at the
same time by idealism, governed by a fanatical adherence to their national
destiny as they interpret it and "out for blood" as the piling up of
armaments discloses. All these are sixth
ray characteristics, emphasised by Scorpio and conditioned by Mars which ever
rules the path of the individual disciple, and today the world disciple, humanity
as a whole, stands at the very portal of the Path. The entire west is at
this time under Martian influence but this will end during the next five years.
EA, page 301:
Several major triangles of force were active when individualisation
took place and the "Lions, the divine and tawny orange Flames" came into being and thus humanity arrived
upon the planet. I would touch here briefly upon one triangle: The Sun (second
ray), Jupiter (second ray) and Venus (fifth ray). It will be apparent to you
that we here have another sphere of influence of major importance, governed by
Leo. It is a triangle to which H.P.B. refers in The Secret Doctrine, the
influence of which she was endeavouring to elucidate. So potent was the
influence of this triangle that its effect upon the Moon was to denude her of
life by drawing out all the "seeds of life," thus destroying her
influence, for it was undesirable where humanity was concerned.
EA, page 305
The squares or quaternaries relate to material appearance or form
expression; the stars concern the states of consciousness, and the triangles
are related to spirit and to synthesis. In the archives of the esoteric
astrologers connected with the Hierarchy, charts are kept of those members of
the human family who have achieved adeptship and upwards. They are composed of
superimposed squares, stars and triangles, contained within the zodiacal wheel
and mounted upon the symbol of the Cardinal Cross. The squares, having each of
their four angles and points in one or other of four zodiacal constellations,
are depicted in black; the five-pointed
star is depicted yellow or golden colour and its five points are in contact
with five of the constellations on the great wheel; the triangles are in blue and
have, above each point of the triangle, an esoteric symbol, standing for the
constellations of the Great Bear, Sirius and the Pleiades. These symbols may
not here be revealed but indicate the point of spiritual consciousness achieved
and the responsiveness of the initiate to these major cosmic influences. A
glance at these geometrical charts will indicate in a moment the status of the
initiate, and also the point towards which he is striving. These charts are
fourth dimensional in nature and not flat surfaces as are our charts. This is
an interesting piece of information but of no value, except in so far that it
indicates synthesis, the fusion of spirit, soul and body, and the point of
development. It [Page 306] proves also the fact that "God
geometrises" where the soul is concerned. These charts are most
interesting.
EA, page 349
"Upon the golden triangle, the cosmic Christ appeared; His head in Gemini;
one foot upon the field [Page 349] of the Seven Fathers and the other planted
in the field of the Seven Mothers (these two constellations are sometimes
called the Seven Brothers and the Seven Sisters. A.A.B.). Thus for aeons, the
Great One stood, His consciousness in-turned, aware of three but not of four.
Intent, with suddenness, He heard a sound go forth.... Arousing to that cry, He
stretched Himself, reached forth both arms in understanding love, and, lo, the
Cross was formed.
"He heard the cry of the Mother (Virgo),
of the Seeker (Sagittarius), and of the submerged Fish (Pisces). Then, lo, the
Cross of change appeared, though Gemini remained the head. This is the
mystery."
In this occult statement is hidden one reason
why Gemini is regarded as an air sign, for it is cosmically related (as are
Libra and Aquarius, the other two points of the airy triplicity) in a most
peculiar way to the Great Bear, to the Pleiades and to Sirius. The relation is
essentially a sixfold one, and here you will find a hint as to the resolution
of the pairs of opposites—involving as these three constellations do the three
ideas of opposition-equilibrium-synthesis or universal fusion. It might be
stated that:
1. Gemini—forms a point of entrance for cosmic
energy from Sirius.
2. Libra—is related to and transmits the
potencies of the Pleiades.
3. Aquarius—expresses the universal
consciousness of the Great Bear.
It might be profitable to you to bear in mind
at this point what I have often told you, that the great White Lodge on [Page
350] Sirius is the spiritual prototype of the great White Lodge on Earth, of
which modern Masonry is the distorted reflection, just as the personality is a
distorted reflection of the soul. I would also remind you again of the relation
between Gemini and Masonry to which reference has frequently been made.
EA, page 379
Today, the cure or care of the physical body
is of paramount importance to practically everybody and the thoughts of all
peoples without exception, whether at war or not, are turned that way. The
emphasis upon the wholeness of the individual physical life is symbolic of the
outer body of humanity, viewing all human beings as a unit.
Again, gold is the symbol which today governs
man's desires whether national, economic or religious; it is connected [Page
379] with this sign and this is one of the indications that today the conflict
in the world economic situation is based upon the upwelling of desire. In an
esoteric way, therefore—quoting from a very ancient book of prophecy:
"The golden eye of Taurus points the way
to those who likewise see. That which is gold will some day, too, respond,
passing from East to West in that dire time when the urge to gather gold shall
rule the lower half (i.e., the personality aspect of men and of
nations—A.A.B.). The search for gold, the search for golden light divine,
directs the Bull of Life, the Bull of Form. These two must meet; and meeting,
clash. Thus vanishes the gold...."
The earthly triplicity of Capricorn, Virgo and
Taurus form a triangle of material expression which is of profound interest as
one studies it either from the angle of the ordinary round of the zodiac,
followed by average and undeveloped humanity, or from the angle of the disciple
wherein the path of zodiacal progress is reversed.
EA, page 531-532
I cannot give you the relation of the
planetary centres to the human centres or of the systemic centres to the
planets. Too much knowledge would be given too soon and prior to the time when
there is enough love present in human nature to offset the possible misuse of
energy with [Page 532] its often disastrous consequences. The colours, the mathematical rate of the higher vibrations which
emanate from the centres—individual, planetary and systemic—and the quality (esoterically
understood) of the energies must be the subject of human research and
self-ascertained. The clues and the hints have been given in the Ageless
Wisdom. The slower method of research is the safer at present. In the next century and early in the century
an initiate will appear and will carry on their teaching. It will be under the
same "impression" for my task is not yet completed and this series of
bridging Treatises between the material knowledge of man and the science of the
initiates has still another phase to run. But the remainder of this century
must be dedicated to rebuilding the shrine of man's living, to reconstructing
the form of humanity's life, to reconstituting the new civilisation upon the
foundations of the old and to the reorganising of the structures of world
thought, world politics, plus the redistribution of the world's resources in
conformity to divine purpose. Then and only then will it be possible to carry
the revelation further.
EA, page 638
4. Each Hierarchy furnishes the aura of one of the seven principles in
man with its specific colour. …
19. Modern astrologers do not give the correspondences of the days and
planets and colours correctly.
Esoteric Astrology, page 649] --
The Sacred and non-sacred planets and the rays.
38. The exoteric non-sacred planets are called
in occult parlance "the outer round" or outer circle of initiates. Of
these our Earth is one but being aligned in a peculiar fashion with certain
spheres (or planets) on the inner round a dual opportunity exists for humanity
which facilitates, whilst it complicates, the evolutionary process. The sacred
planets are called often the `seven grades of psychic knowledge' or the `seven
divisions of the field of knowledge'." (C.F. 1175.)
The
following from The Secret Doctrine III, page 455, Diagram II, is suggestive,
though exoteric and deliberately misleading as the sacred and non-sacred
planets are mixed together and many planets omitted altogether,
1. Mars Kama-rupa Red Tuesday
2. The Sun Prana.
Life Orange Sunday
3. Mercury Buddhi Yellow Wednesday
4. Saturn Kama-Manas Green Saturday
5. Jupiter Auric
envelope Blue Thursday
6. Venus Manas.
Higher mind Indigo Friday
7. The Moon Linga
Sharira Violet Monday
Such "blinds" are frequent and necessary in the occult
teaching but they will be used less and less as humanity becomes more
spiritually perceptive.
EA, page 663
11. "Buddhi and Mercury correspond with each other and both are yellow and radiant golden-coloured. In
the human system the right eye corresponds with Buddhi and the left eye with
Manas and Venus or Lucifer." (III. 447, 448.)
[check with Ajna, blue/purple
and yellow/rose -- which side?] right eye yellow/Mercury/Buddhi, left eye blue/purple Venus Manas?
EA, page 671
27. The sun:
a. "Used to be called the `eye of
Jupiter.' (S.D. III. 278.)
b. Plato mentioned Jupiter-Logos, the Word or sun. (S.D. II I. 279.)
c.
The true colour of the sun is blue. (S.D. III. 461.)
d. The sun was adopted as a planet by the
Post-Christian Astrologers who had not been initiated." (S.D. III. 461.)
EA, page 1250
… if the name were known and if enough people could do the work of occult meditation and visualisation,
accompanying the work with a vivid
imagination, it might be possible to attract into our system such a
downpour of attractive energy from the constellation involved as to unduly
speed up the processes of evolution upon our planet, and thus upset the
systemic economy most dangerously.
People do not yet realise the potency of meditation and especially of
group meditation.
EH, page 36-37
3. Seen from the inner side where time is not, the human creature
demonstrates as an amazing kaleidoscopic mutable phenomenon. Bodies, so called, or rather aggregates of
atomic units, fade out and disappear, or flash again into manifestation. Streams
of colours pass and repass; they twine or intertwine. Certain areas will then suddenly intensify their
brightness and blaze forth with brilliance; or again they can be seen dying out
and the phenomenon in certain areas will be colourless and apparently
non-existent. But always there is a
persistent over-shadowing light, from which a stream of lights pours down into
the phenomenal man; this can be seen attaching itself in two major localities
to the dense inner core of the physical man.
These two points of attachment are to be found in the head and in the
heart. There can also be seen, dimly at
first but with increasing brightness, seven other pale disks of light which are
the early evidence of the seven centres.
…
4. These centres, which constitute the quality aspects and the
consciousness aspects, and whose function it is to colour the appearance or outer expression of man and use it as a
response apparatus, are (during the evolutionary process) subject to three
types of unfoldment.
EH, page 279-280
Naturopaths of many kinds, professors of
methods of healing by electricity or light and colour, food dietitians with infallible cures for all diseases, the
many who practice systems founded on the Abrams mode of diagnosis, and many
advocates of the chiropractic methods, as well as the various healing systems
which are completely divorced from medicine but which undertake to bring about
cures, are all indicative of new and hopeful trends; they are nevertheless
extremely experimental in nature, and are so fanatically endorsed, so exclusive
of all recognised methods of healing aid (except their own), so violently
opposed to all the findings [Page 280] of the past, and so unwilling to
cooperate with orthodox medicine that, in many cases, they constitute a
definite and real danger to the public.
EH, page 293-294
The "Book of Karma" has in it the
following stanzas, and these can serve as an introduction to those dealing with
the Seven Ray causes of inharmony and disease.
To the intuitive aspirant some meaning will emerge, but he must ever
bear in mind that all that I am attempting to do is to put into words—unsatisfactory
and quite inadequate—stanzas concerning the conditioning factors in the
equipment of those great Beings Whose life force (which we call energy) creates
all that is, colours and shapes all [Page 294] manifestations within the
worlds, and adds its quota of force to the equipment of every single human
being. Every man appropriates this
energy to the measure of his need, and his need is the sign of his
development. The stanzas I have selected
are from The Book of Imperfections. Part
Fourteen:
"The seven imperfections issued forth and
tainted substance from the highest sphere unto the lowest. The seven perfections followed next, and the
two—that which is whole and sound and that which is known as detail and unwholesome
in an awful sense—met upon the plane of physical life. (The etheric plane.—A.A.B.)
And there they fought, swinging into the
conflict all that they were and had, all that was seen and all that was unseen
within the triple ring. (The three lower
worlds.—A.A.B.)
The seven imperfections entered the seven
races of men, each in their own place; they coloured the seven points within
each race. (The seven planetary centres,
transmitting imperfect energy.—A.A.B.)
The seven perfections hovered o'er each race,
over each man within each race and over each point within each man.
And thus the conflict grew from the outermost
to the innermost, from the greatest One to the littlest ones. Seven the imperfections. Seven the perfect wholes; seven the ways to
oust the dark of imperfection and demonstrate the clear cold light, the white
electric light of perfect wholeness."
EH, page 371 -- On Vibration.
Some students make demand that I define what
is the meaning of the word "vibration" and state exactly what a
vibration is. If I tell you that vibration
is an illusion, as sensory perception is known by the soul to be, do you
comprehend (limited as all human beings are by the reactions of a series of
vehicles, all of them instruments of perception) ? If I tell you that vibratory
reaction is due to our possessing a mechanism which is responsive to impact, I
am answering your question in part, but if this is true, what does it mean to
you and from whence comes the impact? If
I give you the scientific definition (which you can discover in any good textbook on light, colour or sound), I
am doing work that you can do yourself, and for that I have no time. In my books are several definitions of
vibration, either by inference or defined, and these you might search for, and
upon them you might meditate. If I elucidated
for you here the relation between the Self and the not-Self, between awareness,
that which is aware, and that of which it is aware, I am covering ground which
a careful study of the Gita would aid you in comprehending.
EH, page 372-373 -- On the
Future School of Healing.
These schools of healing are not to be
developed in the near future, not before the close of this century. Only the preparatory work is now being done,
and the stage set for future unfoldments.
Things do not move so rapidly. There has to be a growing synthesis of the
techniques of such schools, which embody:
1. Psychological adjustments and
healing,
2. Magnetic healing,
3. The best of the allopathic and homeopathic
techniques, with which we must not dispense,
4. Surgical healing in its modern forms,
5. Electro-therapeutics,
6. Water-therapy,
7.
Healing by colour and sound, and radiation,
8. Preventive medicine,
9. The essential practices of osteopathy and
chiropractic,
10. Scientific neurology and psychiatry,
11. The cure of obsessions and mental
diseases,
12. The care of
the eyes and ears,
13. Voice culture, which is a
definitely healing agency,
14. Mental and faith healing,
15. Soul alignment and contact,
EH, page 414-415
c. The third stage is the withdrawal of the life force from the astral
or emotional form so that it disintegrates in a similar manner and the life is
centralised elsewhere. It has gained an
increase of vitality [Page 415] through physical plane existence and added colour through emotional experience.
EH, page 420-421
This active intelligent matter was matter
qualified by an earlier experience, and coloured by an earlier [Page 421]
incarnation. Now this matter is in form,
the solar system is not in pralaya but in objectivity—this objectivity having
in view the addition of another quality to the logoic content, that of love and
wisdom. Therefore, at the next solar
pralaya, at the close of the one hundred years of Brahma, the matter of the
solar system will be coloured by active
intelligence and by active love. This
means literally that the aggregate of solar atomic matter will eventually
vibrate to another key than it did at the first dawn of manifestation.
EH, page 456-457
Later, when more anent colour is known, only orange lights will be
permitted in the sick room of a dying person, and these will only be installed
with due ceremony when there is assuredly no possibility of recovery. Orange
aids the focussing in the head, just as red stimulates the solar [Page 457] plexus and green has a definite effect upon the heart and life streams.
EH, page 712 -- 7. The seventh
ray technique.
Energy and force must meet each other and thus
the work is done. Colour and sound in
ordered sequence must meet and blend and thus the work of magic can
proceed. Substance and spirit must evoke
each other and, passing through the centre of the one who seeks to aid, produce
the new and good. The healer energises
thus with life the failing life, driving it forth or anchoring it yet more deeply
in the place of destiny. All seven must
be used and through the seven there must pass the energies the need requires,
creating the new man who has for ever been and will for ever be, and either
here or there.
R&I, page 22 -- Rule IX.
For Applicants: Let the disciple merge himself within the
circle of the other selves. Let but one colour blend them and their
unity appear. Only when the group is
known and sensed can energy be wisely emanated.
For Disciples and Initiates: Let the group know there are no other
selves. Let the group know there is no colour, only light; and then let
darkness take the place of light, hiding all difference, blotting out all
form. Then—at the place of tension, and
at that darkest point—let the group see a point of clear cold fire, and in the
fire (right at its very heart) let the One Initiator appear Whose star shone
forth when the Door first was passed.
R&I, page 43
I would like for a moment to refer here to the
door symbology as the initiate begins to grasp the inner meaning of those
simple words. For long the teaching,
given in the clear cold light, anent the door and the emphasis put upon the
presentation of the door lying ahead of the aspirant has been made familiar,
but that has been working with the lower aspects of the symbolism, even if
aspirants did not realise it; they have been taught the fact of the light in
the head, which is the personality correspondence to the clear cold light to
which I refer. At the very centre of
that light, as many aspirants know theoretically or factually by inconstant
experience, is a centre or point of dark
indigo blue—midnight blue. Note the
significance of this in view of what I have been saying anent the "dark
night," the midnight hour, the zero hour in the life of the soul. That centre is in reality an opening, a door
leading somewhere, a way of escape, a place through which the soul imprisoned
in the body can emerge and pass into higher states of consciousness,
untrammelled by form limitations; it has also been called "the funnel or
the channel for the sound"; it has been named the "trumpet through
which the escaping A.U.M. can pass."
The ability to use this door or channel is brought about by the practice
of alignment; hence the emphasis laid upon this exercise in the attempt to
train aspirants and disciples.
R&I, page 173-174
It is for this reason that the symbolism of
light and darkness is used in the words:
Let the group know there is no colour, only light; and then let darkness
take the place of light.
Just as the individual has to pass through the
stage wherein all "colour" goes out of life as he emerges out of
[Page 174] the glamour which conditions the astral plane, so groups in
preparation for initiation must go through the same devastating process. Glamour disappears, and for the first time
the group (as is the case with the individual) walks in the light. As the group thus walks, unitedly its units
learn a lesson (one clearly enunciated by modern science) that light and
substance are synonymous terms; the true nature of substance as a field and
medium of activity becomes clear to the initiate-members of the group. To this H.P.B. referred when he said that the
true occultist works entirely in the field of forces and energies.
The next lesson which the group unitedly
apprehends is the significance of the words that "darkness is pure
spirit." This recognition,
realisation, apprehensive, comprehensive (call it what you will) is so
overwhelming and all-embracing that distinctions and differences disappear. The disciple realises that they are only the
result of the activity of substance in its form-making capacity and are
consequently illusion and non-existent, from the angle of the spirit at rest in
its own centre. The only realisation
left is that of pure Being Itself. …
R&I, page 246
g. The final phase of the divine purpose is the most difficult of all
to indicate, and when I say indicate, I mean exactly that, and nothing more
definite and clear. Does it mean
anything to you when I say that the ceremonial ritual of the daily life of
Sanat Kumara, implemented by music and
sound and carried on the waves of colour which break upon the shores of the
three worlds of human evolution, reveal—in the clearest notes and tones and
shades—the deepest secret behind His purpose?
It scarcely makes sense to you and is dismissed as a piece of symbolic
writing, used by me in order to convey the unconveyable. Yet I am not here writing in symbols, but am
making an exact statement [Page 247] of fact.
As beauty in any of its greater forms breaks upon the human consciousness,
a dim sense is thereby conveyed of the ritual of Sanat Kumara's daily
living. More I cannot say.
R&I, page 332
The Mysteries will restore
colour and music as they essentially are to the world and do it in such a
manner that the creative art of today will be to this new creative art what a
child's building of wooden blocks is to a great cathedral such as Durham or
Milan. The Mysteries, when restored,
will make real—in a sense incomprehensible to you at present—the nature of
religion, the purpose of science and the goal of education.
R&I, page 402
You will also note how three types of astral
energy are therefore related:
The astral force of our planet, distinctive of
the planetary astral plane in the three worlds of human enterprise.
The astral force of the solar Logos, the true
God of Love.
The astral energy of the cosmic astral plane.
These forces are symbolised to the
manipulating Master by a triangle. In
the Old Commentary it says:
"The Master throws
Himself—under the liberating Law of Sacrifice—into the vortex of the astral
life of the One to Whom our Lord relates Himself with humble joy. And as the Master works, there forms before
His eyes a triangle of force in shades
of varying rose. By His magnetic
power, He concentrates the energy required.
Then through this triangle of force, as through an open door, He sends
the potency of love into our planet, and till His cycle ends He thus must
work."
This is but a rough translation of some very
ancient phrases, and is perhaps less symbolic than it may appear. It is in connection with this Path that the
work of the Triangles which I initiated is related; the function of these
Triangles is in reality to facilitate the work of distributing the pure
incoming love energy (expressing itself as light and as goodwill) into the
Hierarchy and Humanity. This deeply
esoteric purpose of the Triangles will not be understood by the general public,
but some of you who read this will appreciate the opportunity to serve in this
manner consciously.
R&I, page 415
6. Sanat Kumara is not on the Sirian line but—to speak in symbols, not
too deeply veiled—Lucifer, Son of the Morning, is closely related, and hence
the large number of human beings who will become disciples in the Sirian Lodge. This [Page 416] is the true "Blue
Lodge," and to become a candidate in that Lodge, the initiate of the third
degree has to become a lowly aspirant, with all the true and full initiations
awaiting him "within the sunshine of the major Sun."
R&I, page 488-494
2.
Visualisation. Up to this point
the activity has been of a mental nature.
The creative imagination has been relatively quiescent; the disciple has
been occupied within the mind and upon mental levels, and has "looked
neither up nor down." But now the
right point of tension has been reached; the reservoir or pool of needed energy
has been restrained within the carefully delimited ring-pass-not, and the
bridge-builder is ready for the next step.
He therefore proceeds at this point to construct the blue print of the
work to be done, by drawing upon the imagination and its faculties as they are
to be found upon the highest level of his astral or sensitive vehicle. This does not relate to the emotions. Imagination is, as you know, the lowest
aspect of the intuition, and this fact must be remembered at all times. Sensitivity, as an expression of the astral
body, is the opposite pole to buddhic sensitivity. The disciple has purified and refined his
imaginative faculties so that they are now responsive to the impression of the
buddhic principle or of the intuitive perception—perception, apart from sight
or any recorded possible vision.
According to the responsiveness of the astral vehicle to the [Page 489]
buddhic impression, so will be the accuracy of the "plans" laid for
the building of the antahkarana and the visualising of the bridge of light in
all its beauty and completeness.
The
creative imagination has to be stepped up in its vibratory nature so that
it can affect the "pool of energy" or the energy-substance which has
been gathered for the building of the bridge.
The creative activity of the imagination is the first organising
influence which works upon and within the ring-pass-not of accumulated
energies, held in a state of tension by the "intention" of the
disciple. Ponder upon this occult and
significant statement.
The
creative imagination is in the nature of an active energy, drawn up into
relationship with the point of tension; it there and then produces effects in
mental substance. The tension is thereby
increased, and the more potent and the clearer the visualisation process, the
more beautiful and strong will be the bridge.
Visualisation is the process whereby the creative imagination is
rendered active and becomes responsive to and attracted by the point of tension
upon the mental plane.
At this stage the disciple is occupied with two energies: one, quiescent and held within a ring-pass-not, but at a point of extreme tension, and the other active, picture-forming, outgoing and responsive to the mind of the bridge-builder. In this connection it should be remembered that the second aspect of the divine Trinity is the form-building aspect, and thus, under the Law of Analogy, it is the second aspect of the personality and the second aspect of the Spiritual Triad which are becoming creatively active. The disciple is now proceeding with the second stage of his building work, and so the numerical significance will become apparent to you. He must work slowly at this point, picturing what he wants to do, why he has to do it, what are the stages of his work, what will be the resultant effects of his planned activity, and what are the materials with which he has to work. He endeavours to visualise the entire process, and by this means sets up a definite rapport (if successful) between the buddhic intuition and the creative imagination [Page 490] of the astral body. Consequently, you will have at this point:
·
The buddhic activity of impression.
·
The tension of the mental vehicle, as it holds the
needed energy-substance at the point of projection.
·
The imaginative processes of the astral body.
When the disciple has trained himself to be
consciously aware of the simultaneity of this threefold work, then it goes
forward successfully and almost automatically.
This he does through the power of visualisation. A current of force is set up between these
pairs of opposites (astral-buddhic) and—as it passes through the reservoir of
force upon the mental plane—it produces an interior activity and an
organisation of the substance present. There then supervenes a steadily mounting
potency, until the third stage is reached and the work passes out of the phase
of subjectivity into that of objective reality—objective from the standpoint of
the spiritual man.
3.
Projection. The task of the disciple has
now reached a most critical point. Many
aspirants reach this particular stage and—having developed a real capacity to visualise, and having therefore
constructed by its means the desired form, and organised the substance which is
to be employed in this later phase of the building process—find themselves
unable to proceed any further. What then
is the matter? Primarily, an inability
to use the Will in the process of projection.
This process is a combination of will, further and continued visualisation,
and the use of the ray Word of Power. Up
to the present stage in the process, the method for all the seven rays is
identical; but at this point there comes a change. Each disciple, having successfully organised
the bridge substance, having brought into activity the will aspect, and being
consciously aware of process and performance, proceeds now to move the
organised substance forward, so that from the centre of force which he has
succeeded in accumulating there appears a line of light-substance or
projection. This is sent forward upon a
[Page 491] Word of Power, as in the logoic creative process. This is in reality a reversal of the process
of the Monad when It sent forth the thread of life which finally anchored
itself in the soul. The soul, in
reality, came into being through the means of this anchoring; then came the
later process, when the soul in its turn sent forth a dual thread which finally
found anchorage in the head and the heart of the lower threefold man, the
personality. The disciple is focussed in
the centre which he has constructed upon the mental plane, and is drawing all
his resources (those of the threefold personality and the soul combined) into
activity; he now projects a line towards the Monad.
It is along this line that the final withdrawal of the forces takes place, the forces which—upon the downward way or the involutionary path—focussed themselves in the personality and the soul. The antahkarana per se, completed by the bridge built by the disciple, is the final medium of abstraction or of the great withdrawal. It is with the antahkarana that the initiate is concerned in the fourth initiation, called sometimes the Great Renunciation—the renunciation or the withdrawal from form life, both personal and egoic. After this initiation neither of these aspects can hold the Monad any more. The "veil of the Temple" is rent in twain from the top to the bottom—that veil which separated the Outer Court (the personality life) from the Holy Place (the soul) and from the Holy of Holies (the Monad) in the Temple at Jerusalem. The implications and the analogies will necessarily be clear to you.
In order, therefore, to bring about the needed
projection of the accumulated energies, organised by the creative imagination
and brought to a point of excessive tension by the focussing of the mental
impulse (an aspect of the will), the disciple then calls upon the resources of
his soul, stored up in what is technically called "the jewel in the
lotus." This is the anchorage of
the Monad—a point which must not be forgotten.
The aspects of the soul which we call knowledge, love and sacrifice, and
which are expressions of the causal body, are only effects of this monadic
radiation.
Therefore, before the bridge can be truly
built and "projected on the upward way, providing safe travelling for the
pilgrim's weary feet" (as the Old Commentary puts it), the disciple must begin to react in
response to the closed lotus bud or jewel at the centre of the opened
lotus. This he does when the sacrifice
petals of the egoic lotus are assuming control in his life, when his knowledge
is being transmuted into wisdom, and his love for the whole is growing; to
these is being added the "power to renounce". These three egoic qualities—when functioning
with a measure of potency—produce an increased activity at the very centre of
soul life, the heart of the lotus. It
should be remembered that the correspondences in the egoic lotus to the three
planetary centres are as follows:
Shamballa....The jewel in the lotus.
Hierarchy....The three groups of petals.
Humanity....The three permanent atoms within
the aura of the lotus.
Students should also bear in mind that they
need to rid themselves of the usual idea of sacrifice as a process of
giving-up, or renunciation of all that makes life worth living. Sacrifice is, technically speaking, the
achievement of a state of bliss and of ecstasy because it is the realisation of
another divine aspect, hidden hitherto by both the soul and the personality. It is understanding and recognition of the
will-to-good which made creation possible and inevitable, and which was the
true cause of manifestation. Ponder on
this, for it is very different in its significance to the usual concepts anent
sacrifice.
When the disciple has gained the fruit of
experience which is knowledge and is learning to transmute it into wisdom, when
his objective is to live truly and in reality, and when the will-to-good is the
crowning goal of his daily life, then he can begin to evoke the Will. This will make the link between the lower and
the higher minds, between spirit and matter and between Monad and personality a
definite and existent fact. Duality then
supervenes upon [Page 493] triplicity, and the potency of the central nucleus
in the egoic vehicle destroys—at the fourth initiation—the three surrounding
expressions. They disappear, and then
the so-called destruction of the causal body has taken place. This is the true "second
death"—death to form altogether.
This is practically all that I can tell you
anent the process of projection. It is a
living process, growing out of the conscious daily experience and dependent
upon the expression of the divine aspects in the life upon the physical plane,
as far as is possible. Where there is an
attempt to approximate the personality life to the demands of the soul and to
use the intellect on behalf of humanity, love is beginning to control; and then
the significance of the "divine sacrifice" is increasingly understood
and becomes a natural, spontaneous expression of individual intention. Then it becomes possible to project the
bridge. The vibration is then set up on
lower levels of divine manifestation and becomes strong enough to produce response
from the higher. Then, when the Word of
Power is known and rightly used, the bridge is rapidly built.
Students need feel in no way discouraged by
this picture. Much can happen on the
inner planes where there is right intention, as well as occult intention
(purpose and tension combined), and the bridge reaches stages of definite
outline and structure long before the disciple is aware of it.
4.
Invocation and Evocation. The three
preceding stages mark, in reality, the three stages of personality work. The remaining three are expressions of
response from higher levels of the spiritual life; beyond briefly indicating
them, there is very little that I can put into words. The task of Invocation, based on Intention,
Visualisation and Projection, has been carefully undertaken by the disciple and
he has at least some measure of clear perception as to the work he has done by
the dual means of spiritual living and scientific, technical, occult work. He is therefore himself invocative. His life effect is registered upon the higher
levels of consciousness and he is recognised as "a point of invocative
tension." This tension and this
[Page 494] reservoir of living energy, which is the disciple himself, is set in
motion by projected thought, the use of the will and a sounded Word or Phrase
of Power.
R&I, page 505
Even in this finally completed bridge—at the end of the world cycle—one ray light and colour will predominate,
the second ray, with the fourth ray as the subsidiary ray. The fourth ray might be symbolically called
"the main cable" for humanity, because it is the dominant note of the
Fourth Creative Hierarchy.
R&I, page 538
In the Masters' Archives there are some Rules
for Disciples of very ancient origin.
Among them is one that is so old and so abstruse that it is only now
possible to bring it to the attention of humanity, owing to the increased
mental and Spiritual perception of the modern aspirant. It can be inadequately translated as follows:
"The light is seen, a tiny point of
piercing light. This light is warm and
red. It nearer draws as it reveals the
things that are, the things which may be.
It pierces the third centre and removes all glamour and desire.
"A light is seen through the medium of
the lower light—a light of warmth and heat.
It pierces to the heart and in that light all forms are seen pervaded by
a glowing light. The world of lighted
forms is now perceived, linked each to each by light. This light is blue, and flaming is its
nature. Between the warm and reddish
light and this clear light there burns a glow of flame—a flame which must be
entered, ere the light of blue is entered and is used.
R&I, page 552
This progressive "creative
raising" necessarily produces a cycle of tremendous difficulty in the
life of the aspirant to initiation, for the microcosm undergoes—in his minute
living process—what the planetary Logos undergoes in a cosmic process. When—as is the case today—Humanity itself is
in process of becoming creative in the higher sense, and when this synchronises
with a major creative planetary activity, then a cycle of very great
disturbance eventuates which necessarily affects every individual within
"the race of men." Hence the
sexual disturbance to be seen everywhere, with the license present in every
country and the apparent breakdown of the marriage relation. This indicates the emergence eventually of a
creativity of such wondrous dimensions that the world will stand amazed;
nothing like it will have been seen before.
A creative planning for human well-being and a political expression,
implementing this planning, will demonstrate in every country; a creative
thinking will be apparent which will express itself in writing and in poetry;
creative imagining will produce the new
art, the new colours, the new architecture and the new culture; a creative
responsiveness to the "music of the spheres" will bring forth the new
music. All this will be in response
to the creative reorganisation and the newly directed energies which are
engaging the attention of the planetary Logos at this time.
R&I, page 731-732
Symbolically, nature is ever portraying to us the essential facts in
the annual progress of the four seasons, in the cycles of light and dark and in
the wonder of the emergence of beauty or [Page 732] colour or useful function
out of a seed which has struggled—because of its inherent life—into the light
of the sun.
R&I, page 761-769 -- STANZAS
FOR DISCIPLES
THE PATH
Seek not, O twice-blessed
One, to attain the spiritual essence before the mind absorbs. Not thus is wisdom sought. Only he who has the mind in leash, and sees
the world as in a mirror can be safely trusted with the inner sense. Only he who knows the five senses to be but
illusion, and that naught remains save the two ahead, can be admitted into the
secret of the Cruciform transposed.
The path that is trodden by
the Server is the path of fire that passes through his heart and leads to the
head. It is not on the path of pleasure,
nor on the path of pain that liberation may be taken or that wisdom comes. It is by the transcendence of the two, by the
blending of pain with pleasure, that the goal is reached, that goal that lies
ahead, like a point of light seen in the darkness of a winter's night. That point of light may call to mind the tiny
candle in some attic drear, but—as the path that leads to that light is trodden
through the blending of the pair of opposites—that pin point cold and
flickering grows with steady radiance till the warm light of some blazing lamp
comes to the mind of the wanderer by the way.
Pass on, O Pilgrim, with
steady perseverance. No candle light is
there nor earth lamp fed with oil. Ever
the radiance grows till the path ends within a blaze of glory, and the wanderer
through the night becomes the child of the sun, and enters within the portals
of that radiant orb.
THE CUP OF KARMA
There is a cup held to the
lips of those who drink, by four great Lords of Karma. The draught within that cup must all be
drained, down to the nethermost drop, e'er it is possible to fill the cup with
a purer, sweeter one. The seven Lords of
cosmic Love await the hour of filling.
The cup is naught. The draught within distils forth drop by
drop. It will not all be drained until
the final hour wherein the Pilgrim takes the cup. He lifts it from the hand of those Who,
bending, hold it to his lips. Until that
day the cup is held, and in inner blind dismay the Pilgrim drinks. After that hour he lifts his head he sees the
light beyond; he takes the cup and, with a radiant joy, drains to the very
dregs.
The contents of the cup are
changed; the bitter now becomes the sweet; the fiery essence then is lost in
cool, life-giving streams. The fire
absorbed within has burned and scarred and seared. The draught now taken soothes the burns; it
heals the scars and permeates the whole.
The Four bend down and see
the work. They release the cup of
Karma. The tender Lords of Cosmic Love
then mix another draught, and—when the cup is empty seen (emptied by conscious
will)—they pour within that which is needed now for broader, larger living. Until the cup has once been used, filled,
drained, and seen as naught, it cannot safely hold within that which is later
given.
But when to utter emptiness
the Pilgrim drains the cup then to the world in torment now he turns. With cup in hand (drained once, filled again,
and refused to selfish need) he tends the need of struggling men who tread the
way with him. The draught of love, of
sacred fire, of cool, health-giving stream he lifts not towards himself but
holds it forth to others. Upon the road
of weary man he becomes a Lord of Power—power gained through work accomplished,
power reached through conscious will.
Through the cup of Karma drained he gains the right to serve.
Look on, O Pilgrim, to the
goal. See shining far ahead [Page 763]
the glory that envelops and the light that naught can dim. Seize on the cup and swiftly drain, delay not
for the pain. The empty cup, the steady
hand, the firm and strong endeavour lead to a moment's agony and thence to
radiant life.
THE LISTENING PILGRIM
Listen, O Pilgrim, to the
chanting of the Word by the great Deva Lords.
Hush all earth vibration, still the restless strivings of lower mind,
and with ear intent hark to the sounds that rise to the throne of the
Logos. Only the pure in heart can hear,
only the gentle can respond.
The stormy sounds of all
earth struggle, the shrill vibration of the watery sphere, the crashing note
marking the place of thought, dims the sound and shuts out the tone. He who is silent, quiet and calm within, who
sees all by means of light divine and is not led by light reflected within the
threefold spheres, is he who will shortly hear.
From out the environing ether will strike a note upon his ear unlike the
tones that sound within the world terrestrial.
Listen, O Pilgrim, for when
that sound strikes in colourful vibration upon the inner sense, know that a
point has been achieved marking a great transition.
Watch then, O Pilgrim, for
the coming of that hour. With purified
endeavour mount nearer to that Sound.
Know when its tone steals through the misty dawn, or in the mellow sunlight
strikes soft upon the ear, that soon the inner hearing will become expanded
feeling and will give place to sight and perfect comprehension.
Know when the music of the
spheres comes to you note by note, in misty dawn or sunny noon, at cool of eve,
or sounding through the deep of night, that in their rhythmic tone lies secret
revelation.
AN ESOTERIC FRAGMENT
Where is the gate, O Lanoo,
which guards the triple-way?
Within the sacred heart of
Him Who is the threefold Path. I reach
the gate and pass within, entering thus the Heart, through the means of wide
compassion.
How many gates are there, O
Passer on the Way?
The gates are seven, each
leading to the centre of a great sphere of bliss. By the one who seeks to know, the first gate
must be found. That entered, in periodic
cycles he will find the other six.
You speak of wide compassion
as the key that opens wide the gates.
Explain in words the simplest the need that this involves.
The need of gentle mercy,
which knows and sees yet understands; the need of tears of crystal to wash away
a brother's sins; the need of fiery courage that can hold a brother's hand, and
lift and elevate him though all the world cry "nay"; the need of
comprehension, that has experienced and knows; the occult sense of oneness must
guide unto the gate.
What else will lead a man to
the portal of the Path?
Compassion first and
conscious oneness; then death to every form that holds and hides the life; next
wisdom linked with learning, and the wise use of the Word; speech of an occult
nature and the silence of the Centre, held in the noise of all the world.
Can you, O Lanoo, blend these
thoughts into a threefold charge?
First Oneness, then the Word,
and lastly Growth.
HEALING
A centre of violet, orbed by yellow, melts into
red. Yellow develops and protects. It ensheaths the nucleus. When you attain the significance of violet,
the laws of health and magnetic alleviation will be no longer sealed. The seal is being loosed by the devas of the
shadows; the yellow approaches the violet and the red progresses. The ranks approach and cooperation is
possible. In loosening the seal the
gateway opens. These three are the great
Helpers and in Their hands lies knowledge for the next generation. Approach.
THE HIDDEN PORTAL
An immense cone of fire is
seen in the midst of an arid desert.
A man stands in front of the
scene in an attitude of indecision. The
cone stands between the man and a fruitful country.
Rises the cone from out the
arid waste. Naught but its heat is felt,
naught but its glare is seen. Its flames
have swept the country and left the desert bare. It radiates forth a fire that devours all
before it. All green things die and the
dwellers on the sphere recede before its flame, scorching and burning, cruel
and superb.
White is its inner heart, red the surrounding flame,
and yellow the spreading fire. Like a mantle of
fierce heat it shuts out the vision and obscures the beyond. Like a pall of rosy red tinged with an orange
deep it veils all the distance.
From out the country full and
green, across the arid waste had travelled far the Pilgrim. Naught had he held and kept, naught save his
strong desire, back on the road he might not go, but onward to the fire.
From out that cone of fire,
echoing from its heart, swift to his ears a voice that said: "Behold the place of God."
From out the cone of fire a
note fell on his ear that touched a chord within his breast, and awakened quick
response.
Press on, O Pilgrim, towards
the flame; brave the fierce ardour of the fire; enter within the portal which
is hidden by its light.
The door is there, unseen,
unknown, watched by the Lords of Flame.
Deep in the heart of yellow, close by the outer rim, lies the key that
holds hid the secret. The threshold of
that inner door, the step unseen that must be reached, will meet the feet
within the fringe of flame. Put forth
the hand and touch the door, knock thrice with pure intent. A voice will answer to that call. The words will sound: "Who is it seeks the way?"
THE KEY
Key the first lies hid under
the Threshold, guarded by the Watcher.
He who breaks in must stoop and seize after a search of strenuous
decision. The hand that grasps the key
must have the nail-mark through the centre there located. When this is so, door the first will open.
Key the second lies across
the Threshold, over the heap of thorns.
From the centres in the feet must pour the blood that dissolves all
hindrances. In the bloodstained feet and
the nail-marked hands lies hid the secret.
Seek you them. Then door the
second will open to your touch.
Key the third lies half way
up. Just at the level of the heart that
key is seen. Before it can be seized and
used the spear must pierce and thus the blood pour forth, cleansing and making
whole. Only those thus purified can
grasp the key and pass through door the third.
AN OCCULT MESSAGE
The key is found; and with
the pressure of the hands in service of the Light and with a beating heart of
love, that key is turned. The door
swings wide open.
With hasty feet the one who
hastens towards the light enters that doors then waits. He holds the door ajar for those who follow
after and thus—in action—waits.
A Voice sounds forth: My brother, close that door, for [Page 767]
each must turn the key with his own hand and each must enter through that door
alone. The blazing light within the
Temple of the Lord is not for all at the same moment or the same hour of each
day. Each knows his hour. Your hour is Now.
So, brother, close that
door. Remember, those behind know not
the door has opened or the door has closed.
They see it not. Rest on that
thought, my brother, and passing through the door close it with care, and enter
upon another stage upon the upward Way—alone, yet not alone.
THE CRUCIFIXION
In the mystic Heart, with its
two lobes, lies the key to the reservoir.
In the out-going and the return the cross is made. Midway it stands, with the right hand and the
left hand path on either side. There the
man is crucified, with the two on either hand—one on the right and one on the
left. In the apprehension of the key, in
the opening and shutting of doors, lies life eternal. Know you and understand.
THE CROSS
In the Cross is hidden
Light. The vertical and horizontal in
mutual friction create; a vibrant Cross scintillates, and motion originates. When the vertical assumes the horizontal,
pralaya supervenes. Evolution is the
movement of the horizontal to upright positiveness. In the secret of direction lies the hidden
wisdom; in the doctrine of absorption lies the healing faculty; in the point
becoming the line, and the line becoming the cross is evolution. In the cross swinging to the horizontal lies
salvation and pralayic peace.
THE CHALICE
The lower chalice rises like
a flower of colour dark or somber. Dull
it appears to the outer vision, but within a light will sometime shine and
shatter the illusion.
Chalice the second rises from
out the lower sheath as does the flower from out the calix green. Of colour rose it [Page 768] is, and many
shades thereof; and to the onlooker it seems as if the colour might transcend
the inner shining light. But this is but
illusion which time itself dispels.
Chalice the third surmounts
all and opens wide in time its outspread petals. Blue does it appear and blends with the rose,
forming at first a deep impenetrable shade which shuts out the light.
Within the three, deep hidden
in the heart, tiny at first yet ever waxing greater, shines the light
divine. This light, through radiating
heat and innate divine vibration, constructs for itself a sheath of
iridescence. It emerges from the
threefold chalice as a floating bubble alights on a flower.
Within this iridescent sheath
burns the inner Flame, and in its turn it burns out the lower gross
material. E'en as the Path is neared,
clearer the light shines out. Forth
through the chalice gross and dark that forms the foundation shines the light
supernal, till all who see the radiation cry out within themselves: "Behold, a God is here."
Forth from the chalice rosy
red shines the inner glow, till soon the red
of earth desire becomes the glow of heaven's fire, and all is lost save
aspiration that shades not the cup with karmic
colour.
Forth from the chalice blue
shines and glows the inner light divine till all the forms are burnt and gone,
and naught is left save one divine abstraction.
Naught but the shells remain below, naught but the forms for use, and at
the culmination what strange event is seen?
Tarry, O Pilgrim, at the strange appearance, with bowed head watch the
progress of the fire. Slowly the chalice
threefold merges into an altar, and from that triple altar mounts the fire unto
its Source. As mounts and spreads the
inner flame, the beauty of the central sphere, lit with a radiance white,
causes the worlds to stand and cry:
"Behold, a God is here."
Ever the flames mount higher,
ever the warmth streams forth, till—in the moment of the hour set—the flame
destroys all, and all is gone, the work of ages passes, in a moment, into
nothingness.
But forth from the fourfold
fire, up from the altar of [Page 769] the ages, springs the Liberated One, the
Flame. Back to the fire of Cosmos
springs the dual flame. Into the Three
is absorbed the essence, and becomes one with its Source. The Spark becomes the Flame, the Flame
becomes the Fire, and forms part of the great Cosmic blaze that holds the
secret of the Five hidden within the heart.
A FIRE MANTRAM
The point of light within the
glowing arc, O Pilgrim on the Way, waxes and wanes as application hard or not
betrays the purpose within the heart.
That point is ever there,
unnoticed and unseen. Dark is the night
and drear, and sore the heart of the unilluminated Pilgrim. Dark is the night but drearness is not felt
when within the gloomy portal is seen the bright illusive light, the light that
flickers ever on ahead, enticing with its gleam the Pilgrim ever onward.
Six times the light may wax
and wane, six times the glow is felt, but at the seventh glowing hour the Flame
bursts forth.
Six times the Flame bursts
forth, six times the burning starts, but at the seventh hour the altar is lost
sight of and only Flame is seen.
Six times the circle of the
burning fire, six times the roaring furnace burns and separates, but at the
seventh naught is left save the ascending Flame, that mounts to the Triadal
Spirit.
Six times the Flame mounts
up, six times the cloud recedes, but at the seventh naught is seen save
everlasting fire.
Six times the flames absorbs
the water, six times the moisture disappears, but at the seventh great
absorption naught is left save iridescent fire.
Three times the fire
envelops, three times the sun recedes; at time the fourth the work is done, and
naught is left save Flame primordial.
That Flame absorbs, revolves, receives, and remains. When all that is has traversed the Flame,
then Time is not.
R&I, page 1251
2. The Teaching on the New Discipleship. This has been revolutionary where the older
schools of occultism are concerned. The
teaching includes:
a.
A presentation of the new attitude of the Masters to
Their disciples, due to the rapid unfoldment of the mind principle and the
growth of the principle of "free will." …
b.
Information as to the constitution of the Hierarchy
and of the various Ashrams …
c.
A presentation of the newer type of meditations, with its emphasis upon visualisation and the
use of the creative imagination …
TWM, page 37
4. The qualities, vibrations,
colours, and characteristics in all the kingdoms of nature are soul qualities, as are the
latent powers in any form seeking expression, and demonstrating
potentiality. In their sum total at the
close of the evolutionary period, they will reveal what is the nature of the
divine life and of the world soul,—that oversoul which is revealing the
character of God.
TWM, page 76
These old Scriptures are not read in the way modern students read
books. They are seen, touched and
realized. The meaning is disclosed in a
flash. Let me illustrate:—The words
"the One enunciates the word which drowns the triple sound" are depicted by a shaft of light ending in a
symbolic word in gold superimposed over three symbols in black, rose and green. Thus are the secrets guarded with care.
TWM, page 82
In the attempt to find out those laws, in order to conform to them, the
occultist begins to offset karma, and thus colours
not the astral light. The only
method whereby these laws can as yet be apprehended by the many who are
interested is by a close study of the vicissitudes of daily existence, as
spread over a long period of years. By
the outstanding features of a cycle of ten years, for instance, as they are
contrasted with the preceding or succeeding similar period a student can
approximate the trend of affairs and guide himself thereby. When the point in evolution is reached where
the student can contrast preceding lives, and gain knowledge of the basic colouring of his previous life
cycle, then rapid progress in adjusting the life to law is made. When succeeding lives can be likewise
apprehended by the student, and their colouring
seen and known, then karma (as known in the three worlds) ceases, and the
adept stands master of all causes and effects as they condition and regulate
his lower vehicle.
TWM, page 105
"When the radiant light of the Solar
Angel is fused with the golden light of the cosmic intermediary, it awakens
from darkness the rush light of anu, the speck."
The "cosmic intermediary" is the
term given to the etheric body, which is part and parcel of the universal
ether. It is through the etheric body
that all the energies flow, whether emanating from the soul, or from the sun,
or from a planet. Along those living
lines of fiery essence pass all the contacts that do not emanate specifically
from the tangible world.
The dark light of the tiny atoms of which the
physical vehicle is constructed is responsive to the stimulation passing down
from the soul into its vehicle, and, when the man is under control of the soul,
there eventuates the shining forth of the light throughout the body. This [Page 106] shows as the radiance
emanating from the bodies of adepts and saints, giving the effect of bright and
shining light.
TWM, page 112-113
The sub-ray on which a man is found, that
minor ray which varies from incarnation to incarnation, largely gives him his
coloring for this life. It is his
secondary hue. Forget not, the primary
ray of the Monad continues through the aeon.
It changes not. It is one of the
three primary rays that eventually synthesise the sons of men. The ray of the ego varies from round to
round, and, in more evolved souls, from race to race, and comprises one of the
five rays of our present evolution. It
is the predominating ray to which a man's causal body vibrates. It may correspond to the ray of the monad, or
it may be one of the complementary colours to the primary. The ray of the personality varies from [Page
112] life to life, till the gamut of the seven sub-rays of the Monadic ray has
been passed through.
Therefore, in dealing with people whose monads
are on a similar or complementary ray it will be found that they approach each
other sympathetically. We must remember
however that evolution must be far advanced for the ray of the monad to
influence extensively. So the majority
of cases come not under this category.
With average advanced men, who are struggling
to approximate themselves to the ideal, similarity of the egoic ray will
produce mutual comprehension, and friendship follows. It is easy for two people on the same egoic
ray to comprehend each other's point of view, and they become great friends,
with unshaken faith in each other, for each recognizes the other acting as he
himself would act.
But when (added to the egoic similarity of
ray) you have the same ray of personality, then you have one of those rare
things a perfect friendship, a successful marriage, an unbreakable link between
two. This is rare indeed.
When you have two people on the same
personality ray but with the egoic ray dissimilar, you may have those brief and
sudden friendships and affinities, that are as ephemeral as a butterfly. These things need bearing in mind and with
their recognition comes the ability to be adaptable. Clarity of vision results in a circumspect
attitude.
Another cause of difference can be due to the
polarization of the bodies. Unless this
too meets with recognition in dealing with people lack of comprehension ensues. When you use the term: "a man polarized in his astral
body"—you really mean a man whose ego works principally through that
vehicle. Polarity indicates the clarity
of the channel. Let me illustrate. The ego of the average [Page 113] man has its
home on the third sub-plane of the mental plane. If a man has an astral vehicle largely
composed of third sub-plane astral matter, and a mental vehicle mostly on the
fifth sub-plane, the ego will centre his endeavour on the astral body. If he has a mental body of fourth sub-plane
matter and an astral body of fifth sub-plane, the polarization will be mental.
When you speak of the ego taking more or less
control of a man you really mean that he has built into his bodies matter of
the higher sub-planes.
The ego takes control with interest only when
the man has almost entirely eliminated matter of the seventh, sixth, and fifth
sub-planes from his vehicles. When he
has built in a certain proportion of matter of the fourth sub-plane the ego
extends his control; when there is a certain proportion of the third sub-plane,
then the man is on the Path; when second sub-plane matter predominates then he
takes initiation, and when he has matter only of atomic substance, he becomes a
Master. Therefore, the sub-plane a man is
on is of importance, and the recognition of his polarization elucidates life.
TWM, page 190
Let us, for the sake of clarity, list these lotuses with their petal
numbers, and their location. Their colours are immaterial at present
from the standpoint of the student, for much that has been given out is
erroneous or in the nature of a blind, and in any case, the esoteric colours
are widely different from the exoteric.
TWM, page 221-222
It is interesting to note this for it is in itself an instance of the
effect of the astral plane upon the human brain, which in its uninformed
condition reverses the reality and sees things in an upside down state. The appearance of the astral plane when first
definitely seen by the "opened eye" of the aspirant is one of dense
fog, confusion, changing forms, interpenetrating and intermingling colours, and
is of such a kaleidoscopic appearance that the hopelessness of the enterprise
seems overwhelming. It is not light, or
starry or clear. It is apparently
impenetrable disorder, for it is the meeting ground of forces. Because the forces in the aspirant's [Page
222] own body are equally in disorder, he blends in with the surrounding chaos
to such an extent that it is at first almost impossible for the onlooking soul
to dissociate its own astral mechanism from the astral mechanism of humanity as
a whole, and from the astral mechanism of the world.
TWM, page 223
Through this illusory panorama, the aspirant
has to make his way, finding the clue or thread which will lead him out of the
maze, and holding fast to each tiny fragment of reality as it presents itself
to him, learning to distinguish truth from glamour, the permanent from the
impermanent and the certainty from the unreal.
As the Old Commentary puts it:
"Let the disciple seize hold of the tail
of the serpent of wisdom, and having with firmness grasped it, let him follow
it into the deepest centre of the Hall of Wisdom. Let him not be betrayed into the trap set for
him by the serpent of illusion, but let him shut his eyes to the colourful
tracery upon its back, and his ears to the melody of its voice. Let him discern the jewel, set in the
forehead of the serpent whose tail he holds, and by its radiance traverse the
miry halls of maya."
TWM, page 228
Through the activity of pain, he can visualize and become aware of pleasure, and heaven and hell become
to him realities. Through the activity
of the attractive life of his soul, he realizes the attraction of matter and of
form, and is forced to recognize the urge and pull of both of them. He learns to feel himself as "pendant
'twixt the two great forces", and, once the dualities are grasped, it
dawns on him slowly and surely that the deciding factor in the struggle is his
divine will, in contradistinction to his selfish will. [Page 229] Thus the dual forces play their part until
they are seen as two great streams of divine energy, pulling in opposite
directions, and he becomes then aware of the two paths, mentioned in our rule. One path leads back into the dreary land of rebirth,
and the other leads through the golden gate to the city of free souls. One is therefore involutionary and involves
him in deepest matter; the other leads him out of the body nature, and makes
him eventually aware of his spiritual body, through which he can function in
the kingdom of the soul.
TWM, page 298
The picture cannot be too blackly coloured,
for fear is the dominant astral energy at this time and sensitive humanity
succumbs all too easily to it. You
ask: What are the basic causes of fear? To that question, if carried far enough back
into the esoteric history of the solar system there is no intelligible answer
to be given. Only the advanced initiate
can comprehend. Fear has its roots in
the warp and woof of matter itself, and is par excellence, a formulation or
effect of the mind principle, and a result of mental activity.
TWM, page 346
A third class of fears—which aspirants contact more and more as they
grow in strength and usefulness in service—is based on the realisation of the
forces that are working against the Plan and hindering the work to be
done. Occult attacks and occult powers,
warring militantly against the aspirant will occur; they may make their power
felt in one or other of the vehicles and—in rare cases—where the aspirant is
important enough, on all at once.
Sometimes they will be attacks directed against the individual worker,
sometimes against groups of workers. To
counter them you employ the first method with the following additions and
changes. You link yourself up either as
an individual or forming one of a group with your own soul and with the Lodge
of Masters, [Page 347] not simply with your own Master, but with the
Brotherhood for which you are working.
Then when stillness has been achieved, you visualise those Masters of
whom you know, and raising your vibration higher still, you connect up, if
possible, with the Chohans, with the Christ and the Manu, according to the
line, religious or political, with which you may be working, and along which
the attack will come. You then pour
through the linking chain, and through all the vehicles, a stream of violet light. This
method is only for use when the need is dire and the necessity great. The reason for caution lies in the etheric
vehicle, which responds most violently to the colour violet.
TWM, page 353-354
Some souls can work only in mass [Page 354]
formation, banded together and unified by a common aspiration. Such are the majority of Christians, for
instance, in the churches. These,
knowing not the laws of occultism, and only sensing the inner truth, work on
broad lines of preparation. They are
aided by bands of lesser devas or angels who suggest, guide and control.
Others more advanced work in smaller
groups. They idealize more and in them
you see the thinkers and leaders of social reform, of humanitarian regeneration
and of church leadership, either Christian or Oriental. The higher devas guide them, the blue and yellow devas, as the former group
are guided by the blue and rose.
Back of them stand the still more advanced—the
aspirants, probationers and disciples of the world. They
work singly or in twos or threes and never in groups exceeding nine—the occult
significance of these numbers being necessary to the success of their
work. Great white and gold devas
attend their labours.
TWM, page 360
In the animal kingdom, through the development of sentiency and its
allied unfoldment through pain, They are bringing those types of forms into
line with the heart centre in Nature.
This is a phrase conveying a truth which cannot be more clearly
expressed until man has become more inclusive in his consciousness. Through colour in the vegetable Kingdom those
forms of divine manifestation are also brought into vibratory contact with that
centre of force in Nature which is analogous to the throat centre in man.
TWM, page 427-428
Later as a result of their telepathic
relationship and their united conferences, there may emerge certain esoteric
groups and schools for development in order more rapidly to equip them for world
service. In these schools [Page 428]
modes of meditation, the intensification of vibration and the laws of the
universe will be taught, and the right
use of colour and of sound. But all
will be subordinated to the idea of service and the uplift of humanity. Also the schools referred to in Letters on
Occult Meditation will gradually come into being.
TWM, page 431-434 -- NGWS
The group is and will be kept entirely
subjective. Its members are linked
telepathically, or they recognise each other through the quality of the work
they are doing in the outer world and the inclusiveness of the note they
sound. It is inspired from above by the
souls of its members and the Great Ones, and is energised into activity by the
need of humanity itself. It is composed
of living conscious souls, working through coordinated personalities. Its symbol is a golden triangle enclosing an even-armed cross with one diamond at the
apex of the triangle. This symbol is
never reproduced in form at all. It
shines above the heads of all who are in the group and cannot be seen by anyone
(not even a clairvoyant) except a group member, and then only if—for purposes
of work—his recognition needs stimulation.
The motto of the group is The Glory Of The One.
More I may not tell you now, but this will
give you some idea of the reality of the work that is going on. It may serve as an incentive to fresh effort
on the part of all working to equip themselves for selfless service.
We are to take up
now a very brief consideration of two types of energy of a major kind, which
are, in themselves, composed and blended of coordinating energies. The subject matter is therefore of so
advanced a nature that it is useless for the aspirant to give much time to its
study. Volumes would be necessitated
likewise if all that could be said were written, and it will only be possible
in this book to outline some broad generalisations, and to indicate certain
facts of interest. The main reason that
it profits us not to study these energies too closely is because the planetary
Spirit or Logos and the planetary Entity are the two forms in active
manifestation which respond most forcibly to the impact of these energies. The human being responds, and that only
subconsciously, [Page 432] because (in his form nature) he constitutes a part
of the planetary expression.
The planetary Spirit is a Being Who, ages ago,
passed through the state of consciousness which we call the human state and has
left it far behind. He (using the
personal pronoun simple for the sake of terminological clarity) has an origin
which lies outside the solar system altogether; his life is focussed in the
planet; his consciousness lies in realms beyond the concept of the highest
adept in our planetary Hierarchy. The
planetary Entity is the sum total of the forms which constitute the form
through which the planetary spirit is manifesting, and therefore is the
synthesis of the planetary physical, astral and mental elementals. For the purposes of our consideration, this
Entity is the sum total of all physical, mental, astral and mental forms,
which, blended and fused, constitute our planet. Each is the embodiment of energy, and these
two major streams which produce the form and the consciousness aspects of our
planetary existence make their impact on the human being. The life of the planetary spirit makes its
impact via the soul; and the life of the planetary Entity is registered through
the medium of the personality mechanism.
The duality of these energies is primarily
astral-buddhic, and the bias of the life forces and the general trend of the
impulses influencing humanity in this great cycle are the attractive energy of
the intuitional nature of the planetary Logos, and the potent force of the
astral (desire) body. In other words,
the astral elemental, which embodies the desire nature of the planetary Logos
is exceedingly potent, particularly in this present cycle, but the strength of
the spiritual and intuitional nature of the One in Whom we live and move and
have our being is steadily increasing.
On the one hand, you have the devastating expression of the wild hunt
for pleasure, of sex and of the crime incident to the satisfying of desire.
[Page 433] This characterises our present civilisation and is now at its
height; it may be said that it is even on the decline, little as you may sense
it. At the same time, there is found the
open door of initiation. Both these
opportunities (if I might so term them) are found simultaneously present, but
the strength of the one is weakening, and the trend towards the other is
growing. Thus the way out can be seen.
In the above paragraph, the dominant planetary
urges present in evolution are summed up and man's reaction to them noted.
Solar energies have also a dual effect. First, there is what we might call the pranic
effect, which is the result of the impact of solar force, emanating from the
physical sun. This produces definite
results upon the objective forms, and these are termed physical or vital. These enter the human body—via the spleen and
also via a centre found between the shoulder blades; this centre is between the
throat centre and the heart centre in the spinal column, but nearer the heart
than the throat. Secondly, there are
energies which emanate from what is esoterically called "the heart of the
sun"; these sweep through one or other of the planets in seven great
streams and power into the soul of man and produce that sensitivity which we
call awareness. These seven types of
energy produce the seven types of souls or rays, and in this thought you find
the secret of soul unity. During
manifestation, owing to the seven types of energy impacts, playing upon the
matter of space, one finds the seven types of soul, the seven fields of
expression, and the seven grades of consciousness and of ray
characteristics. These differentiations as you well know are like the colouring that the
prism takes when subjected to the rays of the sun, or to the tracery of pattern
found in reflection upon a limpid pool.
TWM, page 455
3. The form is the externalization of something that its Creator has:
a. Visualized.
b. Built intelligently and
"coloured" or "qualified", so as to meet the purpose for
which it was intended.
c. Vitalized by the potency of his desire and
the strength of his living thought.
d. Held in shape as long as it is needed in
order to perform its specific work.
e. Connected to himself by a magnetic
thread—the thread of his living purpose and the strength of his dominant will.
TWM, page 466-471
There are certain names given to these stages
in the occult archives which are suggestive and illuminating; they are of
course symbolic. It might be of interest
if I gave some of these ancient cryptic utterances which convey three items of
information, namely, the name of the stage, its esoteric colour, and its symbol.
I would like to point out, however, that these intriguing pieces of
information which I at times convey and which some of the students seem to
regard as of vital importance are of [Page 467] far less importance than the
injunction to live kindly, speak words of gentleness and of wisdom, and
practice self-forgetfulness. The occult
data is read and noted, the familiar instructions are skipped and
overlooked. We, who work with aspirants,
smile oft at the foolishness and lack of judgment evinced by those we
teach. Say to a student: Practice with steadfastness the law of
loving-kindness, and he will say that indeed he will attempt to do, but within
himself the very familiarity of the injunction palls and is deemed, at best, a
needed platitude. Say to the
student: I will give you some occult
phrases or some items of information anent the Great Ones, and with keenness,
with excitement, and with smug self-satisfaction and with a pleased curiosity,
he prepares for the important revelation.
Yet the earlier injunction is the conveyer of occult information and
indicates a law which—if rightly followed—leads to release and liberation. The latter concerns phenomena and the
knowledge of it leads not the weary pilgrim to the gates of heaven. Some of you need this reminder.
Those stages which precede the human are
omitted as none who will read these words possess the equipment to comprehend
their inner sense. We will begin
therefore with the stages in the human kingdom.
Stage I
The life has climbed the
stairway long through daily use of form.
Through the lesser three, with progress slow, the long path has been
travelled. Another door stands open now. The words sound forth: "Enter upon the way of real
desire."
The life, that only knows
itself as form, enshrouds itself in vivid red, the red of known desire, and
through the red all longed-for forms approach, are grasped and held, used and
discarded, until the red changes to rose [Page 468] and rose to palest pink,
and pink to white. Forth flowers then
the pure white rose of life.
The tiny rose of living life
is seen in bud; not yet the full blown flower.
Stage II
The picture changes
form. Another voice, coming from close
at hand utters another phrase. The life
continues on its way. "Enter the field
where children play and join their game."
Awakened to the game of life, the soul passes the gate.
The field is green and on its
broad expanse the many forms of the one moving Life disport themselves; they
weave the dance of life, the many patterned forms God takes. The soul enters "the playground of the
Lord" and plays thereon until he sees the star with five bright points,
and says: "My Star."
The star is but a point of
light, not yet a radiant sun.
Stage III
The way of red desire
fails. It loses its allure. The playground of the sons of God no longer
holds appeal. The voice which has twice
sounded from out the world of form sounds now within the heart. The challenge comes: "Prove thine own worth. Take to thyself the orange ball of thy
one-pointed purpose." Responsive to
the sounded word, the living soul, immersed in form, emerges from the many
forms and hews its onward way. The way
of the destroyer comes, the builder and again the tearer down of forms. The broken forms hold not the power to
satisfy. The soul's own form is now the
great desire, and thus there comes the entering of the playground of the mind.
But in these dreams and
fantasies, at times a vision comes—a vision of a folded lotus flower, close
petalled, [Page 469] tightly sealed, lacking aroma yet, but bathed in cold blue
light.
Orange and blue in some more
distant time will blended be, but far off yet the date. Their blending bathes the bud in light and
causes future opening. Let the light
shine.
Stage IV
Into the dark the life
proceeds. A different voice seems to
sound forth. "Enter the cave and
find your own; walk in the dark and on your head carry a lighted lamp. The cave is dark and lonely; cold is it and a
place of many sounds and voices. The
voice of the many sons of God, left playing on the playground of the Lord, make
their appeal for light. The cave is long
and narrow. The air is full of fog. The sound of running water meets the rushing
sound of wind, and frequent roll of thunder.
Far off, dim and most vaguely
seen, appears an oval opening, its color blue.
Stretched athwart this space of blue, a rosy cross is seen, and at the
centre of the cross, where four arms meet, a rose. Upon the upper limb, a vibrant diamond
shines, within a star five-pointed.
The living soul drives
forward towards the cross which bars his way to life, revealed and known.
Not yet the cross is mounted
and therefore left behind. But onward
goes the living soul, eyes fixed upon the cross, ears open to the wailing cries
of all his brother souls.
Stage V
Out into radiant life and
light! The cave is left behind; the
cross is overturned; the way stands clear.
The word sounds clear within the head and not within the heart. "Enter again the playground of the Lord
and this time lead the games." The
way upon the second [Page 470] tier of stairs stands barred, this by the soul's
own act. No longer red desire governs
all the life, but now the clear blue flame burns strong. Upon the bottom step of the barred Way he
turns back and passes down the stairs on to the playground, meeting dead shells
built in an earlier stage, stepping upon forms discarded and destroyed, and
holding forth the hands of helpfulness.
Upon his shoulder sits the bird of peace; upon his feet the sandals of
the messenger.
Not yet the utter glory of
the radiant life! Not yet the entering
into everlasting peace! But still the
work, and still the lifting of the little ones.
Here in symbolic form we have
pictures of human life and progress, of life in form and growing through the building
process which marks the creative work.
It is only a bald translation of some mantric phrases, and of some basic
symbols, and must in no way be considered to be anything except indicative of a
process, veiled and couched so that only those who know can understand. Esotericists will understand that these five
stages cover the life period of every form, no matter whether the creator is
cosmic, planetary or human.
TWM, page 477-478
Out of the present welter of speech and of
words, of lectures and of books, a few clear concepts will surely emerge which
will find an echo in the hearts of men.
Thus also will men be led on into the new age, wherein "talk will
die out and books come to naught" for the lines of subjective
communication [Page 478] will lie open.
Men will recognise that noise acts as a deterrent to telepathic
intercourse. The written word will not
be needed either, for men will use
symbols of light and colour to supplement through the eye what the
subjective hearing has recorded. But
that day is not yet, even though the radio and television are the first steps
in the right direction.
Putting the truth as simply as possible we
might state that through the complexity of much speech-making and book-writing,
ideas are now enabled to take form and so run through their cycle of
activity. But this method is as
unsatisfactory in the field of knowledge as is the ancient tallow dip in the
field of illumination. Electric light
has superseded it, and some day the true telepathic communication and vision
will take the place of speech and of writings.
TWM, Page 505-506
3. Learn, as you go to sleep, to withdraw the
consciousness to the head. This should
be practiced as a definite exercise as one falls to sleep. One should not permit oneself to drift off to
sleep, but should endeavor to preserve the consciousness intact until there is
a conscious passing out onto the astral plane.
Relaxation, close attention, and a steady drawing upwards to the center
in the head should be attempted, for until the aspirant has learned to be
steadily aware of all processes in going to sleep and to preserve at the same
time his positivity, there is danger in this work. The first steps must be taken with
intelligence and followed for many years until facility in the work of
abstraction is achieved.
4. Record and watch all phenomena connected
with the withdrawing process, whether followed in the meditation work or in
going to sleep. It will be found, for
instance, that many people wake with an almost painful start just as they have
dropped asleep. This is due to the
slipping out of the consciousness through a web which is not adequately clear
and through an orifice which is partially closed. Others may hear an intensely loud snap in the
region of the head. This is caused by
the vital airs in the head of which we are not usually aware and is produced
[Page 505] by an inner aural sensitivity which causes awareness of sounds
always present but not usually registered.
Others will see light as they fall asleep, or clouds of color, or
banners and streamers of violet, all of which are etheric phenomena. These phenomena which are of no real moment,
are all related to the vital body, to pranic emanations, and to the web of
light.
The carrying on of
this practice and the following of these four rules over a period of years will
do much to facilitate the technique of the death bed, for the man who has
learned to handle his body as he falls asleep, has an advantage over the man
who never pays any attention to the process.
In relation to the technique of dying it is
only possible for me at this time to make one or two suggestions. I deal not here with the attitude of the
attendant watchers, I deal only with those points which will make for an easier
passing over of the transient soul.
First, let there be silence in the
chamber. This is, of course, frequently
the case. It must be remembered that the
dying person may usually be unconscious.
This unconsciousness is apparent but not real. In nine hundred cases out of a thousand the
brain awareness is there, with a full consciousness of happenings, but there is
a complete paralysis of the will to express and complete inability to generate
the energy which will indicate aliveness.
When silence and understanding rule the sick room, the departing soul
can hold possession of its instrument with clarity until the last minute and
can make due preparation.
Later,
when more anent color is known, only orange lights will be permitted in the sick
room of a dying person, and these will only be installed with due ceremony when
there is assuredly no possibility of recovery.
Orange aids the focussing in the head, just as red stimulates [Page 506]
the solar plexus and green has a definite effect upon the heart and life
streams.
TWM, page 551
One of the secrets not yet revealed, fortunately, is concerned with the
question as to whether light violet is
the color of the highest or the lowest of the four and this will not be
revealed for some time to come.
[states in later book light is highest]
TWM, page 552-554 -- THE
PRECIPITATION OF THOUGHT FORMS
What is a precipitation? Many definitions could be given and most of
them—being clothed in words—would lose much of their true significance, but
some idea may be conveyed in the following terms:
"A precipitation is an aggregation of
energies arranged in a certain form, in order to express the idea of some
creative Thinker, and qualified or characterized by the nature of his thought
and held in that peculiar form as long as his thought remains dynamic."
These words are an attempt to express a symbol
found in the same ancient book, or rather compilation, referred [Page 553] to
earlier, in our consideration of Rule XIII.
Certainly these symbols emerging from the remote past constitute the
working tools, if I might so express it, of the Thinkers Who guide our racial
and planetary evolution. This particular
symbol might be described as follows:
A blazing sun forms the background and at the
very center of that sun appears an eye; projecting downwards toward the right
from this eye pours forth a stream of energy in the form of a beam of
light. It rays outward, widening towards
the end, into a second circle and in that circle is a cross resembling what is
called a Maltese cross. At the center of
the cross is another eye and within the eye the Sacred Word. Between the arms of the cross forming,
therefore, another cross, is the Swastika, the arms emerging from behind the
Maltese cross. At the bottom of the page
whereon this symbol is found are four geometrical forms. Some of these are referred to by H. P. B. and
were taken by her from this ancient picture.
They are well known but seldom applied by esotericists to the creative
work. They are the cube, the five
pointed star, the six pointed star and the eight sided diamond, superimposed
one upon the other. They constitute,
therefore, the base of the symbol. H. P.
B. refers also to the point, the line and the circle, but these, with the triangle,
have been exoterically applied to Deity and the manifested universe. Later these other forms will also be applied
to God and to man, in the exoteric sense.
But this will only be when the truths of the Ageless Wisdom are
universally recognized.
The laws of thought are the laws of creation,
and the entire creative work is carried forward on the etheric level. This constitutes practically a second
formula. The Creator of the solar system
confines his attention to the work performed on what we call the four higher
planes of our system. The lower three,
constituting the cosmic dense physical plane, are in the nature of
precipitation. [Page 554] They are objective, because the matter of space
responds to, or is attracted by the potency of the four higher etheric
vibrations. These, in their turn, are
motivated or swept into activity by the dynamic impact of the divine
thought. There is a similar procedure
where man is concerned. Just as soon as
man becomes a thinker and can formulate his thought, desire its manifestation
and can energize "by recognition" the four ethers, a dense physical
manifestation is inevitable. He will
attract by his pranic energy, colored by desire high or low, and animated by
the potency of his thought, just as much of the responsive matter in space as
is needed to give body to his form.
TWM, page 572
c. The capacity, therefore, to work at will through the medium of any
particular center. This is only possible
when the soul can dwell as the Ruler on the "throne between the
eyebrows" and when the Kundalini fire has been what is occultly called
raised. This fire has to pass up through
the spinal column and burn its way
through the web which separates center from center on the "Golden Rod of Power."
TWM, page 577
1. The sharp, two-edged sword is the discriminative faculty which
reaches to the roots of the chela's being and separates the real and true from
the false and impermanent. It is wielded
by the ego from the mental plane and is spoken of as the "Sword of cold blue steel."
Agni Yoga quotations
55. … Red banners are often raised by the hands of the old world filled
with prejudices. …
74. Each outer enwrapment distorts reality. One can strain oneself to
be alert in order to diminish the degree of false perception. Each evidence,
each reflection, each thought, projects its illusory color.
89. Harmony of emanations lies not in monotone only. Thus, the purple
aura is not averse to the green, and the pink one can bring into relief the
blue. In such complements are contained currents of special intensity. It is
even desirable to combine the colors, as a guarantee of the future rainbow. So
multiple is the gradation in the vibrations of luminous colors, that it is
impossible to duplicate them on the poor gamut of earth. Likewise, it is
impossible to inclose the symphony of the spheres into the scale of
earth-tones. Your lilac and purple have no analogy with Our heavenly purple.
130. … Arrows of excessive attention destroy the protecting net of
purple. …
131. … How then, without a study of all the
surrounding processes, can one unravel the knots of the apparatus of thought?
Somewhere pink rays flashed out-and
a prepared uprising of an entire nation died down. Somewhere the tides of
oceans altered and changes in the world's trade ensued. These are crude,
apparent examples, but how many most subtle causes and effects fill the space
and furrow the strata of humanity! …
138. You rebel justly against the sowing of the slime of life. Verily
animals act more cleanly, because their imagination
is unstained. Without fear one must eradicate the base habit of throwing
dust into the eyes of youth.
144. … On one hand the effect of realized sparks of
Fohat and the streams of Materia Lucida are benevolent, since they imbue the
spirit with the consciousness of the necessity of evolution. On the other hand,
they burn and threaten inflammation of the centers, being parts of the fiery
element. The manifestations of the fiery element can be compared to the tensest color of electricity; but the
light scale of electricity is limited, whereas the variety of the chemical light
sparks of Fohat are beyond imagination.
The types of the light of Fohat are like precious crystals. Nurturing the
psychic energy, Fohat paves the way to the far-off worlds. Whereas, Materia
Lucida weaves the strengthening of the consciousness. One strengthens, the
other forces one into the depthless pit of perfectionment. These are the
wonderful gifts of the great AUM!
191. … A Yogi does not fly to
nebulous regions but holds the silver cord of contact with the far-off worlds.
…
260. … One should examine the true correlations of sound and color. There
is a stage of development of psychic energy called luminous, and a being at
this step of evolution begins to emit light. This resonance of light is the
degree of approach to the realization of far-off worlds.
Observe the green color. It is the knowledge of the essence. Also out of space
are gathered other forces, equally unexpected. And the manifestation of the
rays of light is as a bridge to the fire of space.
296. Desire for knowledge issues from the forgotten knowledge of the
past; just as imagination is the
consequence of former experiences.
342. … The fire of space, in rare cases, can be
observed by the naked eye, when it becomes dense near the defensive purple border. The space becomes, as it were, filled with
small darts of flame. But for this manifestation a firm aura is needed which
will not suffer from the proximity of this condensed flame. …
371. … One recently began to experiment upon the
some of the organism. Also recently one recalled the purple defensive auric net. Both manifestations are related to the
domain of fire. The first represents the result of the work of phosphorus. The
second gives the power of fire which is attracted out of the space by a healthy
emanation of the organism. Thus, one should safeguard the fire of the body,
that its effect .
be powerful. Our medicines are
directed toward these fires. Not the muscles, but the fiery wave of nerves
merits attention. One must restore and nurture it. The plant brought by you from the mountains
will afford various useful experiments. The tense energy of the sap nurtures
the power of fire. But one should also study other means of its application.
The warmth connected with the essence of the leaves and the oil of the bark will
give the best strengthening remedy for the defensive
auric net.
375. … The Yogi is not
a preacher. He seldom appears; but the works entrusted grow with a special color. …
422. To simplify or to complicate? Even a child will prefer the former.
While speaking of conjuration, one may choose the way of complication,
gathering all the finest shades of the significance
of sound and color, but this way will be old and inflexible. The technic of
accumulation of sound and color is
great. …
461. Attainment, synthesis and sharp-sightedness are manifested by the
tri-colored flame. Attainment is
silvery; synthesis is green; vigilance is yellow. This triad is attained by
training the consciousness in various conditions of life. One can point out
this triad as the mastering of the conditions of self-sacrifice.
462. A part of the ancient mystery is called "the Chalice of
Attainment."
A four-sided chalice was filled
with the juice of the pomegranate. The inner surface of the vessel was covered
with silver and the exterior was made of red copper. The affirmation of
attainment was signified by the raising of the chalice. Then the juice was
poured on all four sides, as the symbol of readiness to serve the general good
without end.
466. I advise to notice upon what actions and thoughts the stars are
manifested, their color and their dimensions-these indications are as the bliss
of the worlds. The fire of space is seemingly metalized, and life becomes
filled with the radiance of the prana of reality. …
468. Multicolored sparks join
us with the spatial consciousness. But the Fire of Cosmos cannot be manifested
in full measure, as then the human essence would be reduced to ashes-except in
the case of one's consecration to the fire and his passing in his own essence
all steps of approach toward the element.
Likewise in studying the foundations of life, one can give varicolored signs of the foundations,
but the complete Teaching must not be and cannot be expounded; as the entirety
of life cannot be contained in pages and the Teaching has no intention to
create wound-up mechanical figures. Verily, no Teacher left a complete code of
the Teaching. Such a completeness would contradict Infinity and would
presuppose the complete limitation of the followers. …
490. … If the spark strikes from a manuscript lines
which ought to be erased, and underlines with blue light that which deserves commendation, it means we have
received a powerful coworker. …
502. One may foresee how some will begin psychic experiments with
plants but without results. It may be expected that someone will reproach the
Teaching for inexact indications but will not think about the state of his own
psychic energy.
One must not suspect a lack of
preciseness in indications when I say that psychic energy must not only be
strengthened but should also be refined. It will be strengthened under the
waves of fire, when the aura will begin to take on a purple color due to tensity. It will begin to refine from
alertness, sharp sightedness and subtlety of thinking. How may one more exactly
term the refinement of the current of thought when the formulae of the future
resound in rapture? …
515. How can the blue fire be
transmuted into purple? The tension of psychic energy will send out ruby-like
arrows, and their growth will pierce the blue of consciousness.
535. Try at will to see parts of your own aura. You will find it
impossible, because besides your wish the law of psychic energy needs suitable
conditions. Such conditions do not rise spontaneously; they have to be accumulated
on the ground of higher influences. But the way to higher influences is also
not easy, as they find access only through open gates. Each deviation from
communion with the hearths of the subtlest energies closes the gates. Besides
that, one has to understand what governs the fruitfulness of this communion. It
depends not only on the pressure of striving, but also on the careful
consideration of surrounding conditions.
Sometimes a transitory time of silence is the best accumulator. The
consciousness, according to the degree of straight-knowledge, gives the
understanding of what action corresponds to necessity. Amidst the compound parts of developed auras
it is especially difficult to see the saturated
green color and the noble ruby color. Two contrasts are emerald and ruby. The
first is synthesis and the second is self-sacrifice of attainment. In
clouded manifestations both may meet, but to see them pure is as rare as are
synthesis and attainment. Emerald is
nearer to the Chalice, and ruby to the Eye of Brahma.
549. It is correct to define the Kundalini as an abstract principle.
When the conditions of earthly life were crude, need arose to attract the
spirit into the higher spheres. Previously, the Eye of Brahma held priority;
then it was replaced by the triumph of Kundalini. But the attainment of Samadhi
did not protect humanity from the horror of slavery and treason. Now is the time to insist upon the synthesis
of action. Straight-knowledge will give this synthesis of earthly existence.
The treasure of straight-knowledge is contained in the Chalice, therefore one
should add to the two primary sources the blossoming of the third center. Let
the rainbow of Kundalini attract one
upward, but on earth earthly construction is needed. One has to supply for the
pillar a foundation, as handwriting for thought. The long-silenced Chalice will
again come to life, and humanity will tread a new path. Three Lords, three
centers, will comprise the cooperation here.
Whoever understands the addition of the Chalice to the Kundalini will
understand how the father transmits the earthly kingdom to the son. Kundalini
is the father, the generator of the ascent. The Chalice is the son, aroused by
the father. Whoever realizes the essence of the father will, at the change of
races, understand the son. The Chalice of attainment initiates action. So
nothing is rejected, but only strengthened. Let the Eye of Brahma be the
natural supplement to this condition.
590. … People often pass by
without noticing even loud colors. If red
is sometimes even taken for green, the same distortion may be met in all
595. You already know that the crystal of psychic energy possesses the
properties of a magnet. From the space it attracts parts of electrons of Teros.
The emanations of the approaching waves surround man, and color with their
chemism the approaching particles of energy. This is the chemical basis of
so-called colored stars. The planetary
bodies radiate with different lights. Similarly scientific are the sparks of
psychic energy. The fires of the centers also radiate differently according to
the chemism of the metals of the body.
Secret Doctrine
quotations --
Vol. I
Page 108
The first and greatest Reformer who founded the "Yellow-Caps," Gyalugpas. He was
born in the year 1355 A.D. in Amdo, and was the Avatar of Amitabha, the
celestial name of Gautama Buddha.
Page 125
For what was the meaning of the square tabernacle raised by Moses in
the wilderness, if it had not the same cosmical significance? "Thou shalt
make an hanging . . . of blue, purple,
and scarlet" and "five pillars of shittim wood for the hanging .
. . four brazen rings in the four corners thereof . . . boards of fine wood for
the four sides, North, South, West, and East . . . of the Tabernacle . . . with
Cherubims of cunning work."
Page 184
* Nature never repeats herself, therefore the anthropoids of our day
have not existed at any time since the middle of the Miocene period; when, like
all cross breeds, they began to show a tendency, more and more marked as time
went on, to return to the type of their first parent, the black and yellow gigantic Lemuro-Atlantean.
Page 205
"The abodes of Fohat are many," it
is said. "He places his four fiery (electro-positive) Sons in the
"Four circles"; these Circles are the Equator, the Ecliptic, and the
two parallels of declination, or the tropics -- to preside over the climates of
which are placed the Four mystical Entities. Then again: "Other seven
(sons) are commissioned to preside over the seven hot, and seven cold lokas
(the hells of the orthodox Brahmins) at the two ends of the Egg of Matter (our
Earth and its poles). The seven lokas are also called the "Rings,"
elsewhere, and the "Circles." The ancients made the polar circles
seven instead of two, as Europeans do; for Mount Meru, which is the North Pole,
is said to have seven gold and seven silver steps leading to it.
The strange statement made in one of the
Stanzas: "The Songs of Fohat and his Sons were radiant as the noon-tide
Sun and the Moon combined;" and that the four Sons on the middle four-fold
[[Vol.
1, Page]] 205 SEEING SOUND, HEARING COLOURS.
Circle "saw their father's songs and
heard his Solar-selenic radiance;" is explained in the Commentary in these
words: "The agitation of the Fohatic Forces at the two cold ends (North
and South Poles) of the Earth which resulted in a multicoloured radiance at
night, have in them several of the properties of Akasa (Ether) colour and sound
as well." . . . . . . "Sound is the characteristic of Akasa (Ether):
it generates air, the property of which is Touch; which (by friction) becomes
productive of Colour and Light." . . . . . . (Vishnu Purana.)
Perhaps the above will be regarded as archaic
nonsense, but it will be better comprehended, if the reader remembers the
Aurora Borealis and Australis, both of which take place at the very centres of
terrestrial electric and magnetic forces. The two poles are said to be the
store-houses, the receptacles and liberators, at the same time, of Cosmic and
terrestrial Vitality (Electricity); from the surplus of which the Earth, had it
not been for these two natural "safety-valves," would have been rent
to pieces long ago. At the same time it is now a theory that has lately become
an axiom, that the phenomenon of polar lights is accompanied by, and productive
of, strong sounds, like whistling, hissing, and cracking.
Page 238
"Life, like a dome of many-coloured glass, Stains the white radiance of
Eternity" --
Page 251-253
The faculties, or what is perhaps the best available term, the characteristics
of matter, must clearly bear a direct relation always to the senses of man. Matter has extension, colour, motion
(molecular motion), taste, and smell, corresponding to the existing senses of
man, and by the time that it fully develops the next characteristic -- let
us call it for the moment PERMEABILITY -- this will correspond to the next
sense of man -- let us call it "NORMAL CLAIRVOYANCE;" thus, when some
bold thinkers have been thirsting for a fourth dimension to explain the passage
of matter through matter, and the production of knots upon an endless cord,
what they were really in want of, was a sixth characteristic of matter. The three dimensions belong really but to
one attribute or characteristic of matter -- extension; and popular common sense
justly rebels against the idea that under any condition of things there can be
more than three of such dimensions as length, breadth, and thickness. These
terms, and the term "dimension" itself, all belong to one plane of
thought, to one stage of evolution, to one characteristic of matter. So long as
there are foot-rules within the resources of Kosmos, to apply to matter, so
long will they be able to measure it three ways and no more; and from the time
the idea of measurement first occupied a place in the human understanding, it
has been possible to apply measurement in three directions and no more. But
these considerations do not militate in any way against the certainty that in
the progress of time -- as the faculties of humanity are multiplied -- so will
the characteristics of matter be multiplied also.
[VSK: relates to 3 of the trinity? -- ]
p. 259
Thus, in the first Round,
the globe, having been built by the primitive fire-lives, i.e., formed into a
sphere -- had no solidity, nor qualifications, save a cold brightness, nor form nor colour; it is only towards
the end of the First Round that it developed one Element which from its
inorganic, so to say, or simple Essence became now in our Round the fire we
know throughout the system. The Earth was in her first rupa, the essence of
which is the Akasic principle named *** "that which is now known as, and
very erroneously termed, Astral Light, which Eliphas Levi calls "the
imagination of Nature,"|| probably to avoid giving it its correct name, as
others do.
p. 289
(xvii.) "The Initial Existence in the first twilight of the
Maha-Manwantara (after the MAHA-PRALAYA that follows every age of Brahma) is a
CONSCIOUS SPIRITUAL QUALITY. In the manifested WORLDS (solar systems) it is, in
its OBJECTIVE SUBJECTIVITY, like the film from a Divine Breath to the gaze of
the entranced seer. It spreads as it issues from LAYA** throughout infinity as
a
colourless spiritual fluid. It is on the SEVENTH PLANE, and in its
SEVENTH STATE in our planetary world.***
p. 408
"The seven Northern constellations make up the Black Warrior; the seven Eastern
(Chinese autumn) constitute the White
Tiger; the seven Southern are the Vermilion
Bird; and the seven Western (called Vernal) are the Azure Dragon. … … … the four genii of the four cardinal points; and
the Chinese, the Black Warrior, White Tiger, Vermilion Bird, and Azure Dragon,
is called in the Secret Books, -- the "Four Hidden Dragons of Wisdom"
and the "Celestial Nagas." Now, as shown, the seven-headed or septenary
DRAGON-LOGOS had been in course of time split up, so to speak, into four
heptanomic parts or twenty-eight portions.
p. 434
Isis is also mystic
Nature and also Earth; and her cow's horns identify her with Vach. The latter,
after having been recognised in her highest form as para, becomes at the lower
or material end of creation -- Vaikhari. Hence she is mystic, though physical,
Nature, with all her magic ways and properties. … Again, as goddess of Speech and of Sound, and a permutation of Aditi --
she is Chaos, in one sense. At any
rate, she is the "Mother of the
gods," and it is from Brahma (Iswara, or the Logos) and Vach, as from
Adam Kadmon and Sephira, that the real manifested theogony has to start.
Beyond, all is darkness and abstract speculation. With the Dhyan Chohans, or
the gods, the Seers, the Prophets and the adepts in general are on firm ground.
Whether as Aditi, or the divine Sophia of the Greek Gnostics, she is the mother of the seven sons:
the "Angels of the Face," of the "Deep," or the "Great Green One" of the "Book
of the Dead." Says the Book of Dzyan (Knowledge through meditation) --
p. 462
The tent which contained the Holy of Holies " was a Cosmic Symbol,
sacred, in one of its meanings, to the Elements, the four cardinal points, and
ETHER. Josephus shows it built in white,
the colour of Ether. And this explains also why, in the Egyptian and the
Hebrew temples -- according to Clemens Alexandrinus -- a gigantic curtain,
supported by five pillars, separated the sanctum sanctorum (now represented by
the altar in Christian churches) wherein the priests alone were permitted to
enter, from the part accessible to the profane. By its four colours the curtain
symbolized the four principal Elements, and signified the knowledge of the
divine that the five senses of men can enable man to acquire with the help of
the four Elements.
p. 464
The four-fold Jupiter, as the four-faced Brahma -- the aerial, the
fulgurant, the terrestrial, and the marine god -- the lord and master of the
four elements, may stand as a representative for the great Cosmic gods of every
nation. While passing power over the fire to Hephaistos-Vulcan, over the sea,
to Poseidon-Neptune, and over the Earth, to Pluto-Aidoneus -- the AERIAL Jove
was all these; for AETHER, from the first, had pre-eminence over, and was the
synthesis of, all the elements.
Tradition points to a grotto, a vast cave in the deserts of Central
Asia, whereinto light pours through its four seemingly natural apertures or
clefts placed crossways at the four cardinal points of the place. From noon
till an hour before sunset that light streams in, of four different colours, as
averred -- red, blue, orange-gold, and
white -- owing to some either natural or artificially prepared conditions
of vegetation and soil. The light converges in the centre around a pillar of
white marble with a globe upon it, which represents our earth. It is named the
"grotto of Zaratushta."
p. 525
. . . Here are two elements in the Universe, the one is ponderable
matter . . . The second element is the
all-pervading Ether, solar-fire. It is without weight, substance, form, or colour; it is matter infinitely
divisible, and its particles repel each other; its rarity is such that we have
no word, except ether,* by which to express it. It pervades and fills space,
but alone it too is quiescent -- dead.** We bring together the two elements,
the inert matter, the self-repulsive Ether (?) and thereupon dead (?)
ponderable matter is vivified"; [Ponderable matter may be inert but never
dead -- this is Occult Law. -- H.P.B.] . . . "through the particles of the
ponderable substance the ether [Ether's second principle. -- H.P.B.]
penetrates, and, so penetrating, it combines with the ponderable particles and
holds them in mass, holds them
together in bond of union; they are dissolved in the Ether."
p. 528
When modern Science has explained to its audience the late achievements
of Bunsen and Kirchoff, and shown the seven colours, the "primary" of
a ray which is decomposed in a fixed order on a screen; and described the respective
lengths of luminous waves, what has it proved? It has justified its reputation
for exactness in mathematical achievement by measuring even the length of a
luminous wave -- "varying from about seven
hundred and sixty millionths of a millimetre at the red end of the spectrum to
about three hundred and ninety-three millionths of a millimetre at the violet
end." But when the exactness of the calculation with regard to the
effect on the light-wave is thus vindicated, Science is forced to admit that the
force (which is the supposed cause) is believed to produce "inconceivably
minute undulations" in some medium -- "generally regarded as
identical with the ethereal medium"** -- and that medium itself is still
only -- a "hypothetical agent!"
p. 534
The Vedic Aryans were as familiar with the mysteries of sound and
colour as our physiologists are on the physical plane, but they had mastered
the secrets of both on planes inaccessible to the materialist. They knew of a
double set of senses; spiritual and material.
p. 534-535
"State this wonderful mystery . . . . . Hear the assignment of
causes exhaustively. The nose, and the tongue, and the eye, and the skin, and
the ear as the fifth (organ of sense) Mind and Understanding,* these seven
(senses) should be understood to be the causes of (the knowledge of their)
qualities. Smell, and taste, and colour,
sound, and touch as the fifth, the object of the mental operation, and the
object of the Understanding (the highest spiritual sense or perception), these
seven are causes of action.
[colour as 3rd in order of senses -- sight, 3 and 5?]
______________
Vol . II
Page 17
15. SEVEN TIMES SEVEN SHADOWS OF FUTURE MEN WERE BORN, EACH OF HIS OWN COLOUR AND KIND. …
…
…
18. THE FIRST WERE THE SONS OF YOGA. THEIR SONS THE CHILDREN OF THE YELLOW FATHER AND THE WHITE MOTHER.
Page 20
38. THUS TWO BY TWO ON THE SEVEN ZONES, THE THIRD RACE GAVE BIRTH TO
THE FOURTH-RACE MEN; THE GODS BECAME NO-GODS; THE SURA BECAME A-SURA.
39. THE FIRST, ON EVERY ZONE, WAS MOON-COLOURED;
THE SECOND YELLOW LIKE GOLD; THE
THIRD RED; THE FOURTH BROWN, WHICH BECAME BLACK WITH SIN. THE
FIRST SEVEN HUMAN SHOOTS WERE ALL OF ONE COMPLEXION. THE NEXT SEVEN BEGAN
MIXING.
Page 43
Adam-Jehovah, Brahma and Mars
are, in one sense, identical; they are all symbols for primitive or initial
generative powers for the purposes of human procreation. Adam is red, and so also are Brahma-Viraj and Mars -- god and
planet. Water is the blood of the Earth;
therefore, all these names are connected with Earth and Water. "It takes earth and water to create a
human soul," says Moses. Mars is identical with Kartikeya God of War
(in one sense) -- which god is born of the Sweat of Siva, Siva Gharmaja and the
Earth. In the Mahabharata he is shown as born without the intervention of a
woman. And he is also called "Lohita," the red, like Adam, and the other "first men."
[from footnote page 125] -- The Hindu Mars is, like Adam, born from no
woman and mother. With the Egyptians, Mars was the primeval generative
Principle, and so are Brahma, in exoteric teaching, and Adam, in the Kabala.
Page 93
… assertions of St. John's vision, referred to in his Apocalypse, about
"the great red Dragon having
seven heads and ten horns, and seven crowns upon his heads," whose
"tail drew the third part of the stars of heaven and did cast them to the
earth"
page 107
The following order on parallel lines may be
found in the evolution of the Elements and the Senses; or in Cosmic terrestrial
"MAN" or "Spirit," and mortal physical man: --
1.
Ether ... Hearing ... Sound. 2. Air
... Touch ... Sound and Touch. 3.
Fire, or Light ... Sight ... Sound, Touch and Colour. 4. Water ... Taste ... Sound, Touch,
Colour and Taste. 5. Earth ... Smell
... Sound, Touch, Colour, Taste and Smell.
As seen, each Element adds to its own
characteristics, those of its predecessor; as each Root-Race adds the
characterizing sense of the preceding Race.
Page 178
Even the exoteric appearance of Dhyani Chenresi is suggestive of the
esoteric teaching. He is evidently, like Daksha, the synthesis of all the
preceding Races and the progenitor of all the human Races after the Third, the
first complete one, and thus is represented as the culmination of the four
primeval races in his eleven-faced form. It is a column built in four rows,
each series having three faces or heads of different complexions: the three
faces for each race being typical of its three fundamental physiological
transformations. The first is white
(moon-coloured); the second is yellow; the third, red-brown; the fourth, in
which are only two faces -- the third face being left a blank -- (a reference
to the untimely end of the Atlanteans) is brown-black. Padmapani (Daksha)
is seated on the column, and forms the apex.
p. 193
Upon seeing this (state of things), the kings and Lords of the Last
Races (of the Third and the Fourth) placed the seal of prohibition upon the
sinful intercourse. It interfered with Karma, it developed new (Karma).* They
(the divine Kings) struck the culprits with sterility. They destroyed the Red and Blue Races.** In another we find: -- "There were blue and red-faced animal-men even in
later times; not from actual intercourse (between the human and animal
species), but by descent." And still another passage mentions: -- "Red-haired, swarthy men going on
all-fours, who bend and unbend (stand erect and fall on their hands again) who
speak as their forefathers, and run on their hands as their giant
fore-mothers."
** Rudra, as a Kumara, is Lilalohita -- red and blue.
… A Tahitian tradition states that man was created out of Araea, "red Earth."
p. 198
… as each of the seven races is divided into four ages -- the Golden, Silver, Bronze,
and Iron Age -- so is every smallest division of such races.*** Speech then
developed, according to occult teaching, in the following order: --
I.
Monosyllabic speech; that of the first approximately fully developed
human beings at the close of the Third
Root-race, the "golden-coloured," yellow-complexioned men, after
their separation into sexes, and the full awakening of their minds. Before
that, they communicated through what would now be called
"thought-transference," though, with the exception of the Race called
the "Sons of Will and Yoga" -- the first in whom the "Sons of
Wisdom" had incarnated -- thought was but very little developed in nascent
physical man, and never soared above a low terrestrial level. Their physical
bodies belonging to the Earth, their Monads remained on a higher plane
altogether. Language could not be well developed before the full acquisition
and development of their reasoning faculties. This monosyllabic speech was the
vowel parent, so to speak, of the monosyllabic languages mixed with hard
consonants, still in use amongst the yellow races which are known to the
anthropologist.* [* The present yellow
races are the descendants, however, of the early branches of the Fourth Race.]
II. These linguistic characteristics developed
into the agglutinative languages.
The latter were spoken by some Atlantean races, while other parent stocks of
the Fourth Race preserved the mother-language. And as languages have their
cyclic evolution, their childhood, purity, growth, fall into matter, admixture
with other languages, maturity, decay and finally death,** so the primitive speech
of the most civilized Atlantean races -- that language, which is referred to as
"Rakshasi Bhasa," in old Sanskrit works -- decayed and almost died
out. While the "cream" of the
Fourth Race gravitated more and more toward the apex of physical and intellectual
evolution, thus leaving as an heirloom to the nascent Fifth (the Aryan) Race
the inflectional, highly developed languages, the agglutinative decayed and
remained as a fragmentary fossil idiom, scattered now, and nearly limited to
the aboriginal tribes of America.
p. 223
"A religious belief, common to Malacca and Polynesia, that is to
say, to the two opposite extremes of the Oceanic world, affirms 'that all these
islands once formed two immense countries, inhabited by yellow men and black men, always at war; and that the gods, wearied
with their quarrels, having charged Ocean to pacify them, the latter swallowed
up the two continents, and, since, it has been impossible to make him give up
his captives. Alone, the mountain-peaks and high plateaux escaped the flood, by
the power of the gods, who perceived too late the mistake they had committed.'
… This last tradition corroborates the one given from the "Records of the
Secret Doctrine." The war mentioned between the yellow and the black men, relates to a struggle between the
"sons of God" and the "sons of giants," or the inhabitants
and magicians of Atlantis.
p. 227
Strictly speaking, it is only from the time of the Atlantean, brown and yellow giant Races, that one ought to speak of
MAN, since it was the Fourth race only
which was the first completely human species, however much larger in size
than we are now. In "Man" (by two chelas), all that is said of the
Atlanteans is quite correct. It is chiefly that race which became "black with sin" that brought the
divine names of the Asuras, the Rakshasas and the Daityas into disrepute, and
passed them on to posterity as the names of fiends. For, as said, the Suras
(gods) or Devas having incarnated in the wise men of Atlantis, the names of
Asuras and Rakshasas were given to the Atlanteans; which names, owing to their incessant conflicts with the last remnants
of the Third Race and the "Sons of Will and Yoga," have led to
the later allegories about them in the Puranas. "Asura was the generic
appellation of all the Atlanteans who were the enemies of the spiritual heroes
of the Aryans (gods)."
p. 249
Thus in the 29th Kalpa -- in this case a reference to the
transformation and evolution of the human form which Siva ever destroys and
remodels periodically, down to the manvantaric great turning point about the
middle of the Fourth (Atlantean) Race -- in the 29th Kalpa, Siva, as
Swetalohita, the root Kumara, becomes,
from moon-coloured, white; in his next transformation -- he is red (and in this
the exoteric version differs from the Esoteric teaching); in the third --
yellow; in the fourth -- black.
Esotericism now classes these
seven variations, with their four great divisions, into only three distinct
primeval races -- as it does not take into consideration the First Race, which
had neither type nor colour, and hardly an objective, though colossal form. The evolution of
these races, their formation and development, went pari passu and on parallel
lines with the evolution, formation, and development of three geological strata,
from which the human complexion was as much derived as it was determined by the
climates of those zones. It names three great divisions, namely, the RED-YELLOW, the BLACK, and the BROWN-WHITE.
The Aryan races, for instance, now
varying from dark brown, almost black, red-brown-yellow, down to the whitest
creamy colour, are yet all of one and the same stock -- the Fifth Root-Race --
and spring from one single progenitor, called in Hindu exotericism by the
generic name of Vaivasvata Manu … The
light yellow is the colour of the first SOLID human race, which appeared after
the middle of the Third Root Race (after its fall into generation -- as
just explained), bringing on the final changes. For, it is only at that period
that the last transformation took place, which brought forth man as he is now,
only on a magnified scale. This Race
gave birth to the Fourth Race; "Siva" gradually transforming that
portion of Humanity which became "black with sin" into red-yellow
(the red Indians and the Mongolians being the descendants of these) and finally
into Brown-white races -- which now, together with the yellow Races, form the
great bulk of Humanity.
p. 269
Then comes Zeus -- Jupiter, who dethrones his father in his turn.**
Jupiter the Titan, is Prometheus, in one sense,*** and varies from Zeus, the
Great "Father of the Gods." He is the "disrespectful son"
in Hesiod. Hermes calls him the "Heavenly man" (Pymander); and even
in the Bible he is found again under the name of Adam, and, later on -- by
transmutation -- under that of Ham. Yet these are all personifications of the
"sons of Wisdom." The necessary corroboration that Jupiter belongs to the purely human
Atlantean cycle -- if Uranus and
Kronos who precede him are found insufficient -- may be found in Hesiod,
who tells us that the Immortals have made men and created the Golden and the Silver age (First and Second Races); while Jupiter
created the generations of Bronze (an admixture of two elements), of Heroes,
and the men of the age of Iron.
p. 271
"The successive races, destroyed and replaced by others," he
says, "without any period of transition, are characterized in Greece by
the name of metals, to express their ever-decreasing value. Gold, the most brilliant and precious of
all, symbol of purity . . . . qualifies the first race. . . . . The men of the
second race, those of the age of Silver, are already inferior to the first.
Inert and weak creatures, all their life is no better than a long and stupid
infancy. . . . They disappear. . . . The men of the age of Bronze are robust
and violent (the third race); their strength is extreme. They had arms made of
bronze, habitations of bronze; used nought but bronze. Iron, the black metal,
was yet unknown"
p. 282
It is these sacred "Four" who have been allegorized and symbolized
in the "Linga Purana," which states that Vamadeva (Siva) as Kumara is
reborn in each Kalpa (Race in this instance), as four youths -- four, white;
four, red; four, yellow; and four, dark or brown.
p. 319
The last survivors of the fair child of the White Island (the primitive Sveta-dwipa) had perished ages before.
Their (Lemuria's) elect, had taken shelter on the sacred Island (now the
"fabled" Shamballah, in the Gobi Desert), while some of their
accursed races, separating from the main stock, now lived in the jungles and
underground ("cave-men"), when the golden yellow race (the Fourth) became in its turn "black with
sin."
p. 351
History -- or what is called history -- does not go further back than
the fantastic origins of our fifth sub-race, a "few thousands" of
years. It is the sub-divisions of this first sub-race of the Fifth Root-Race
which are referred to in the sentence, "Some yellow, some brown and black, and some red, remained." The
"moon coloured" (i.e., the First and the Second Races) were gone
for ever --
p. 627
To demonstrate more clearly the seven in Nature, it may be added that
not only does the number seven govern
the periodicity of the phenomena of life, but that it is also found
dominating the series of chemical elements, and equally paramount in the world of sound and in that of colour as
revealed to us by the spectroscope. This number is the factor, sine qua non, in
the production of occult astral phenomena.
p. 637
"In that forest are seven large trees (the Senses, Mind and Understanding,
or Manas and Buddhi included), seven fruits and seven guests; seven hermitages,
seven (forms of) concentration, and seven (forms of) initiation. This is the
description of the forest. That forest is filled with trees producing splendid
flowers and fruits of five
colours."